Home

Link to 1689 Manual

Contents

1. Test Fixture for the 1689 Digibndge Install the axial lead adaptors in the test fixture in position for accepting the largest of the verifying DUTs in Table 5 1 Test Fixture for the 1689M Digibridge Install the BNC cable and remote test fixture as described in paragraph 3 2 4 Install the axial lead adaptors in the test fixture in position for accepting the largest of the verifying DUTS in Table 5 1 SERVICE 5 5 Open Circuit Zero Press the Cs D key Press 1 6 8 9 SHIFT OPEN Keep hands and all objects at least 10 cm from fixture contacts Press START to initialize zeroing operation Wait until the GO indicator lights Short Circuit Zero Short the fixture with a piece of copper wire pressed into the test fixture adaptors where the DUT leads will go Do not move the test fixture adaptors Press 1 6 8 9 SHIFT SHORT Press START to initialize zeroing operation Wait until the GO indicator lights again NOTE For maximum accuracy this zeroing procedure should be performed at the start of each day and every time the fixture configuration is changed PRIMARY MEASUREMENT VERIFICATION a Press the MEASURE MODE key to select CONT continuous measurements b Press Rs Q c Insert as DUT the first resistor specified in Table 5 2 d Verify that the displays are within the extremes shown for check number 1 in Table 5 2 if the resistor is within the tolerance listed in Table 5 1
2. 5 SHIFT SPECIAL SHIFT If units are ohms display will be 238 42 238 42 x 1 09 If units are Kohms display will be 23842 2 23842 x 10 6 3 For RANGE 2 press 1 6 8 9 6 SHIFT SPECIAL SHIFT Ohms 11 176 Kohms 01118 4 For RANGE 3 press 1 6 8 9 7 SHIFT SPECIAL SHIFT Ohms 4 6000 Kohms 00460 5 For RANGE 4 press 1 6 8 9 8 SHIFT SPECIAL SHIFT Ohms 5 5879 Kohms 00559 c Calibrate all 4 ranges of the digibridge as described in paragraphs 5 9 2 through 5 9 6 d Determine new K factors In order to calculate the K factor it is r ecessary to measure the delta value of the calibration resistors from 1 kHz to 20 kHz for range 1 and from 1 kHz to 100 KHz for ranges 2 3 and 4 1 Select FUNCTION ENTER DISPLAY VALUE MEASURE RATE SLOW MEASURE MODE _ CONTINUOUS 2 Select the frequency of 1 kHz by pressing 5 58 SERVICE 1 SHIFT FREQUENCY 3 Select the range to be calibrated by pressing x SHIFT SPECIAL 1 where x 1 2 3 or 4 4 Select FUNCTION MEASURE Insert the calibration resistor for the range to be calibrated 95 Kohm for range 1 6 Kohm for range 2 374 ohm for range 3 or 25 orum for range 4 NOTE For range 1 only the 95 Kohm standard may only give 4 digits of resolution Perform the following to get 5 digits Select FUNCTION ENTER Enter a nominal value by pressing 9 5 2 ISHIFT NOM VAL Sele
3. SHIFT FREQUENCY C Test voltage normally 1 V can be programmed from 005 V to 1 26 V For 15 mV press 0 1 5 SHIFT VOLTAGE d Averaging Results can be averages of 2 to 255 measurements To program averaging of 25 measurements press 2 5 SHIFT AVERAGE To cancel averaging press 1 2 SHIFT AVERAGE e Delay A delay of 1 to 99999 ms can be added to normal test time For 238 ms press 2 3 8 SHIFT DELAY Note For steps b e to see present conditions press SHIFT FREQUENCY SHIFT VOLTAGE SHIFT AVERAGE SHIFT DELAY f For internal 2 volt dc bias for capacitors press SHIFT INT BIAS To remove internal bias repeat SHIFT INT BIAS g For D and Q displayed in parts per million press SHIFT DQ in PPM For decimal D Q displays repeat SHIFT DQ in PPM h To hold test voltage constant press SHIFT CONST V To cancel this selection repeat SHIFT CONST Vj i To hold a range Measure a DUT in the range desired or press one of the parameter keys Rs Q Ls Q Cs D Cs Rs repeatedly to step through the four ranges When the desired range is indicated by RLC unfit indicator press SHIFT HOLD RNG To enable autoranging repeat SHIFT HOLD RNG Note For steps f i conditions are indicated by lights 6 LIMIT ENTRY GO NO GO TESTING AND SORTING INTO BINS a Press DISPLAY key to select VALUE Press FUNCTION key to select ENTER b
4. Serial Poll Status Byte Table 3 16 When the bus is in the serial poll mode and the Digibridge is addressed to talk the Digibridge responds with a status byte which is encoded as shown in the table and sent on the data lines DIOI through DI08 3 70 OPERATION Table 3 15 INTERFACE MESSAGE CODE FOR REMDOTE CONTROL Message Note ASCII Decimal Sent concurrently with ATN line true code 2 Equiv Equiv DIOS DIO7 DIO6 DIOS DIO4 DIO3 DIO2 DIOI MLA Set 35 X 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 Tot SP to gt 32 to 62 X 0 1 lt MSB device address LSB MTA Set C 67 X 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 Tot to 64 to 94 X i 0 lt MSB device address LSB gt SPD Es EM 25 X 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 SPE es CAN 24 X 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 UNL 63 X 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 UNT S 95 X 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 Because the following messages are addressed commands they will affect the Digibridge operation only while it is addressed to listen GET re BS 8 X 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 GTL de SOH 1 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Mnemonic key to codes MLA my listen address MTA my talk address SPD serial poll disable SPE serial poll enable UNL unlisten UNT untalk GET group execute trigger GTL go to local Set address setting as supplied by factory Tot total range of choice See paragraph 2 8 for address changing procedure Decimal equivalent makes DIO8 which is immaterial a zero Logical 1 is low state true logical 0 is high state n Digibridge is addressed to listen by MLA mes
5. NOTE ON TOLERANCES Acceptable performance of the instrument is bracketed by the set of display extremes in Table 5 2 These are defined as the nominal ideal measurements plus or minus the sum of the instrument accuracy tolerances and the DUT accuracy tolerance or slightly more If the accuracy of your DUT is different from the recommendation revise the acceptable extremes accordingly Notice that this performance verification is NOT intended to prove the accuracy of the instrument NOTE ON INSIGNIFICANT FIGURES The right hand digit s of the display may be expected to flicker and change with the automatically repeating measurements if they are not significant for the specified accuracy of the instrument See further comment with step i below e Similarly make the other checks indicated in Table 5 2 under the Rs Q parameter checks number 2 3 4 5 f Press Cs D g Insert as DUT the first capacitor specified in Table 5 2 check number 6 h Verify that the displays are within the extremes shown for check number 6 in Table 5 2 if the capacitor is within the tolerance listed in Table 5 1 i Similarly make the other checks indicated in Table 5 2 under the Cs D parameter checks number 6 7 8 9 5 6 SERVICE In check number 8 verity that the fifth digit is reasonably stable as follows Notice that the fourth digit is the last significant one in the readout for 0 02 percent accuracy In check number 8 the f
6. SHIFT DELAY Programmed delay is typically required for measurement of capacitors with bias if the measure mode is TRIGGERED Refer to paragraph 3 7 NOTE In the CONTINUOUS measurement mode there will be no settling time or programmed delay the speed of the Digibridge makes it reasonable to disregard the first displayed result which is liable to be in error for several reasons and observe subsequent displays for consistency which indicates that any transients have settled 3 28 OPERATION 3 5 4 Measure Mode and Display Selection Effects on Measurement Time Measure Mode TRIGGERED Selection of TRIGGERED mode introduces a settling time or delay between the START signal wllich is necessary in this mode and the beginning of data acquisition Refer to paragraph 3 5 3 above Measure Mode CONTINUOUS Selection of CONTINUOUS measure mode eliminates the delay described above Notice that in continuous mode the measurement being made when the DUT is connected to the Digibridge is erroneous Subsequent measurements have the benefit of any effective delay furnished by the preceding ones Display Selection The selection of BIN NO display cuts 6 to 10 ms from the measurement time compared to any other choice of display Therefore the BIN NO choice is recommended for use with an automatic parts handler if maximum throughput is desired and there is no need for the operator to observe values or percent differences More information
7. SHIFT VOLTAGE The accuracy of the programmed source voltage is 5 2 mV 1 001 f where f value of test frequency in kHz The actual voltage across the DUT is never more than the source voltage and depends on the DUT impedance and the source resistance of the Digibridge for the range in use The DUT voltage is close to the source voltage at the high impedance end of each measurement range and lower at the low impedance end Normally the smallest voltage across the DUT if its impedance is 6 25 ohms or more will be 20 of the source voltage this is the case for resistors measured at the low end of each range Refer to Table 3 3 for details This table is similar to the table of range constants in the specifications However the extreme limits are given here on ranges and 4 For example what is the voltage across the DUT if it is a 1 uF capacitor Assume the test frequency is 1 kHz the test voltage is 1 0 V the CONSTANT VOLTAGE indicator is NOT lit and the RANGE HELD indicator is NOT lit The Digibridge will measure on range 3 with 1 0 V behind source resistance of 400 ohms The DUT reactance is 159 ohms and the voltage across it is 370 m V For comparison what is the voltage across the same DUT if you select CONSTANT VOLTAGE see paragraph 3 4 3 or if range 4 is held In either case the source 1 0 V is behind 25 ohms The voltage across the DUT is 988 mV 3 24 OPERATION Table 3 3 AUTORANGING MEASUREMENT R
8. Use caution when removing a plug in integrated circuit or other multiple pin part not to bend pins nor stress the circuit board Withdraw the part straight away from the board Unless an IC is known NOT to be a static sensitive type place it immediately on a conductive pad pins in the pad or into a conductive envelope DO NOT attempt to remove a soldered in IC package unless you have the proper equipment and skills to do so without damage If in doubt return the board to GenRad 5 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 5 6 1 Care of the Test Fixture For best results and minimum maintenance effort the operator must remove any obvious dirt from leads of DUTs before inserting them into the test fixture Its contacts will wipe through a film of wax but they can become clogged and ineffectual if the operator is careless about cleanliness About once a year more or less depending on usage the test fixture and its axial lead adaptors should be inspected and cleaned as follows a Clean the contact surfaces and blades of the axial lead adaptors with isopropyl alcohol Rub with a cotton swab Q tip Remove any remaining liquid alcohol by blowing with the breath and remove any remaining cotton fibers with tweezers b Expose the testrfixture contacts for cleaning as follows depending on which test fixture is being cleaned Test Fixture Included On 1689 Digibridge Remove the main board and expose the text fixture contacts by removing its guide block as
9. 0206 199 94 to 200 06 400 0 ohms Series SLOW 01 02 399 88 to 400 12 400 0 ohms Series MED 0196 0596 399 76 to 400 24 400 0 ohms Series FAST 0196 12 399 48 to 400 52 1500 ohms Parallel SLOW 01 02 1499 5 to 1500 5 2000 ohms Parallel SLOW 01 02 1999 4 to 2000 6 6400 ohms Parallel SLOW 01 02 6398 1 to 6401 9 6400 ohms Parallel MED 0196 0596 6396 2 to 6403 8 6400 ohms Parallel FAST 0196 1206 6391 6 to 6408 4 24 kilohms Parallel SLOV 01 02 23 993 to 24 007 30 kilohms Parallel SLOW 01 02 29 991 to 30 009 100 kilohms Parallel SLOW 01 02 99 97 to 100 03 100 kilohms Parallel MD 01 05 99 94 to 100 06 100 kilohms Parallel FAST 01 12 99 87 to 100 13 If the calibrated value of the resistance standard is slightly different from the nominal value or if the standard s accuracy is different from the typical accuracy correct the acceptable extremes accordingly 5 8 4 Resistance Measurement Accuracy This procedure follows after paragraph 5 8 3 Thus test frequency 1 kHz test voltage 1 V measure rate SLOW range held indicator is NOT lit and parameter Cs D is specified a With the Digibridge still connected to the 1657 9600 extender cable connect its banana plugs to the 1433 H Decade Resistor as follows 5 44 SERVICE high leads red and red white to the H binding post low leads black and black white to the L binding post guard lead black green to the G binding post Di
10. 2 8 INSTALLATION US 8 SIGNAL LINES TRANSFER CONTROL BUS MANAGEMENT DATA HANDSHAKE OR DATA BYTE GENERAL mene 3 SIGNAL LINES 5 SIGNAL LINES DIO 1 8 DATA INPUT OUTPUT LINES DAV DATA VALID NRFD NOT READY FOR DATA NDAC DATA NOT ACCEPTED a IFC INTERFACE CLEAR i ATN ATTENTION i i SRQ SERVICE REQUEST x xm REN REMOTE ENABLE ijijiji i anm annie a EO END OR IDENTIFY BATES TAL ORT INSTRUMENT A INSTRUMENT B INSTRUMENT D STATE ON THESE TWO LINES ABLE TO ABLE TO ABLE TO TALK LISTEN TALK AND USTEN ONLY TALK ONLY ANO CONTROL USTEN E G CALCULATOR E G DIGITAL E G SIGNAL G TAPE READER VOLTMETER GENERATOR 60031 0 Figure 2 4 Block diagram of a generalized system interconnected by the 16 signal line bus specified in the IEEE Standard 488 Reprinted from Electronics November 14 1974 copyright McGraw Hill Inc 1974 2 8 IEEE 488 INTERFACE OPTION 2 8 1 Purpose Figure 2 4 If you have either interface option you can connect this instrument to a printer or into a system containing a number of devices such as instruments apparatus peripheral devices and generally a controller or computer in which each component meets IEEE Standard 488 1978 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation A complete understanding of this Standard about 80 pages is necessary to understand in detail the purposes of the signals at the IEEE 488 INTERFACE connector at the rear pane
11. Amperex Eictres Hicksvifle NY 11801 Carling Etcwe Hartford CT 06110 Elco Resistor New York NY Tt Attieboro MA 02703 JFD Eletres Brooklyn NY 11219 Groov Pin R dgefield NJ 07657 Heinemann Trenton NJ 08602 Quam Nichols Chicago 1L 60637 olo Krome Hartford CT 06110 Hubbell Stratford CT 06497 Industrial Crdnsr Chicago tl 60618 Amphenol Danbury CT 06810 Johnson Waseca MN 56093 IRC TRWI Burlington A 52601 Kurz Kasch Dayton OH 45401 Kuka Mt Vernon NY 10551 Lafayette Syosset NY 11791 Linden Providence RI 02905 Litteifuse Des Plains IL 60016 Lord Mfg Erie PA 16512 Mallory Eictrc Detroit MI 48204 Maure Chicago L 60616 3M Co St Paul MN 55101 Minor Rubber Bloomfield NJ 07003 Millen Malden MA 02148 Mueller Elctr Cleveland OH 44114 National Tube Pittsburg PA Oak Inds Crystal Lake IL 60014 Dot Fastener Waterbury CT 06720 Patton MacGuyer Providence Al 02905 Pass Seymour Syracuse NY 33209 Pierce Roberts Rubber Trenton NJ 08638 Platt Bros Waterbury CT 06720 Positive Lockwasher Newark NJ AMF Princeton IN 47570 Raay o Vac Madison WI 53703 TAW Camden NJ 08103 Genersi Inst Brooklyn NY 11211 Shekeproof Elgin l L 60120 Sigma Inst Bramtree MA 02184 Airco Speer St Marys PA 15867 Stackpole St Marys PA 15867 Tinnerman Cleveland OH Teiephonics Huntington NY 11743 RCA Harrison N3 07029 Waides Kohmoor New York NY 11101 Western Rubber Gothen IN 46526 Wiremold Hartford
12. f Enable the ratio mode measurement nominal by pressing 2 SHIFT SPECIAL 6 OPERATION 3 57 g Select MEASURE function and make measurements as usual If you enable VALUE display the ratio shown can be interpreted as value in milliohms and the measured Q is also displayed If you enable BIN NO display the bin number only will be shown 3 9 KEYBOARD LOCK FUNCTION MAP AND SUMMARY OF INTERROGATIONS 3 9 1 Keyboard Lock Locking the keyboard provides security against unintentional or unauthorized change in the keyboard selectable test conditions as well as preserving them during the time that POWER is switched OFF Indications of the unlocked or locked state are as follows Unlocked several keyboard indicators lit Locked NO keyboard indicators lit except possibly MEASURE BIAS ON and or REMOTE CONTROL To lock the keyboard first select MEASURE function Then press the following keys deliberately The command sequence is the same to lock and to unlock 1J 6 8 9 LOCK NOTE If the REMOTE CONTROL indicator is lit the keyboard may have been deactivated by remote command in which case the way to reactivate it is by remote command Refer to paragraph 3 12 3 58 OPERATION YOU MUST SELECT MEASURE FUNCTION YOU MUST SELECT ENTER FUNCTION TO ENABLE THESE 4 SELECTIONS TO PROGRAM THE 8 CONDITIONS INDICATED OTHER SELECTIONS AND PROGRAMMING CAN BE MADE IN EITHER MEASURE OR ENTER FUNCTION
13. gt BAG S10 Al 7 AS ALL z OME ACCEPTEQ 3 a Hem ACCI an d L 2 NONE ACCEPTED E ACCE 22 23 ttt MEN I E Tc EIC 4 t2 t totite T ts te t7 g gtiot igfis t4 SGNS TR SOURCE HANDSHAKE FUNCTION SIRS 2 SIRS ACTIVE STATE SEQUENCE DY E 0 2 ACCEPTOR HANDSHAKE FUNCTION ANAS g ACDS anrs gt ACTIVE STATE SEQUENCE s 60032 0 Figure 2 5 The handshake process illustrated by timing diagrams of the pertinent signals for a system with one talker and several listeners For details refer to the standard 2 8 3 Signal Identification Refer to Table 2 2 for a key to signal names functions and pin numbers Further explanation is found in the Standard The first three signals listed take part in the handshake routine used for any multiline message via the data bus the next five are used to manage the flow of information the last eight constitute the multiline message data bus INSTALLATION 2 11 Pin No il 10 17 END Digibridge 1 2 ty Signal Name DAV NRFD NDAC AIN IFC SRQ DIO1 DIO2 DIO3 D104 DIO5 DIO6 DIO7 DIO8 Table 2 2 IEEE 488 INTERFACE KEY Function or Significance Low state data is available and valid on the DI01 DIOS lines Low state at least 1 listener on the bus is not ready for data Low state at least 1 listener on the bus is not done accepting data Attention specifies 1 of 2 uses for the DI01 DI08 lines as follows Low
14. 07387 07595 07699 07207 07828 07829 07910 07983 07999 08524 08556 08730 09213 09353 09408 09823 09856 09922 10025 10389 11236 11599 11983 12040 12045 12498 12617 12672 12697 12856 12954 32969 13094 13103 13148 13150 13327 13715 13919 14010 14195 14196 14332 14433 14482 14608 14655 14674 14249 14752 14889 14908 14936 19238 15476 Manutacturer McCoy Elkctros Mi Holly Sprinas PA 17065 Jones Mtg Chicago tL 60181 Waisco Ektrns Los Angetes CA 90018 Welwyn intari Westlake OH 44145 Schweber Elctrns Westburg NY 11590 Aerovox New Bedford MA 02745 AMP Inc Harrisburg PA 17105 Aiden Products Brockion MA 02413 Allen Bradley Miwaukee WI 53204 Litton nds Beverly Hills CA 90213 TRW Lawndaie CA 90260 Tt Datas TX 75222 GE Waynesboro VA 22980 Amerock Rocktord IL 61101 Cherry Etctrc Waukegen iL 60085 Spectroi Eletrns City of Industry CA 91745 Ferroxcube Saugerties NY 12477 Fenwall Lab Morton Grove iL 60053 GE Schenectady N Y 12307 Amphenot Broadwiew IL 60153 RCA Somervidie NJ 08876 Fastex Despiains IL 60016 Carter Ink Cambridge MA 02142 GE Syracuse NY 13201 Vanguard Elctrns Inglewood CA 90302 Grayburne Yonkers N Y 10701 Transitron Elctrns Wakefieid MA 01880 KDI Pyrofiim Whippany NJ 07981 Cl rex New York NY 10001 Arrow Fart Hartford CT 06106 n Digitromes Albertson NY 11507 Motorola Phoenix AZ 85008 Component Mfg W Bridgewater MA 02379 Tansato
15. 3 6 6 Accuracy Enhancement by Special Attention to Short Circuit Inductance The ratio display paragraph 3 3 7 enables very high resolution measurements of low inductance and high capacitance even beyond the limits of normal RLC displays If such measurements are planned especially if the test frequency is high the inductance of the short circuit used in the normal zeroing procedure should be considered The short circuit provided by a wire inserted into the Digibridge test fixture paragraph 3 1 3 has an effective inductance in series with its very low resistance This inductance typically has a magnitude of several nanohenries To enhance accuracy of measurements in which a few nanohenries of inductance are significant use a properly chosen shape size and orientation of wire for the short circuit For greatest accuracy particularly for axial lead DUTS also correct the measured value by suitable calculation Accuracy Enhancement Procedures Three methods are described See Figure 3 11 If measurements are to be made without any adaptors radial lead DUT use a piece of no 18 AWG wire 2 2 cm long 7 8 in bent into a hair pin shape as shown in A Press this wire fully down into the Digibridge test fixture keeping the straight sides of the wire vertical Measurement results now depend on the geometry of the DUT leads but will typically contain a related error less than 10 nH For even smaller error correct inductance measurement
16. Go bin 8 BIN 9 2 wees Go bin 9 BIN 10 3 0 Go bin 10 BIN 11 4 000000 0 Go bin 11 BIN 12 8 Go bin 12 BIN 13 9 Go bin 13 BIN 14 13 RLC fail no go by default suits no other bin OTHER PASS 24 Go eighth bin for 1889 bins 8 9 10 11 12 13 RLC FAIL 13 Ninth bin no go by default 1689 bin 14 M Interface plug in options 1689 9620 high speed and 1658 9620 Low power de bus 5 V available for systems use commonly for opto couplers CAUTION Limit the load to 25 mA max POT is enabled if binning is enabled by having a non zero nominal value 2 7 2 Interface via IEEE 488 Bus Handler Interface Option 1658 9620 If you have the 1658 9620 interface option connect from the HANDLER INTERFACE on the rear panel to a handler printer or other suitable peripheral equipment as follows The presence of the 24 pin connectors shown in Figure 1 3 verifies that you have one of the interface options refer to paragraph 2 7 1 Refer to Table 1 2 for the appropria te connector to use in making a cable Refer to Table 2 1 for the key to signal names functions and pin numbers 2 6 1 STALLATION Connect the bin control lines to the handler See Table 2 1 Notice that the 1658 9620 IEEE 488 Bus Handler Interface Option card provides outputs for automatic sorting into 10 bins Refer to paragraph 3 8 As indicated in the Specifications at the front of this manual the
17. MEASURE MODE key if necessary to select TRIGGERED mode Press these keys deliberately 1 6 8 9 ZI SHIFT OPEN Confirm that the GO indicator is lit Keep hands and objects at least 10 cm 4 in from test fixture Press the START button Wait for the GO indicator to be lit again The RLC display should be 00000 pF Short Circuit Connect the 2 banana plug stacks together leave the guard black green open Press these keys deliberately 1 6 8 9 HSHIFT SHORT Confirm that the GO indicator is lit Press the START button Wait for the GO indicator to be lit again The RLC display should be 00000 ohms Press the MEASURE MODE key to select CONT SERVICE 5 45 Table 5 10 INDUCTANCE ACCURACY CHECKS at 1 kHz Standard Typical RLC Display Inductor Measure Digibridge Standard Acceptable Expected LS Range Rate Accuracy Accuracy Extremes Q 1 mH SLON 02 0 1 9988 to 1 0012 7 5 MED 0596 0 1 9985 to 1 0015 FAST 15 0 1 9975 to 1 0025 100 mH SLOW 02 0 1 99 88 to 100 12 7 5 MD 05 0 1 99 85 to 100 15 FAST 1506 0 196 99 75 to 100 25 1H SLOW 0296 0 1 9988 to 1 0012 10 MED 05 0 1 9985 to 1 0015 FAST 15 0 1 9975 to 1 0025 10 H SLON 02 0 1 9 988 to 10 012 10 MED 0506 0 1 9 985 to 10 015 FAST 15 0 1 9 975 to 10 025 These ranges of acceptable displays are based on specific accuracy of decade inductors recently calibrated If th
18. Nortronics Minneapolis MN 55427 National Santa Clara CA 95051 Elctrc Transistors Flushing NY 11354 Teledyne Mountain View CA 94043 Hamiin Lake M lis Wt 53551 RCA Woodbridge NJ 07095 Clarostat Dover NH 03820 Micrometals City of industry CA 91744 Dickson Etctens Scottsdale AZ 85252 Unitrode Watertown MA 02172 Electrocratt Hopkins MN 55343 Thermalioy Dallas TX 75234 Vogue inst Richmond Hill NY 11418 Vernitron Laconia NH 03246 Sohtron Devices Tappan NY 10983 Fairchild San Ratael CA 94903 Burr Brown Tucson AZ 85706 Anadex tast Van Nuys CA 91406 Eletre Controts Witon C T 06897 American Labs Fullerton CA 92634 Rettun Arcadia CA 91006 TT W Paim Beach Ft 33402 Watkins amp Johnson Pato Alto CA 94304 Corbin Berlin CT 06037 Cornet Dubilier Newak N J 07101 Corning Glass Corning NY 14830 Acopian Easton PA 18042 Electrocube San Gabriel CA 91776 A amp G Stoan Sun Valley CA 91352 Electre tast amp Speny Stoneham MA 02180 General tast Hicksville NY 11802 ITT Lawrence MA 08142 Digital Eouip Maynard MA 01754 JANUARY 1978 Code 15605 15782 15801 15819 16037 16068 16179 16301 16352 16485 16758 16950 16952 37117 17540 17745 17771 17850 17856 18324 18542 18577 18736 18795 18911 19178 19373 39396 19617 19644 19701 20754 21335 21688 21759 22526 22589 22753 23338 23342 24351 24355 24446 24454 24455 24602 24655 24759 25289 26601 27014 27545
19. PRECISION INSTRUMENTS FOR TEST AND MEASUREMENT 1689 1689M SERIES Precision RLC Digibridge User and Service Manual Copyright O 2006 IET Labs Inc 1689 December 2006 l ET LABS l NC 534 Main Street Westbury NY 11590 www ietlabs com IET Gel Rad by TEL 516 334 5959 800 899 8438 FAX 516 334 5988 GenRad PRECISION INSTRUMENTS FOR TEST AND MEASUREMENT l ET LA BS l N C www ietlabs com 534 Main Street Westbury NY 11590 TEL 516 334 5959 800 899 8438 FAX 516 334 5988 WARRANTY We warrant that this product is free from defects in material and workmanship and when properly used will perform in accordance with applicable IET specifications If within one year after original shipment it is found not to meet this standard it will be repaired or at the option of IET replaced at no charge when returned to IET Changes in this product not approved by IET or application of voltages or currents greater than those allowed by the specifications shall void this warranty IET shall not be liable for any indirect special or consequential damages even if notice has been given to the possibility of such damages THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUD ING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE N WARNING AN OBSERVE ALL SAFETY RULES WHEN WORKING WITH HIGH VOLTAGES OR LINE VOLTAGES Dangerous
20. Place all equipment including the Digibridge s to be recalibrated in the temperature stabilized room normally at 23 degrees C c Switch Digibridge s ON and if frequency calibration is needed see above switch the counter power ON Allow all equipment to stabilize for at least two hours Leave the Digibridge test conditions at the defaults d If frequency calibration is needed see Decision above skip to the procedure of paragraph 5 9 7 before zeroing and recalibrating ranges 4 3 2 and 1 Decision Whether K Factor Calibration Is Needed The K Factor Calibration paragraph 5 9 8 is necessary and should be completed before recalibrating any range if the following is true 1 If battery RAM or ROM have been replaced or disconnected for any reason 2 If the RAM standby battery circuit has been serviced 5 52 SERVICE 5 9 2 Zeroing and Selecting DQ in PPM This zeroing procedure is like the routine procedure in Operation Section 3 In this process the Digibridge automatically measures stray parameters related to the test fixture and associated circuits and retains the data which it uses in each recalibration step below to correct measurements so that results most accurately represent parameters of the external calibration resistor alone NOTE Leave the I T factor at 1 the power up default or more NOT less See para 3 5 5 Open Circuit a Press FUNCTION key if necessary to select MEASURE mode Press MEASURE M
21. SHIFT SPECIAL Press 9 4 9 8 6 SHIFT NOM VALUE NOTE the calibration resistance value should appear in the left display The DQ in PPM indicator must be lit Press 2 8 0 SHIFT BIN NO 0 0 NOTE the calibration Q value should appear in the right hand display c Enable and execute the recalibration for this range as follows The following keystrokes are the same for any range Select MEASURE with the FUNCTION key and TRIGGERED with MEASURE MODE key Press Press 1 6 8 9 1 SHIFT CALIBRATE NOTE The GO indicator being lit and a 6 in the left and a 6 in the right displays confirm that calibration is enabled Press START The GO indicator remains unlit while calibration proceeds Keeping hands away from the test fixture wait until the GO indicator is lit again This completes recalibration of one range d Check as follows that the Digibridge operates properly with the recalibration Select CONTINUOUS with the MEASURE MODE key The Digibridge should measure the calibration resistor like any ordinary resistor and display its Rand Q ppm values The Q display can be expected to jump a bit Precision and repeatability are in the order of 5 ppm Also the NO GO indicator will probably be lit this is normal 5 58 SERVICE e Disconnect the calibration resistor from the test fixture 5 9 7 Frequency Calibration a If frequency calibration is not necessary refer to Decision
22. SPECIAL key Programming of special functions can be done only in ENTER function 3 60 OPERATION Table 3 9 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Purpose Specific Selection Keystrokes Re Para 1 Setting Autorange normal 0 2 SHIFT SPECIAL 1 3 5 6 the Range Hold range 1 1 SHIFT SPECIAL 1 Hold range 2 2 SHIFT SPECIAL 1 Hold range 3 3 SHIFT SPECIAL 1 Hold range 4 4 SHIFT SPECIAL 1 2 Output No output max meas speed 0 SHIFT SPECIAL 2 3 5 8 via Bin numbers 1 SHIFT SPECIAL 2 IEEE 488 QR results 2 SHIFT SPECIAL 2 Bus QDR and bin 3 SHIFT SPECIAL 2 RLC results 4 SHIFT SPECIAL 2 RLC and bin 5 SHIFT SPECIAL 2 RLC and QDR results 6 SHIFT SPECIAL 2 RLC QDR amp bin numbers full data 7 SHIFT SPECIAL 2 No data on PASS full data on FAIL 8 SHIFT SPECIAL 2 BIN no on PASS full data on FAIL 9 SHIFT SPECIAL 2 3 Special Normal 0 SHIFT SPECIAL 3 Measurement Signal reversing useful when 1 SHIFT SPECIAL 3 3 6 8 Rout ines test frequency coincides with power frequency Shorting in measurement circuit 2 SHIFT SPECIAL 3 3 7 3 useful when measuring biased capacitors Both reversing and shorting 3 SHIFT SPECIAL 3 Quick acquisition meas routine 4 SHIFT SPECIAL 3 4 2 4 MED and FAST only useful at low frequencies
23. measurement time includes the following two terms which are additive Note f is equal to the test frequency in kHz Settling time if measure mode is TRIGGERED and you have not programmed any DELAY is 7 to 12 ms I f In other words approximately 10 periods Data acquisition time is generally more than 9 periods 15 periods at SLOW measure rate although relationship is not linear Refer to the the summary below and to theory Section 4 Notice that you can select a shorter DELAY and you can select the quick acquisition feature The latter saves more than one test frequency period with some reduction in accuracy NOTE If a special function is selected that simplifies or eliminates data output for PASS results the additional time described above is accordingly reduced or elimina ted except for FAIL results OPERATION 3 33 Bey SIGNAL ACQ EOT DATA OUTPUT VIA DELAY ACQUISTION SAECULATION DISPLAY IEEE 488 BUS CONTINUOUS MODE 0ms IRREGULAR GENERALLY NO OUTPUT 0 ms LESS THAN IF DISPLAY IS BIN NO BIN 2 ms ONE 4 RLC 6 ms WITH HI SPEED OPT DEFAULT SETTING TIME FAST BIN NO 0 ms 9 f 36 ITF ms IHE 1 25 ms ITF gt 1 34 ms FAST 1 f 7 ms MEDIUM 1 f 10 ms SLOW 1 f 12 ms QDR 8 ms ANY TWO 10 ms ALL THREE 12 ms VALUE OR DELTA MEDIUM 9 f 160 ITF ms IF DISPLAY IS VALUE OR DELTA PROGRA
24. should go low and DBIG high signaling the microprocessor to start conversion i e deintegration 777177 6666 DMSR U27 pin 8 is stuck high Integration failure PROCEDURE check MSR U45 pin 11 Both of these signals should be low during integration Check the circuit back through D flip flop U45 to PMSR at U27 pin 10 77777 5555 FCOUNT is not toggling U27 pins 9 40 Check the circuit back to frequency multiplexer U19 pin 9 Verify that all frequencies are present on the inputs to the multiplexer and that the control lines FDIVO and FDIV1 are functioning U19 pins 2 14 respectively 77777 3333 DMSR U27 pin 8 is stuck low Integration failure PROCEDURE Check MSR U45 pin 11 Both of these signals should go high starting the deintegration 77777 2222 CMP L U64 pin 8 is stuck high Deintegration failure PROCEDURE check that integrator output U64 pin 7 rises to cross the 0 V level at the end of deintegration CMP L should go low at that crossing and may remain low for only a brief pulse The leading edge should cause DMSR to go low and ISW U45 pin 6 should go high 77777 1111 DBIG U27 pin 2 is stuck high Deintegration failure PROCEDURE verify that BIG L goes high and DBIG goes low when integrator output becomes more positive than 5 1 V 66666 XXXX Detector scale factor and zero bias test failure the Digibridge will loop automatically repeating the test and updating the display XXXX is the magnitude of zer
25. the sinewave generator provides the test signal that drives a small but essential current through the DUT l he sine wave is generated as follows THEORY 4 5 Binary dividers count down from 64 f providing signals at 32 f 16 f 2f f This set of signals is used to address a read only memory which contains a 64 step approximation to a sine function The ROM output as an 8 bit binary number is converted by a D A converter to a stepped approximation of a sine wave which is then smoothed by filtering before its use in the measurement of a DUT The filter is switched appropriately according to the selected test frequency Source of the Reference Sine Wave for the Multiplying Detector Another sine function ROM is addressed by the same digital signals 64 f through f to produce another stepped approximation of a sine wave at 0 degrees Suitable inversions of signals 2f and or f serve to shift the phase of the output sine wave under microprocessor control by 90 180 or 270 degrees 4 2 4 The Dual Slope Integrating Detector and Converter See Figure 4 1 Circuitry The phase sensitive detector converter circuit consists of a multiplier whose dc output is measured by a dual slope converter providing the measurement in digital form The multiplier is a multiplying D A converter whose reference input is the test signal and whose digital controls are signals representing a stepwise approximation of a reference sine wave at the test frequenc
26. to limit the active signal logic low current to 24 mA max CAUTION Provide protection from voltage spikes over 15 V The cautionary note above means typically that each relay or other inductive load requires a clamping diode rectifier across it cathode connected to the power supply end of the load The input signal is also active low and also requires a positive voltage external circuit which must pull the signal line down below 0 4 V but not less than 0 0 V i e not negative The logic low current is 0 4 mA max For the inactive state logic high the external circuit must pull the signal line above 2 5 V but not above 5 V NOTE The end of test signal EOT is provided by the Digibridge only while binning is enabled by having a non zero nominal value in memory Refer to paragraph 3 8 for details Table 2 1 HANDLER INTERFACE KEY Signal 1689 1658 Name Pin No Pin No Function All signals active low DC CONNECTIONS 5 6 7 5 6 7 Ground connection T 10 10 DC bus 5 V available see note INPUT START 1 1 Initiates measurement single or avg OUTPUTS EOT 18 18 End of test bin signals are valid ACQ OVER 22 22 Data acquisition over DUT removal OK BIN 0 15 15 No go because of D or Q limit BIN 1 17 17 Go bin 1 BIN 2 19 19 Go bin 2 BIN 3 21 21 Go bin 3 BIN 4 23 23 Go bin 4 BIN 5 14 14 Go bin 5 BIN 6 16 16 Go bin 6 BIN 7 20 20 Go bin 7 BIN 8 24 0
27. where f frequency in kHz This voltage may be applied behind a source impedance which depends on the range in which case the selected voltage is the maximum that will be applied and the voltage will be less at the low impedance end of each range The voltage may be applied also behind 25 ohms using the CONSTANT VOLTAGE function in which case the applied voltage will be constant except when low impedances are measured Delay A delay of from 1 to 99999 ms may be added to allow for settling of external switches and to permit a wider selection of measurement rates DC Bias An internal bias of 2 V may be applied to capacitors under test by means of the INT BIAS key An external bias of up to 60 VDC may be applied to capacitors under test using a panel switch The applied current should be limited to 200 mA The instrument is protected from damage from charged capacitors with a stored energy up to 1 joule at 60 volts or less Protection from higher voltages may be provided by external components Zeroing Open A simple OPEN operation removes the effects of stray capacitance and conductance of the internal test fixture or any other test fixture or cable Short A similar SHORT zeroing operation removes the effects of series resistance and inductance DUT Connections The 1689 has a built in test fixture that will accept radial or axial components The 1689M has BNC connectors for attachment to a wide variety of measurement accessories Four t
28. 0 2187 or more than 1 781 this test fails ANALYSIS PROCEDURE depends upon display see below NOTE This is a non catastrophic failure If you press the Cs D key the Digibridge will proceed with the self check routine The instrument can be operated as usual but results may be erroneous To restore accuracy recalibrate as described in paragraph 5 9 222 4 XXXX Range 4 may be incorrectly calibrated Refer to paragraph 5 9 for recalibration procedure If calibration is accomplished correctly but this failure display appears when POWER is cycled OFF and ON check battery Bl See Figure 6 4 Connect voltmeter only briefly If Bl voltage is less than 2 0 V replace battery with a new one as described in paragraph 5 7 3 If the problem is clearly associated with the loss of calibration when POWER is cycled OFF and ON but the battery voltage is adequate check the standby power circuit Q9 Q10 CR9 CRI5 Only if necessary check Rs standard switching circuitry R96 through R99 U36 pin 1 U27 U56 U57 U58 222 3 XXXX Range 3 Be sure that recalibration has been done correctly If necessary check Rs standard switching circuitry as described above 222 2 XXXX Range 2 Same comment as for range 3 222 1 222 1 XXXX Range 1 Same comment as for range 3 222 0 XXXX Frequency correction factor ANALYSIS PROCEDURE refer to 444 E XXXX 11111 1111 Math chip operational check failure COMMENT This test is performed only if you have th
29. 15 160 in 438 15 x 142 87 x 385 06 mm WEIGHT 17 lbs 7 71 kg Limit or Error Accuracy Primary Readout C R or L C 0196 1 Kev or or min 1 DJ Ks Kfv 01 Rz Rmin R 01 1 Kev or or 1 1 iQ 1 Ks Kfv 01 Rmaz Rz Dx 01 ee Ke or op ME TO xi Ry Ks Kfw 0196 UU Lmex Lz iQ l xi NOTES 1 The limit of error is a percent of the reading and may be positive or negative 2 The largest term of the first bracketed factor should be used 3 CX RJc and Lx are the values of the components being tested and Cmax Cmin Rmax etc are range constants given in Table C 4 The values of Ks Kfv and Kev are all zero for measurements made at 1 kHz with the SLOW measurement rate and using a non CONSTANT 1 V signal For other test conditions these constants may be evaluated using Tables D through G 5 These specifications assume proper OPEN and SHORT zeroing calibrations made at 1 kHz Much better accuracy is possible at extreme impedance values if these zeroing calibrations are recent and made at the test frequency to be used For example the SLOW MEASUREMENT rate typically will give 1 accuracy when measuring 100 Mohm at 30 Hz 0 1F at 120 Hz 0 1 pF at 10 kHz or 0 1 uH at 100 kHz Even better accuracy is possible if several measurements are averaged 6 Although L measurements on the 1689 should be capable of the accuracy stated above calibrations by the National Bureau of Stand
30. 17 xx SLOV 04 02 05 32 With test voltage 1 to 1 275 V CONSTANT VOLTAGE indicator NOT lit autoranging RLC value within basic ranges see below and Q 1 with R Q 1 with L D 1 with C R 25 6 to 410 kilohm R 6 25 ohms to 25 6 kilohm L 4 1 f to 65 f H L 1 f mH to 4100 f nH C 400 f to 6400 f pF C 6 4 f nF to 25 f uF MEDIUM 4 Pa SLOW 100 kHz 3 25 2 e 10 kHz RANGE 1 ACCURACY ERROR PERCENT 10 kHz RANGES 2 3 4 03 02 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200 300 500 800 1000 1500 ms Time per Measurement 50 20 10 5 2 1 MEASUREMENT RATE MEAS PER SECOND Figure 3 9 General view of the tradeoffs between measurement time and accuracy Each curve shows the tradeoff for one test frequency Operating points are labeled according to the selected measure rate FAST MEDIUM SLOW All of these curves apply to the following conditions R L or C within basic ranges D 1 or Q gt 1 display is BIN NO test voltage gt 1 0 V constant voltage NOT selected delay NOT programmed measure mode is TRIGGERED and the high speed option is used except for the dashed curve which shows approximately the difference that this option makes NOTE for display of VALUE add 6 to 10 ms to the time NOTE The purpose of this graph is to show general tradeoffs The curves were drawn from early 1689 Digibridge data actual performance is generally better The 1689M Digibridge is considerab
31. 3 11 about handlers For notes on cable and fixture capacitance and zeroing see paragraph 3 2 7 below 3 8 OPERATION seite GBS F reciouar Figure 3 5 The type 874 extender cable is shown plugged into a Digibridge test fixture Notice that the two thumb screws must be hand tightened for the guard connection shields of cable 3 2 5 The 1688 9800 Extender Cable Type 874 Connectors Figure 3 5 The accessory extender cable 1688 9600 can be used to connect a DUT that is multiterminal physically large or otherwise unsuited for the built in test fixture This low capacitance cable is used for example to connect type 874 equipped impedance standards or a special test fixture The cable tips are type 874 coaxial connectors which mate with a broad line of components and adaptors Make connections as follows a Remove the adaptors if present from the test fixture front of 1689 or remote type 1689 9600 or 1689 9605 used with 1689M b Plug the single connector end of the extender cable into the test fixture so that its blades enter both slots and the cable lies away from the display panel or away from the BNC connectors of the remote test fixture Lock the connector with the two captive thumb screws OPERATION 3 9 c Using the type 874 connectors connect to the DUT with careful attention to the following color code IL current low Black black Connect to first main terminal of DUT PL potential low Black white Con
32. 5 SHIFT BIN NOJ O 1 1 0 SHIFT BIN NO 0 2 2 011 SHIFT BIN NO 0 3 d No action is required range is correct e Calculate 200 000 uF 200 1000 and press 1 0 0 0 SHIFT NOM VAL f Enable the ratio mode measurement nominal by pressing 2 SHIFT SPECIAL 6 g Select MEASURE function and make measurements as usual If you enable VALUE display the ratio shown can be interpreted as value in mF and the measured D is also displayed If you enable BIN NO display the bin number only will be shown Example 2 To sort 1 milliohm resistors in bins of 1 5 and 10 Displays to be ratios that can be interpreted as Rs values in milliohms with better resolution than displays in ohms and Q NOTE If the display resolution were not important normal binning procedures would be sufficient ratio measurement is not necessary for this binning a Select SERIES equivalent circuit and ENTER function Press Rs Q Hold range 1 as follows 1 SHIFT SPECIAL 1 b Set up nominal ratio to look like 1 milliohm 1 SHIFT NOM VAL c Set up symmetrical bins as stated above 1 SHIFT BIN NOJ O 1 S 76 SHIFT BIN NO 0 2 1 0 SHIFT BIN NO 0 3 d Change from largest value range to smallest value range by pressing 4 SHIFT SPECIAL 1 e Calculate 001 ohm 1 001 and press O O 1 I SHIFT NOM VAL
33. 5 to make the IT factor 0 25 NOTE Max rate is defined as the combination of FAST measure rate with I T factor programmed to be 0 25 The quick acquisition special function is NOT used See paragraph 3 10 With it the measure rate would be even higher The accuracy of measurement is affected by the value of 1 T factor in combination with measure rate and other conditions The tradeoff is illustrated as follows for I kHz test frequency display BIN NO measurement mode CONTINUOUS with the high speed option 1 T factor any value SLOW rate 0 02 accuracy 1 measurement per second 1 T factor 1 MEDIUM rate 0 05 accuracy 5 measurements per second I T factor 1 FAST rate 0 12 accuracy 12 measurements per second 1 T factor 0 25 FAST rate Max 0 25 accuracy 25 measurements second For details about accuracy refer to the specifications where the effect of programming 1 T factor to be 0 25 and selecting FAST rate is designated as maximum measurement rate in the table of values for the term Ks 3 5 6 Ranges Range Changing and Holding a Range to Save Time RANGES and RANGE CHANGING Descriptions of ranges range extensions and decimal point control are explained below Basic Ranges The 4 basic ranges are numbered 1 2 3 4 in order of decreasing impedance Each basic range is approximately a factor of 16 wide Refer to paragraph 3 4 2 for a table of ranges The word upper as used belo
34. 5 51 Table 5 14 EQUIPMENT FOR RECALIBRATION GenRad No Description Requirements Temperature stabilized room 23 degrees C 73 4 F recommended 1689 9604 Kit of 4 calibration resistors R and Q values known at 1 kHz with nominal resistances of R accuracy 002 calibration 24 9 374 ohms 5 97 95 3 traceable to NBS Q calibrated kilohms and calibration open to 25 ppm and short Universal counter timer with Accuracy better than 10 ppm ground strap 2 ppm preferred in averaging multiple period measurement Screw bright plated brass Size 0 138 32 x 0 5 diam thds in x length in Refer to calibration certificate Form No 1689 8204 supplied with the kit Counter and screw are needed for frequency calibration only Decision Whether Frequency Calibration is Needed The frequency calibration paragraph 5 9 7 is necessary and should be completed before recalibrating any range if any of the following is true 1 If the battery B1 has been replaced or disconnected for any reason 2 If either RAM U36 or ROM U35 has been replaced or disconnected 3 If the RAM standby battery circuit has been serviced 4 If oscillator U4 has been replaced Procedure a Remove any adaptor that may be in the test fixture Inspect the Digibridge test fixture for cleanliness If it is dirty or if it is scheduled for periodic cleaning soon clean the test fixture as described in paragraph 5 6 b
35. 90 to 125 V or 180 to 250 V ac nominally 50 or 60 Hz then connect the power cord as explained below Temperature If the Digibridge tester has been very cold warm it up in a dry environment allowing time for the interior to reach 0 degrees C or above before applying power Otherwise the instrument may be damaged by thermal shock Power Cord Connect the power cord to the rear panel connector and then to your power receptacle OPRRATTON 3 1 b If the Digibridge tester includes an optional IEEE 488 interface set TALK switch rear panel to TALK ONLY unless instructions are to be received through the IEEE 488 bus c Switch EXTERNAL BIAS OFF front panel d Press the POWER button in so that it stays in the depressed position Self check codes will show briefly indicating that the instrument is automatically executing a power up routine that includes self checks To turn the instrument off push and release the POWER button and leave it in the out position e Wait until keyboard lights indicate MEASURE VALUE SLOW CONT or TRIGGERED SERIES If they do not there are two possible explanations self check fault and keyboard lock If a fault is detected in the self check measurements are blocked and an error code remains displayed Under some conditions the block to operation can be bypassed See paragraph 3 13 If the keyboard is locked all of those keyboard indicators remain unlit except MEASURE and or REMOTE CONTROL
36. Ald can be calculated so that you know how significant it is and so that measurements can be corrected if desired Refer to paragraph 3 6 Accuracy subparagraph 7 OPERA TION 3 11 Figure 3 6 1689 9603 tweezers connected to the 1689 Digibridge with BNC adaptor 3 2 8 The 1689 9603 Tweezers Figure 3 6 The 1689 9603 tweezers combine the two functions 1 Tweezers for handling chip components up to 0 5 in 12 mm thick 2 Test fixture for measuring these components if their terminals are on opposite faces With these tweezers you can conveniently pick up a tiny chip component measure it and put it in a bin or decide what else to do with it all in one operation Installation on the 1689 Digibridge requires BNC Adaptor 1689 9601 not needed with 1689M Digibridge Install the tweezers as follows a Remove any adaptors cables etc if present from the DUT port of the instrument test fixture of 1689 or BNC connectors of 1689M b If the instrument is a 1689 plug the 1689 9601 BNC adaptor into the integral test fixture with the BNC connectors facing forward Lock the connection with the 2 captive thumb screws which must be seated to complete the ground connection The model 1689M requires no adaptor c Connect the BNC cables of the tweezer assembly to the Digibridge as indicated in Table 3 1 In this table ignore the last column about the remote test fixture Note that red designates leads that may be hot Wh
37. CONNECTING THE DUT MEASUREMENT PARAMETERS RESULTS DISPLAYS OUTPUTS PRINCIPAL TEST CONDITIONS MEASUREMENT TIME AND MEASUREMENT RANGES AOQRACY BIAS FOR THE DUT ad BIN SORTING AND GO NO Go RESULTS y KEYBOARD LOCK FUNCTION MAP AND INTERROGATIONS SPECIAL FUNCTIONS OPERATION WITH A HANDLER TE DATA OUTPUT AND OR PROGRAVMING VIA IEEE 488 BUS SELF CHECKS AND FAILURE DISPLAYS ame Spes SAMPLE IEEE PROGRAMS O 00 31 C CQ amp WN C wo Co Co CO CO CO QS Qo CO CO Co Qo u p w co 3 1 BASIC PROCEDURE 3 1 1 General 3 58 3 60 3 63 3 64 3 81 3 83 For initial familiarization with the Digibridge R RLC tester follow this procedure carefully After that use this paragraph as a ready reference and refer to later paragraphs in this section for details Condensed operating instructions are provided in Section 1 Users of the 1689 Digibridge not the 1689M refer also to the Condensed Operating Instructions found stored in a pocket under the instrument Reach under the front edge and pull the card forward as far as it slides easily After use slide it back in the pocket for protection 3 1 2 Startup CAUTION Set the line voltage switch properly rear panel before connecting the power cord This is the regular startup procedure a After the line voltage switch has been set to the position that corresponds to your power line voltage which must be in either range
38. CT 06110 Contnenta Wirt Phitadeiphia PA 19101 Mallory Controls Franktort IN 46041 Zierick Mt Kisco NY 10549 Tektronix Beaverton OR 97005 Prestoie fastener Toledo OH 43605 Vickers St Louis MO 63166 Lambda Melville NY 11746 Spraque N Adams MA 01247 Motorola Franklin Pk IL 60131 Formica Cincinnati OH 45232 Standard Oil Lateyette IN 47902 Bourns Labs Fiverside CA 92506 Svivama New York NY 10017 Aur Fitter Milwaukee WI 53218 Hammarlund New York NY 10010 Beckman inst Fullerton CA 92634 TRW Ramsey St Louis MO 63166 Code 81030 81073 B1143 81312 81349 81350 81483 81741 81831 81840 81860 B2219 82227 82273 82389 82567 82647 82807 8287 82901 83003 83014 83033 83058 83186 83259 83330 83361 83587 83594 83740 83766 83781 84411 84835 84970 84971 86420 86577 8668 88140 88204 88219 88419 89627 89265 89482 89665 89870 90201 90303 90634 90750 90952 91032 91146 91210 91293 91417 91506 91598 91637 91662 91719 91836 91916 91929 92519 92678 92702 92739 97966 93332 93346 93618 93916 94144 94154 94271 94322 94589 95070 95121 95146 95238 95275 95354 95794 9598 96341 97918 98291 98474 98821 99017 99117 99313 99378 99934 99942 Ref FMC Column in Parts Lists Manufacturer Pure Carbon St Marys PA 15857 Int l inst Orange CT 06477 Grayhill LaGrange iL 60525 isolantite Stiriing NJ 07980 Winchester Oakvrlie CT 06779 Mili
39. DIGI CLS eee x x NICA GURE AND DISPLAY DATA xxkkxkkk kk kk o d P ES C SPACES 20 D SPACES 20 SET P2X6GO0 bridge setup string CALL IBART DIGI SET send string to bridge CALL IBRD DIGI C CALL IBRD DIGI D read measurement results PRINT C D gt display results CALL IBLOC DIGI CALL IBGTS GPIBO VW gt return to local control END OPERATION 3 85 Theory Section 4 4 1 INTRODUCTION 4 2 PRINCIPAL FUNCTIONS oa A 41 INTRODUCTION 4 1 1 General This instrument uses an unusual method of measurement which is quite different from those used in most previous impedance meters or bridges A thorough understanding of this method will be helpful in unusual applications of the instrument The following paragraph gives a brief overall description outlining the measurement technique to one familiar with impedance measurement methods A more detailed description of operation specific circuitry and control signals is given later 4 1 2 Brief Description of the 1689 Digibridge This Digibridge R RLC tester uses a patented measurement technique in which a microprocessor calculates the desired impedance parameters from a series of 6 or 8 voltage measurements 6 for FAST 6 for MED and 8 for SLOW measurement rates These measurements include quadrature 90 degree and inverse 180 degree vector components of the voltages across the device under test Zx the DUT and acros
40. FIXTURE CONNECTIONS 2 3 2 6 BIAS VOLTAGE FOR THE DUT 2 4 2 7 HANDLER INTERFACE OPTION 2 5 2 8 IEEE 488 INTERFACE RN 2 9 2 9 ENVIROMENT 2 15 2 10 RACK MOUNTING 2 15 2 1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTION If the shipping carton is damaged ask that the carrier s agent be present when the instrument is unpacked Inspect the instrument for damage scratches dents broken parts etc If the instrument is damaged or fails to meet specifications notify the carrier and the nearest GenRad field office See list at back or this manual Retain the shipping carton and the padding material for the carrier s inspection 2 2 DIMENSIONS Figure 2 1 The instrument is supplied in a bench configuration i e in a cabinet with resilient feet for placement on a table The overall dimensions are given in the figure The two cabinet styles differ as follows 1889 smaller 1689M larger keypad horizontal display tiltcd keypad amp display on front vertical instrument does not tilt instrument tilts for convenience test fixture provided on front test fixture always remote BNC cables bench use primarily rack possible multiple use rack shelf bench INSTr J LATION 2 1 114 mm F 375 mm 343 mm 14 8 In 13 5 in 147 mm FRONT 5 8 in 1689M i k 440 mm ge p 377 mm cum 17 3 in 14 8 in 60060 0 Figure 2 1 Overall dimensions of the Digibridge testers 1689 and 1689M 2 3 POWER LINE CONNECTION Figure 2 2 The po
41. GO 2 5107 2 GO 3 5157 9 GO 4 5207 NQ GO 5 5257 N GO 6 5307 NQ GO 7 5357 f GO 8 5407 2 GO 9 5457 O Go 10 5507 Q Go 11 5557 0 GO 12 5607 2 GO 13 5657 N NO GO 14 0000 N NO GO 0 5000 2 GO 1 NOTE 1 When using the 1689 9605 remote test fixture use the START bar and observe the GO NO G indicators on this fixture rather than those on the Digibridge NOTE 2 When the handler interface option is present the bin signal lines can be checked with a scope during the above procedure to verify their logic low state Refer to the interface option schematic in Section 6 5 9 RECALIBRATION 5 9 1 Preparation Introduction This service procedure requires a set of external calibration resistors whose R and Q values are exactly known and can require a frequency counter See table in next paragraph For the frequency correction the counter makes a measurement but for the four internal resistance standards the Digibridge makes the measurements After recalibration the Digibridge retains in RAM the corrections that the microprocessor needs to compensate for the small errors in the actual values of test frequency and internal standard resistor parameters Therefore the Digibridge calculates its measurement results correctly accomplishing by calculation the same result that would be obtained if the recalibration process actually trimmed the internal standards exactly to their nominal values Required Equipment Refer to Table 5 14 SERVICE
42. HOLD RANGE to light the RANGE HELD indicator To return to the normal autoranging feature press the same two keys again making the RANGE HELD indicator unlit To Hold the Range of a Sample DUT One way to get into the desired range is to measure a DUT known to be in that range thus Measure the DUT as usual Verify that the desired range is confirmed by the measurement display Press SHIFT HOLD RANGE to light the RANGE HELD indicator To return to the normal autoranging feature press the same two keys again making the RANGE HELD indicator unlit To Hold the Range selected by Use of a Parameter Key Another way to get into the desired range is to use a parameter key thus OPERA TION 3 31 Select ENTER function with the FUNCTION key Press the appropriate parameter key such as Cs D repeatedly watching the units indicators The range advances with each repetition enabl ing you to determine the present range by the pattern of changes Notice that there is not always a change of unit multiplier with each range change Refer to the table in paragraph 3 3 4 Press SHIFT HOLD RANGE to light the RANGE HELD indicator To return to the normal autoranging feature press the same two keys again making the RANGE HELD indicator unlit To Hold Range by Number If you know the desired range number see table in paragraph 3 4 2 use the special function key as follows Select ENTER with the FUNCTION key Then For ra
43. Metalized Polyester GE BA 19A106C 10 uF Polystyrene ARCO 1PJ 334J 0 33 uF 1PJ 333J 0 033 uF 1PJ 3323J 0 0033 uF Inductors J W Miller Non Ferrous 9220 28 1000 uH Ferrite Core 9250 107 100 mH Equivalents may be substituted CAUTION Be sure that the voltage switch rear panel is correctly Tolerance set for your power line 90 to 125 V or 180 to 250 V that no components are connected to the test fixture and that the EXTERNAL BIAS switch is OFF 5 4 2 Performance Verification Procedure a After the line voltage switch has been set to correspond to the input line voltage connect the line cord and switch the POWER ON The Digibridge then enters an automatic self check routine and displays a sequence of codes If one of these displays persists a check failure has occurred and further checks or measurements are inhibited See paragraph 3 13 Normally upon completion of the power up self check the following preset or default conditions are established lighting a vertical line of indicators However if the keyboard is locked the locked in conditions are re established and most of the keyboard indicators are dark Normal FUNCTION MEASURE DISPLAY VALUE MEASURE RATE SLOW MEASURE MODE CONT EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT SERIES 5 4 SERVICE 196 196 196 196 196 ooooc eo 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 5 10 The main panel displays and indicators RLC and QDR will normally come up with random me
44. POWER ON This is generally necessary to permit the power up self checks to pass Protection The Digibridge is internally protected from damage from charged capacitors with stored energy up to joule at any voltage up to 60 V CAUTION If your test procedure includes charging capacitors to higher energy or higher voltage before or during connection to the Digibridge EXTERNAL PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN TO PROTECT THE INSTRUMENT OPERATION 3 47 Operating Procedure a If TRIGGERED measure mode is to be used calculate the delay that is suitable for the largest value capacitor in the group to be measured with external bias thus Delay Cx Vbias Imax 10 Rstd Cx seconds NOTE Cx is the capacitance of the DUT in farads Vbias is the external bias voltage in volts Imax is the maximum current from the external supply usually 0 2 amperes Rstd is 102400 for range 1 6400 for range 2 400 for range 3 25 for range 4 See table in paragraph 3 4 2 If the calculated delay is greater than the normal settling time 7 to 12 ms for 1 kHz measurements then program the Digibridge to use this delay See paragraph 3 5 3 b The special shorting routine is recommended see para 3 7 3 enable it as follows Select ENTER function and press 2 SHIFT SPECIAL 3 Select MEASURE function c Observe correct polarity when inserting DUT into test fixture Bias POSITIVE polarity is at the LEFT low terminals of the 1689 Digibr
45. Remove four screws 2 at left 2 at right that pass through the sides of the chassis just behind the rear edge of the bezel into flanges of the subpanel Pull the front panel assembly forward and tilt it face down Notice that moving the bezel forward leaves the POWER ON OFF push rod unsupported at the front For reassembly be sure to check that this push rod is attached via a short piece of rubber tubing to the power switch Guide the front end of this rod through its hole in the bezel while bringing the front panel assembly into position The bottom access panel should be out of the way during this procedure SERVICE 5 21 Notice also that if the BNC connector bracket is at the front its shielded cables must be kept to the left of the display panel connector board during reassembly to avoid pinching the cables i To remove the keyboard module Remove the four screws all with their heads to the right that hold the keyboard assembly to thl subpanel at the right and the keyboard bracket at the left Remove this assembly To separate the keyboard remove 4 screws that pass through the mounting plate Reassembly note be sure that all keys and switches of the keyboard are properly located in their holes in the subpanel before tightening the four screws in the subpanel and bracket Also plug the two cables into the keyboard before attaching the front panel assembly to the chassis IMPORTANT each of these cables plugs onto a row of p
46. Resistance and Inductance 2 Rpt Gal Rot Jol X ol jol Ro Z R jol 2 m s s R Jol oL R Q Q os R ol 2 Q 1 Le nq Lp 5 ip gt 1 Q z 2 Lt or bs Lp 14D2 R oL 1 R Q A Qol R S B j PU OL y p eG Resistance and Capacitance 1 S WCs 2 R D R 1 joC5 Z R as ILE SEM HS DEALER AUN s OC 1 joR C 1 D D D oR C D 1 Q o RC C 14D T C Go ed s 1 p 1 0 s 2 2 _ D 1 D Ros 1 D2 Rb ns D2 Rs R 20 R z 1 z A eC P OCD Rp G B C y G Joc e C R5 Rs S 60046 0 Figure 3 7 Equivalent circuits and mathematical relationships for lossy inductors and capacitors ESR for Capacitors The total loss of a capacitor can be expressed in several ways including D and ESR which stands for equivalent series resistance and which is designated Rs in the preceding paragraph To obtain ESR be sure that the SERIES indicator is lit if you want ESR displayed simultaneously with Cs push the Cs Rs parameter key if you want the 5 place resolution for ESR push the Rs Q key Equivalent series resistance is typically much larger than the actual ohmic series resistance of the wire leads and foils that are physically in series with the heart of a capacitor because ESR includes also the effect of dielectric loss ESR is related to D by the formula ESR Rs D wCs where w represents omega 2 pi times frequency Parallel Equivalent Circui
47. Semicoa Costa Mesa CA 92626 Silicon Genri Westminster CA 92683 Advanced Micro Devices Sunnyvale CA 94086 Intei Santa Clara CA 95051 Solitron Devices Jupiter Fi 33458 Constanta Montreal QUE CAN Nationa Ltd Montreal QUE CAN Mallory indianapolis IN 46206 Marlin Rockwelt Jamestown NY 14701 McGill Mtg Valpariso iN 46383 Honeywell Minneapolis MN 55408 Muter Chicago L 60638 National Meirose MA 02176 New Departure Hyatt Saedusky OH 44870 Norma Hoffman Stantord CT 06904 RCA New York NY 10020 Raytheon Waltham MA 02154 Mostek Carrollton T X 75006 GHZ Devices S Chelemsford MA 01824 Mire Networks Worcester MA 01606 Monsanto Palo Aito CA 94304 Datei Systems Canton MA 02021 Aries Elctres Frenchtown NJ 08825 Diablo Systems Hayward CA 94545 Centre Eng State College PA 16801 Plessev Santa Ana CA 92705 SKF tnd Philadelphia PA 19132 Stettner Trush Cazenovia NY 13035 Sangamo Elctrc Springtieid 1L 62705 Xenon Latham NY 12110 Tyton Milwaukee WI 53209 Shaticeoss Seima NC 27576 Assoc Prec Prod Huntsville AL 35805 Shure Bros Evanston IL 60202 6 6 PARTS LISTS AND DIAGRAMS GSA FSS H4 2 56289 5771 58553 59730 59875 61007 61637 61864 63743 65092 70106 70109 70417 70485 70563 70611 71126 71279 71294 71400 71450 71468 71482 71590 71666 71707 71729 71744 71785 71823 72136 72619 759815 76149 76241 76381 76385 76487 76545 77132 77147 77
48. THE DUT NOTE Keep the EXTERNAL BIAS switch OFF and the BIAS ON indicator unlit for all measurements of inductors and resistors and also for capacitors unless they are to be measured with dc bias applied 3 7 1 Internal Bias To measure capacitors with the internally available 2 volt dc bias voltage applied use the following procedure The FUNCTION can be either MEASURE or ENTER a Press SHIFT INT BIAS keys so that the BIAS ON indicator is lit NOTE This indication for internal bias is somewhat dimmer than the other keyboard indicators b The special shorting routine is recommended see para 3 7 3 enable it as follows Select ENTER function and then press 2 SHIFT SPECLAL 3 Select MEASURE function c Wait at least I second before initiating measurement to allow for settling of internal circuits In the CONTINUOUS mode disregard displays for this interval This delay is associated with enabling the internal bias it applies to each DUT only if internal bias is disabled for each change of DUT d Observe correct polarity when inserting DUT into test fixture Bias POSITIVE polarity is at the LEFT low terminals of the 1689 Digibridge built in test fixture as well as the remote test fixtures 1689 9600 and 1689 9605 Bias NEGATIVE polarity is at the RIGHT e For each DUT in the CONTINUOUS measure mode disregard the first displayed result and read the second Notice enough of the subsequent results to v
49. To enter a single QDR limit always bin 0 press parameter key such as Cs D appropriate to DUT To change range and unit multi pliers press same key repeatedly Enter max limit of D or Rs Q with R enter min limit of Rp or Q with L as follows Keyed numbers appear on left hand display Example for Q limit of 85 press 8 5 SHIFT BIN NO O0 O Value now moves to right hand display confirming storage of limit Note If you make a mistake press parameter key again and repeat the entry c To enter RLC limits for bins 1 13 three methods are given Symmetrical percentage tolerances nested bins Enter nominal value of DUTs to be sorted The value appears on the RLC display Units were selected in step b Exampie for nominal value 123 40 press 1 2 3 4 SHIFT NOM VAL Enter for bin i the narrowest percent tolerance to be sorted Example for a tolerance of 0 296 press 1 2 96 SHIFT BIN NO 0 1 The numerical limits for RLC are computed and rounded off values displayed upper limit at left lower at right For bin 2 enter the next wider tolerance similarly then bins 3 4 5 always 2 digits for bin no Various nominal values bucket sort Plan for non overlapping bins each with a nominal value and limits defined by percent tolerance For bin 1 enter nominal value and tolerance as described above For each successive bin similarly enter a new nominal value then the tole
50. byte 1 byte 2 byte 3 byte 4 byte 5 byte 6 byte 7 byte 8 EP s uae 176543210 7 7 76543210 Normal meas mt 00 Overrange loi Underrange 10 Invalid meas 11 00 01 10 11 Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4 Bin number 001 QDR 010 QDR amp bin no 011 RLC 100 RLC amp bin no 101 RLC QDR bin 111 RLC value is RLC value is QDR value is QDR value is Ci t 4B mm o T Parameter L Q Parameter C D Parameter C R Parameter R Q 00 o1 10 11 Ratio either 00 Delta percent 01 10 11 Value default Delta RLC BIN 0 BIN 1 BIN 2 BIN 3 0000 BIN 4 0001 0010 0011 0100 etc etc BIN 13 BIN 14 Bit 3 of STATUS byte does not convey data 1101 1110 OPERATION 3 79 The following examples illustrate how to obtain ordinary base 10 numbers from the compacted binary data EXAMPLE 1 Bytes are shown separated by spaces STATUS RLC e RLC mantissa QDR e QDR mantissa OTHER byte 1 byte 2 byte 3 byte 4 byte 5 byte 6 byte 7 byte 8 76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210 0001x111 01100101 11100001 00001001 01110101 10100000 00000000 01100111 The example l interpretation is as follows Byte 1 Normal measurement Range 2 RLC QDR and bin number data are needed Byte 2 bit 7 Sign of C value is Byte 2 other
51. c is 7 ppm Select ENTER function and press 7 SHIFT SPECIAL 0 Notice that the correction C appears in the left display followed by a decimal point The correction has NOT been entered yet Confirm the value Then continue the entry process by pressing 1 6 8 9 The decimal point should disappear indicating that the correction has been entered e Confirm normalcy as follows Press 1 SHIFT LFREQUENCY The left display should now be 1 Press 1 2 SHIFT VOLTAGE The left display should be 1 SERVICE 5 57 f Now continue with the zeroing and range recalibration procedures starting at paragraph 5 9 2 5 9 8 Frequency Correction K Factor Procedure The Frequency K Factor correction is for small changes related to loading errors and timing errors with respect to frequency There is one K factor for each of the four ranges These corrections are determined during initial factory calibration and the procedure is not necessary to repeat unless the contents of the RAM have been loot due to battery failure or other corruption This procedure is not recommended during normal recalibration see paragraphs 5 9 1 5 9 6 PROCEDURE a Reset K factors to typical values required as a starting reference 1 Press FUNCTION to ENTER 2 Press 1 6 8 9 9 SHIFT SPECIAL SHIFT 3 Press START to indicate storage of K factors b Check K factors 1 Press R Q 2 For RANGE 1 press 1 6 8 9
52. displayed measurement uF NOTE The DQ display should show D 0085 to 0115 k Calculate the calibration factor K as follows K D1 D2 uF Example Suppose that in step e the display is 1 0013 and the value of the standard is 1 0006 then D1 0007 uF In step i the nominal is 1 0000 suppose that the display is 1 0024 then D2 0024uF The correction K would therefore be 0007 0024 0017 uF I Reset the capacitance standard dial to CAPACITANCE 10 uF m Read the RLC display and correct it by adding 10K For example if the display is 10 023 uF and if K 0017 the corrected measurement is 10 006 uF Verify that the corrected measurement is within the acceptable extremes for the 10 uF setting in Table 5 8 n Reset the capacitance standard dial to CAPACITANCE 100 uF Read the RLC display and correct it by adding 100K As in step m verify that the corrected measurement is within the acceptable extremes shown in Table 5 8 SERVICE 5 43 Table 5 9 RESISTANCE ACCURACY CHECKS at 1 kHz Standard Typical RLC Display Resistor Equivalent Measure Standard Digibridge Acceptable Setting Circuit Rate Accuracy Accuracy Extremes 10 00 ohms Series SLOW 03 02 9 995 to 10 005 25 00 ohms Series SLOW 018 02 24 990 to 25 010 25 00 ohms Series MD 018 05 24 893 to 25 017 25 00 ohms Series FAST 018 12 24 965 to 25 035 90 00 ohms Series SLOW 012 02 89 971 to 90 029 200 0 ohms Series SLOW 011
53. during factory calibration and recalibration if any The microprocessor controls the measurement sequence according to programs in the read only memory using stored operator selections that are made available through keyboard control or if you have the interface option by remote control command Selections include for example parameters R and Q L and Q C and D or C and R test voltage 005 to 1 275 V equivalent circuit series or parallel test rate SLOW MEDIUM or FAST frequency programmable from 12 Hz to 100 kHz in 503 steps delay up to 99999 ms and averaging 2 to 255 measurements etc The instrument normally autoranges to find the correct range but operation can be restricted to any of the four ranges 1 2 3 4 under keyboard control Each range is 4 octaves wide 16 1 with reduced accuracy extensions both above and below Leading zeroes before the decimal point are blanked out of the RLC and QDR displays 4 1 3 Block Diagram Figure 4 1 The block diagram shows the microprocessor in the upper center connected by data and address buses to digital circuitry including memories RAM and ROM and peripheral interface adaptors PIAs Analog circuitry is shown in the lower part of the diagram where Zx is supplied with a test signal at frequency f from a sine wave generator driven by a crystal controlled digital frequency divider circuit The P I signal selector and instrumentation amplifier supply an analog signal
54. error permitted by the accuracy specifications In this paragraph we discuss the cable related sources of error how to estimate it and how to correct for it NOTE We define the normal DUT interface here as the built in test fixture of the 1689 Digibridge or the 1689 9600 or 1689 9605 remote test fixture attached via 1689 9602 BNC cable to the 1689M Digibridge RETE MARTA A44 The Digibridge automatically compensates for capacitance between high terminals and low in the zero calibration Also the 5 terminal Kelvin circuitry is designed to minimize the effect of other cable and testfixture impedances on measurement accuracy However the following terms can be significant under some circumstances particularly if a long extender cable is used to reach beyond the normal DUT interface 1 Acm common mode accuracy term most significant on range 4 2 Ald capacitive loading accuracy term most significant on range 1 at high frequency Formulas and typical constants are given below for obtaining useful approximations to these terms Common Mode Accuracy Term Applies to any extension beyond instrument Acm 05 r jx Z of measured impedance where r jx is the series impedance in the II lead including the cable and Z is the DUT impedance However if you hav selected SERIES EQUIV CKT it is more useful to split Acm into the following 2 components for treating Ls and Cs errors separately from Rs er
55. higher than the normal high limit for automatic range change and there is a higher impedance range In either case an appropriate range change will improve accuracy If there is no appropriate range to change to the status is range end extension see below Range limits are different if CONSTANT VOLTAGE has been selected see paragraph 3 5 6 Range end extension if DUT impedance exceeds that of the largest R or L smallest C in basic range 1 Range 4 end extension if DUT impedance is less than that of the smallest R or L largest C in basic range 4 No possibility of changing range to improve accuracy Tf the measurement is outside of the display range display goes blank 9999999 is output in this numeric field Table 3 il DATA OUTPUT FORMAT FOR RLC VALUE delta deltaRLC OR RATIO Character Allowed Sequence Purpose Characters 1 Status space U O E I 2 Value or space delta RLC or ratio 3 Parameter L C R 4 Normal or space ratio mode 5 6 Units space H mH uF nF pF space space O kO 7 Format space 8 Sign space gc o5 Number 012345 6789 space 16 CR 17 Delimiter LF Footnotes see preceding page 3 66 OPERATION Meaning Normal operation measurement on a basic range Underrange held reduced accuracy Overrange held reduced accuracy End extension of range 1 or 4 reduced accuracy Invalid measurement due to signal overload Normal display A RLC Mode
56. illustrated in Figure 5 15 If this is true and if similarly normal waveform appears even when you select known problem test conditions the fault is probably NOT in the analog detector Introduction to Detailed Analysis The following trouble analysis procedures will serve as a guide for localizing a fault to a circuit area In some cases a specific component part can be isolated for replacement In other cases the problem can be narrowed down only to a circuit board Except for the short cuts indicated above follow the procedure strictly in the order given doing the principal steps a b c d until a failure is found If so do the secondary steps if any are given at the point of failure 1 2 3 NOTE Reference designators such as MB U21 are frequently abbreviated in the following text for example U21 because the context of the service procedure should leave no doubt as to which board is being serviced SERVICE 5 29 MSR 8 am BIG L P CMP L ov INTEGRATOR OUTPUT REF ISW 60041 0 Figure 5 15 Timing diagram for the detector portion of the power up self check with keys to the crucial events that are checked Labels 7 thru 1 correspond to tests identified with displays of 77777 7777 thru 77777 1111 respectively When the instrument is making measurements the waveforms are different in many details 5 7 2 Power Up Self Check and Certain Aborted Measurements Figure 5 15 The following outlin
57. in paragraph 5 9 1 omit the procedures of paragraph 5 9 7 If necessary at all these steps should be done before paragraphs 5 9 2 through 5 9 6 b Connect the counter as follows to measure the period of the test frequency nominally 1 kHz If the Digibridge is not disassembled provide for a ground cor nection as follows Otherwise see NOTE below Insert a 6 32 1 2 inch long screw into the tapped hole at the right hand end of the Digibridge s test fixture tighten gently Connect the ground return of the counter s probe to this screw Insert the short circuit wire used above for example into the right hand slot of the test fixture only Connect the counter s probe to this wire NOTE If calibration is being done with the main board out of the cabinet a more convenient ground connection is found near the front edge of the board at a guard jumper terminal labeled E1 on the board DUT CONNECTOR GND on the schematic diagram b Measure the test signal frequency preferably as a period and calculate its reciprocal For example if the period is 1 000007 ms the frequency is 0 999993 kHz c Calculate the frequency correction c erroi in ppm as follows measured frequency 1 000000 kHz pose t ULIS Qu Lu tu eset x 1 000 000 For example c 0 999993 1 000000 x 1 000 000 7 ppm d Enter the frequency correction c error in ppm as follows The allowable range of entry is 99 to 99 For example if the value of
58. keyboard If only one key or indicator malfunctions check that portion of the keyboard Test Signal To check performance of the test signal source use a scope to look at the open circuit signal at the Ih terminal of the test fixture right front contact be sure there is no DUT The signal on each range should be an un distorted sine wave at the selected frequency with the top of the waveform about 3 4 V and the trough about 0 85 V Analog Front End and Detector To check the entire analog front end install any typical DUT in the test fixture select the default test conditions including CONT MEASURE MODE by switching POWER OFF and ON The keyboard must not be locked Use an oscilloscope to look at the signal at the instrumentation amplifier output main board U61 pin 14 This waveform should switch back and forth between two I kHz sinewaves whose amplitudes are proportional to the voltages across the DUT and the internal standard resistor If the DUT is an open circuit or a short circuit this signal should switch back and forth between a very small ac signal and a 6 8 V pk pk ac signal If these signal levels are incorrect or the signals are distorted the problem is either in the sinewave generator or in the analog front end Check this waveform with known problem test conditions If this signal appears to be correct use an oscilloscope to verify that the signal at main board U64 pin 7 has the characteristic staircase sawtooth waveform
59. light The RLC display should be 00000 pF Press MEASURE MODE key to select CONT Press EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT key to select SERIES g Set the decade capacitor to 10 pF If necessary press the START button Verify that the C and D measurements subsequently displayed on the Digibridge are within the limits given in the first line of Table 5 7 h Similarly for each line in the table set the capacitor and the Digibridge measurement rate and verify that the resulting measurements are satisfactory i Disconnect the 1688 9600 extender cable from the capacitor and the Digibridge NOTE Whenever doing short circuit or open circuit zeroing remember that the GO light to watch is the one on the keyboard not on any remote test fixture for example 5 40 SERVICE Table 5 7 CAPACITANCE ACCURACY CHECKS RANGES 1 TO 3 Capacitor Meas Digibridge Decade C RLC Display RLC Display QDR Display Setting Rate Accuracy Accuracy Min Max Max Range 10 pF SLOW 02 5 0596 9 493 10 507 6100 ppm 100 pF SLOV 02 5595 99 430 100 57 2500 ppm 1500 pF SLOV 02 083 1498 4 1501 6 700 ppm 1500 pF MED 0596 083 1498 0 1502 0 1002 ppm 1500 pF FAST 15 083 1496 5 1503 5 1705 ppm 6400 pF SLOV 02 058 6395 0 6405 0 500 ppm Range 2 10 nF SLON 02 055 9 9925 10 008 200 ppm 25 nF SLOV 02 052 24 982 25 018 200 ppm 25 nF MED 05 052 24 974 25 026 500 ppm 25 nF FAST 15 05296 24 949 25 051 1200 ppm 100
60. limit entry keys shown under Entry verify that the Digibridge numerical displays are like the numbers tabulated in the same row of the table under Displays Make all entries as tabulated SERVICE 5 49 d Select on the Digibridge FUNCTION MEASURE DISPLAY BIN No e Refer to Table 5 13 For each setting of the resistance standard verify that the DQR display is blank the bin RLC display is a single digit as tabulated and the GO NO GO lights work as tabulated Table 5 12 ENIRY OF LIMITS Entry RLC Display DQ Display none blank blank 5 SHIFT NOM VALUE 5 0000 blank 1 SHIFT BIN No 0 0 blank 1000 1 95 SHIFT BIN No 0 1 5 0500 4 950 2 6 SHIFT BIN No j 0 2 5 1000 4 900 3 96 SHIFT BIN No 0 3 5 1500 4 850 4 76 SHIFT BIN No 0 4 5 2000 4 800 5 76 SHIFT BIN No 0 5 5 2500 4 750 6 SHIFT BIN No 0 6 5 3000 4 700 7 95 SHIFT BIN No 0 7 5 3500 4 650 8 96 SHIFT BIN No 0 8 5 4000 4 600 9 95 SHIFT BIN No 0 9 5 4500 4 550 10 SHIFT BIN No 0 10 5 5000 4 500 11 SHIFT BIN No 0 11 5 5500 4 450 12 96 SHIFT BIN No 0 12 5 6000 4 400 13 SHIFT BIN No o 13 5 6500 4 350 5 50 SERVICE Table 5 13 BIN ASSIGNVENT CHECK Resistance Standard GO NO GO Bin Display Set To 5000 Q GO 1 5057 2
61. limits 1 26 0 26 SHIF T BIN No 0 4 j Set bin 5 limits 2 1 SHIFT BIN No 0 5 k Set bin 6 limits 3 25 2 25 SHIF T BIN No 0 6 l Close bin 7 if open 0 26 SHIF T BIN No 0 7 m Close bins 8 through 13 similarly if used before NOTE For any bin the less negative or more positive percentage must be entered first as shown clearly in steps f and k Because there are no overlaps there will be no default assignment to the lower numbered bin Binnumber sequence is immaterial 3 8 6 Notes on Limit Entries in General For additional detail refer to the condensed instructions on the reference card under the Digibridge and to the following notes Frequency It is NOT necessary to select the test frequency first Comparison results are valid even if the test frequency is changed later in the entry j measurement procedure Bin 0 The limit entered in bin 0 is always QDR It is an upper or lower limit on the secondary measured value depending on the parameter selection as tabulated Rs Q upper Ls Q lower Cs D upper Cs Rs upper Rp Q upper Lp Q lower Cp D upper Cp Rp lower Unsymmetrical Limit Pairs Enter 2 percentages for the bin One or both may be unspecified sign or Enter first the one that yields the larger absolute value of RLC Unused Bins Initially at power up bins 1 through 13 are closed so that unused ones can be ignored Every
62. lit again c Short Circuit Short the fixture with a clean copper wire AWG 18 to 30 length 5 to 8 cm Press these keys 1 6 8 9 2 SHIFT SHORT Note the GO indicator being lit and two fives confirm the previous step Press the START button The GO indication disappears Wait for the GO indicator to be lit again Remove the short circuit NOTE For best accuracy Repeat this procedure daily and after changing test fixture adaptors or frequency 3 2 OPERATION 3 1 4 Routine Measurement a Verify or select measurement conditions as follows indicated by keyboard lights press the adjacent key to change a selection Function MEASURE FUNCTION key a necessary selection Display VALUE DISPLAY key for normal RLC QDR results Measure rate SLOW MEASURE RATE key for best accuracy Measure mode TRIGGERED MEASURE MODE key optional Equivalent circuit SERIES EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT key see paragraph 3 3 If you are in doubt about how to connect the device to be tested with the Digibridge refer to paragraph 3 2 below b To measure any passive component without knowing whether it is essentially a resistor inductor or capacitor use automatic parameter selection This feature is provided at power up and remains enabled as long as you do NOT select any particular parameter Automatic parameter selection can be disabled by pressing the Cs D key for example Once disabled this feature can be enable
63. mH H the QDR display shows Q quality factor If NEG RLC is lit DUT is capacitive f To measure Rand Q of a Resistor R range 00001 ohm to 99999 kilohms Q range 0001 to 9999 Press Rs Q Place resistor in test fixture Press START The RLC display shows Rs series resistance and units ohms kilohms the QDR display shows Q quality factor If NEG QDR is lit DUT is capacitive if not lit DUT is inductive OPERATION 3 3 NOTE This procedure is basic there are many alternatives described later You can select and program for other parameters equivalent circuits types of results displayed test conditions measurement rate and bin sorting etc 3 2 CONNECTING THE DUT 3 2 1 General Connect the device under test DUT whose parameters are to be measured WARNING Charged capacitors can be dangerous even lethal Never handle their terminals it they have been charged to more than 80 V Routine discharging procedures may not be perfectly dependable NOTE Clean the leads or the DUT if they are noticeably dirty even though the test fixture contacts will usually bite through a film ot wax to provide adequate connections 3 2 2 Using the Integral Test Fixture on the 1689 Digibridge tor Radial Lead DUTs Figure 3 1 NOTE For use of a similar remote test fixture refer to paragraph 3 2 4 If the DUT is a radial lead component or has parallel leads at one side insert them into the Digibridge test fixture sl
64. most likely to be present in a low resistance resistor is series inductance which has no effect on the measurement of series R Larger Resistors between 1 kilohm and 10 megohms Parallel 0 250 kHz Resistors greater than 10 megohms Parallel 0 030 kHz As explained above select a low test frequency Select parallel because the reactive component most likely to be present in a high resistance resistor is shunt capacitance which has no effect on the measurement of parallel R If the Q is less than 0 1 the measured Rp is probably very close to the dc resistance Theory Series and Parallel Parameters Figure 3 7 An impedance that is neither pure reactance nor a pure resistance can be represented at any specific frequency by either a series or a parallel combination of resistance and reactance The values of resistance and reactance used in the equivalent circuit depend on whether a series or parallel combination is used Keeping this concept in mind will be valuable in operation of the instrument and interpreting its measurements The equivalent circuits are shown in the accompanying figure together with useful equations relating them Notice that the Digibridge measures the equivalent series components Rs Ls or Cs if you select SERIES EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT It measures the parallel equivalent components Rp Lp or Cp if you select PARALLEL D and Q have the same value regardless whether series or parallel equivalent circuit is calculated
65. nF SLOV 02 05196 99 929 100 07 200 ppm T Range 3 200 nF SLOV 02 0596 199 86 200 14 200 ppm 400 nF SLOV 02795 0596 399 72 400 28 200 ppm 400 nF MED 05 05 399 60 400 40 500 ppm 400 nF FAST 15 0596 399 20 400 80 1200 ppm 1000 nF SLOV 0 05 999 30 1000 7 200 ppm These ranges of acceptable displays are based on specified accuracy of decade capacitor recently calibrated If the capacitor values are known to higher accuracy by special calibration or lesser accuracy because of long term drift the acceptable RLC max and min criteria must be revised accordingly Based on D values stated in GenRad documentation for the type 1413 decade capacitor If capacitor D values are known more accurately the acceptable QDR display criteria can be reduced accordingly SERVICE 5 41 Table 5 8 CAPACITANCE ACCURACY CHECKS RANGE 4 RLC Display RLC Display Capacitor Digibridge St d C Uncorrected Correction Acceptable D Setting Accuracy Accuracy Min Max See text Min Max 1 uF Used to determine K 0085 0115 10 uF 0206 0796 9 991 10 009 10K 0085 0115 100 uF 0206 0796 99 91 100 09 100K 0085 0115 5 8 3 Capacitance Measurement Accuracy Large C Range 4 This procedure follows after paragraph 5 8 2 Leave the test frequency at 1 kHz the test voltage at 1 V the measure rate SLOW the selected parameter Cs D and the RANGE HELD indicator NOT lit a Connect the 1657 9600 extender cable with ba
66. pads with numbers 1 thru 6 between the rows The five device dependent bits of the address are set by this switch 5 60 SERVICE c Set in the desired bits as follows To enter logical 1 s depress pads nearest the end of the board To enter logical 0 s depress pads on the other side of the DIP switch the side marked with a sign The address is read from 5 to 1 not using 6 Thus for example to set up the address 00011 cnter 0 s at positions 5 4 3 enter I s at positions 2 1 This makes the talk address C and thc listen address NOTE Strictly speaking the address includes more S2 determines only the device dcpendent bits of the address You cannot choose talk and listen addresses separately only as a pair The list of possible pairs is shown in Table 2 3 In the above example the remote message codes MLA and MTA are X0100011 and X1000011 respectively Thus the listen address and the talk address are distinguished although they contain the same set of device dependent bits which are set into S2 d Replace the interface option assembly in its former place Reassembly note align board edges carefully with connector and guide that are inside of instrument while pushing interface option into position 5 10 2 Making 5 Volts Available via the Handler Interface Connector A five volt low power dc bus is normally brought out via pin 10 of tile handler interface connector This bus is useful to supply voltage for opto cou
67. power line end conforms to the Standard for Grounding Type Attachment Plug Caps and Receptacles ANSI C73 11 1966 which specifies limits of 125 V and 15 A This power cord is listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc for 125 V 10 A If your power line voltage is in the higher range up to 250 V be sure to use a power cord that is approved for 250 V The end that connects to the Digibridgel8 tester should have a connector of the type that is on the power cord supplied the other end an approved connector to mate with your standard receptacle A typical configuration for a 250 V IS A plug is illustrated in the accompanying figure 2 2 INSTALLATION If the fuse must be replaced be sure to use a slow blow fuse of the current and voltage ratings shown on the rear panel regardless of the line voltage 4 75 B ALTERNATE FORM OF G PIN 60029 0 Figure 2 2 Configuration of 250 V 15 A plug Dimensions in mm This is listed as NEMA 6 15P Use for example Hubbell plug number 5666 2 4 LINE VOLTAGE REGULATION The accuracy of measurements accomplished with precision electronic test equipment operated from ac line sources can often be seriously degraded by fluctuations in primary input power Line voltage variations of 15 are commonly encountered even in laboratory environments Although most modern electronic instruments incorporate some degree of regulation possible power source problems should be considered for every inst
68. range 2 byte RO Hcld range 1 2 byte R1 Hold range 2 2 byte R2 Hold range 3 2 byte R3 Hold range 4 2 byte R4 Autorange 2 byte R5 Frequency Value in kHz f Floating point Ff Zero Calibration Disable 2 byte Z0 Enable open 2 byte Z1 Enable short 2 byte Z2 Output Format Normal not compacted 2 byte x0 Lower case x Compacted binary format 2 byte xl Lower case x Data Output None 2 byte XO Bin 2 byte X1 QDR 2 byte X2 QR Bin 2 byte X3 RLC 2 byte X4 RLC Bin 2 byte X5 RLC QDR 2 byte X6 RLC QDR Bin 4 2 byte X7 RLC QDR Bin on FAIL only 2 byte X8 Same on FAIL Bin on PASS 2 byte X9 Nominal Value Value in ohms henries farads n Floating point Nn Limit Entry Bin 3 byte Bbb High limit in h Floating point Hh Low limit in 1 Floating point Ll Initiation Start a measurement like start switch 2 byte GO Manual Start Enable switch 2 byte Wo Disable switch 2 byte Wi Keyboard Lock Uniock 2 byte KO Lock 2 byte K1 Indicates Turn On Conditions OPERATION 3 75 Table 3 17 Continued COMMANDS USED IN PROGRAMMING VIA IEEE 488 BUS Program Category Program Selection Command Type Command Entry Average of measurements a Floating point Aa Internal Bias Off 2 byte UO On 2 byte U1 Bin Summary Disable output 2 byte EO Enable output 2 byte E1 Reset bin summary to 0 2 byte E2 Measurement Normal routine highest Routines speed 2 byte QO Signal reversal use for low frequency hum reject
69. ratio display that can be interpreted as mF press 1 0 0 0 SHIF T NOM VALUE d Enable the desired special function the pertinent commands are 2 SHIFT SPECIAL 6 1 SHIFT SPECIAL 6 0 SHIFT SPECIAL 6 e To display measurement nominal e To display nominal measurement e To disable ratio displays e To enable measurements select MEASURE with the FUNCTION key f To display the ratio in the left hand display area select VALUE with the DISPLAY key After measurement the right hand display will be QDR as usual however if the parameter selection is C R the unit5 for R will NOT be indicated NOTE The Digibridge indicates that its principal measurement is a ratio by keeping ALL units and 96 indicators unlit If the parameter selection is C R the ratio display in the left hand display area is accompanied by a resistance value in the QDR display area without units indication If the ambiguity in units ohms or kilohms must be resolved the following method is suggested The units can be determined for a typical DUT by temporarily disabling ratio display While ratio is disabled make measurements also with parameter selection C D and observe the typical value of D Now you are prepared to measure a batch of similar capacitors with ratio display For any of them a temporary change of parameter selection from C R to C D and another measurement will provide a quick ch
70. recornnended Extender cable for connection to parts handler 1657 9600 large or remote DOT custom test fixture etc Length 100 cm 40 in One end fits test fixture of Digibridge other end terminates in 5 stackable banana plugs 1 recornnended Test fixture adaptor for BNC cable 1689 9601 recomnended B cable assembly 4 color coded cables with known 1689 9602 stray parameters 90 cm 36 in long 1 recomnended Remote test fixture I ike the fixture on t he 1689 9600 Digibridge adaptable in many ways with BNC connectors Use 1689 9601 adaptor and 1689 9602 cable INTRODUCTION 1 11 Table 1 3 continued ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS FOR 1689 DIGIBRIDGE Quantity Description Part Number 1 recommended Remote test fixture like the 1689 9600 also has 1689 9605 START bar GO NO GO lights which function only if the Digibridge has an interface option Use 1689 9601 adaptor and 1689 9602 cable as well as the 1689 2400 cable included with this fixture 1 available Extender cable for connection to standards large 1688 9600 or remote DUT custom test fix tur e dielectric measurement cell etc Length 30 cm 12 in One end fits test fixture of Digibridge other end terminates in four type 874 coaxial connectors available Rack mount kit slides forward for complete access 1657 9000 recommended Calibration kit contains six Kelvin connected 1689 9604 references four precision resistances open and short that plug i
71. skin contact and work surface through a commercially available personnel grounding device is typically in the range of 250 kilohms to 1 megohm If any circuit boards or IC packages are to be stored or transported enclose them in conductive envelopes and or carriers Remove the items from such envelopes only with the above precautions handle IC packages without touching the contact pins Avoid circumstances that are likely to produce static charges such as wearing clothes of synthetic material sitting on a plastic covered or rubber footed stool particularly while wearing wool combing your hair or making extensive erasures These circumstances are most significant when the air is dry When testing static sensitive devices be sure dc power is on before during and after application of test signals Be sure all pertinent voltages have been switched off while boards or components are removed or inserted whether hard wired or plugged in The symbol shown below may appear on circuit boards and or schematic diagrams to call attention to static sensitive component parts However the absence of such a symbol does NOT assure the absence of static sensitive devices CERTIFICATION Products provided by GenRad are thoroughly tested and calibrated to meet product specifications A Record of Certification of conformance which certifies that the product meets its specifications and that its calibra tion is traceable to appropriate national
72. so that its internal contacts which are off center are clooe to the DUT To remove each adaptor lift with a gentle tilt left or right never forward or back Figure 3 2 Use of the adaptors supplied for connection of an axial lead DUT to the Digibridge test fixture 3 6 OPERATION Figure 3 3 Remote test fixture 1689 9605 connected to 1689M Digibridge tester Figure 3 4 Remote test fixture 1689 9600 connected to 1689 Digibridge tester OPERATION 3 7 3 2 4 The 1689 9600 or 9605 Remote Test Fixture with 9602 BNC Cable Figures 3 3 3 4 Connection of the DUT at a remote test fixture normally requires Remote Test Fixture 1689 9600 1689 9605 or equivalent special fixture BNC Cable Assembly 1689 9602 supplied with 1689M Digibridge BNC Adaptor 1689 9601 NOT needed with 1689MDigibridge This remote test fixture functions like the one supplied on the 1689 Digibridge True Kelvin connections are made at the points of contact with the DUT leads The recommended cable should be used rather than any randomly chosen BNC patch cords because the known cable parameters enable you to make corrections for best accuracy Install the remote test fixture as follows a Remove any adaptors cables etc if present from the DUT port of the instrument test fixture of 1689 or BNC connectors of 1689M b If the instrument is a 1689 plug the BNC adaptor into the integral test fixture with the BNC connec
73. state controller command messages High state data bytes from the talker device Interface clear Low state returns portions of interface system to a known quiescent state Service request Low a talker or listener signals to the controller need for attention in the midst of the current sequence of events Remote enable Low state enables each device to enter remote mode when addressed to listen Remote control commands are conveyed while ATN is high High state all devices revert to local control End or Identify END if ATN is in high state then low state of EOI indicates end of a multiple byte data transfer sequence IDY if ATN is in low state then low state of EOI activates a parallel poll The 8 line data bus which conveys interface messages ATN low state or device dependent messages ATN high state such as remote control commands from the controller or from a talker device is typically sent concurrently with the delimiter linefeed character that terminates the string s of data output from the or 3 lines see para 2 8 4 IDY is not implemented in this Digibridge 2 12 INSTALLATION 2 8 4 Codes and Addresses General The device dependent messages such as instrument programming commands and measurement data which the digital interface exists to facilitate have to be coded in a way that is compatible between talkers and listeners They have to use the same language Addresses
74. temperature and humidity tolerances To safeguard the instrument during storage or shipment use protective packaging Service personnel refer to Section 5 When the Digibridge is mounted in a rack or other enclosed location make sure that the ambient temperature inside the rack does not exceed the limits specified under Environment in the Specifications at the front of this manual and that air can circulate freely past all air inlet and outlet vents 2 10 RACK MOUNTING 1689 9611 For 1689M Digibridge The 1689M Digibridge is more readily mounted in a rack than the 1689 Use this procedure a If the location of the four BNC connectors for test fixture cables is satisfactory go on to the next step Otherwise the BNC connector location can be moved from front to rear or vice versa this is a SI RVICE procedure described in Section 5 paragraph 5 5 INSTALLATION 2 15 b Preassemble the instrument with the shelf of the 1689 9611 Rack Mount Kit as follows Place the instrument on the shelf so that its feet drop through the large holes Lift the shelf up snugly under the instrument and secure them together with a No 10 32 screw through the small hole centered at the rear of the shelf into the corresponding tapped hole in the instrument s rear panel NOTE This screw is important for electrical grounding as well as for mechanical security c position this assembly in the rack as desired and fasten the shelf at the front of t
75. times are obtained with use of the high speed measurement option continuous measurement mode bin number display handler output and without IEEE Bus data output For other conditions refer to the table notes If the measurement mode is triggered programmed delay settling time if any should be added Normal power up conditions included a programmed delay of 7 f to 12 f ms depending upon measurement rate This delay can be programmed to zero or to any value up to 100 sec Test connections can be broken handler indexing can begin as soon as data acquisition is complete ACQ line low on handler interface See Note 4 in tables pio Measurement Modes Two test modes are available CONTINUOUS and TRIGGERED The CONTINUOUS mode makes successive measurements continuously updating the display after each measurement TRIGGERED measurements are initiated by the START button or remotely from the IEEE bus or from the Handler Interface and the measurement result is displayed until the next measurement is started Average The AVERAGE of any number of measurements from 1 to 255 may be made as desired in either of the two MEASURE MODES In the TRIGGERED mode the running average is displayed and the final value held until the START button is again depressed In the CONTINUOUS mode only the final value is displayed Test Voltage The RMS test voltage is selectable from 5 mV to 1 275 V in 5 mV steps The accuracy is 5 2 mV 1 001 f
76. unused bin that ha s previously been used except 14 must be closed by entering 0 as in the above examples Once closed it will stay closed until non zero percent limits are inserted 3 54 OPERATION Allowable Limits Max of 6 significant figures example 38 6719 or 999999 Bin Order Optional except for nested bins be sure the narrower limit pairs go into lower numbered bins because all overlap goes to the lower numbered bin Inhibiting Comparisons To inhibit all comparisons set nominal value to zero Then GO NO GO indicators stay off Subsequent setting of nominal value to any number except zero enables all comparisons as previously set up To inhibit QDR comparisons set bin 0 to the all pass extreme i e to 0000 for Rp or Q with L to 9999 for D or Rs or Q with R NOTE When POWER is switched ON if the keyboard is not locked nominal value is initialized at zero Therefore all bin sorting is initially inhibited Changing Entries Enter new value s or a zero to delete obsolete or erroneous nominal value or bin limits Do not attempt to change or enter a single separate upper or lower limit in a bin because any single percentage entered for a bin will be interpreted as a symmetrical pair of limits Changing nominal value does not change any limits but does determine the base for subsequent limit entries for specific bins After function is changed to MEASURE this nominal value will also serve as reference for
77. 0 100 0 100 100 00100 E 1 000 101 0 100 101 00101 F 1 000 110 amp 0 100 110 00110 G 1 000 111 0 100 111 001 11 H 1 001 000 0 101 000 01000 I 001 001 101 001 01001 J 1 001 010 0 101 010 01010 K 1 001 011 0 101 O11 01011 L 1 001 100 0 101 100 01100 M 1 001 101 0 101 101 01101 N 1 001 110 F 0 101 110 OA 11 0 Oo 1 001 111 0 101 111 0 1 acre P 1 010 000 0 0 110 000 10000 Q 1 010 001 l 0 110 001 10001 R 1 010 010 2 0 110 010 10010 S 1 010 O11 3 0 110 O11 10 011 T 1 010 100 4 0 110 100 10100 U 1 010 101 5 0 110 101 10101 V 1 010 110 6 0 110 110 10110 Ww 1 010 F11 7 0 110 111 1 bod X 1 011 000 8 0 111 000 11000 Y 1 011 001 9 0 111 001 1 10 071 Z 1 011 010 O 111 010 11010 1 011 011 0 111 O11 E d o4 1 Y 1 011 100 lt O 111 100 11100 1 O11 101 E O0 111 101 1 1 1 074 1 011 110 gt 0 111 110 la de Do N Yr set the swi tch to 11111 because a talk address of would be confused with an untalk comnand and a I isten address of with an unl isten comnand ASCII code for is 1 011 III and for is O III III 2 14 INSTALLATION In the above example the remote message codes MLA and MTA are X0100011 and X100001 J respectively Thus the listen address and the talk address are distinguished although they contain the s me set of device dependent bits which you set into S2 Data Output Data results of measurements are provided on the DIOI DIO7 lines as serial strings of characters Each char
78. 00 pF Short Circuit Connect the 2 banana plug stacks together leave the guard black green open Press the keys deliberately I 6j 8 9 SHIFT SHORT Confirm that the GO indicator is lit Press the START button Wait for the GO indicator to be lit again The RLC display should be 00000 ohms Press the MEASURE MODE key to select CONT e Using the extender cable and plain bus wire connect the decade R and C standards in series as DUT to the Digibridge as shown in Figure 5 16 and tabulated below RED I RED amp WHITE P BLACK I BLACK amp WHITE P BLACK amp GREEN G stack on P resistor H stack on P capaci tor L resistor G capacitor H side post and capacitor L side post suitably connected together with a link and or bus wire Also connect with a short jumper from resistor L to capacitor H f Confirm or select measurement conditions on the Digibridge thus DISPLAY MEASURE RATE EQIVALENT CIRCJIT FREQUENCY MESURE MODE HOLD RANGE Parameter EXT BIAS VALUE SLOW SERIES 100 Hz CONT autorange C D OFF g Set the resistance and capacitance standards to the valu given in line of Table 5 11 Verify that the DQ display is within the range given inclusive Lock in this range on the 1689 by pressing SHIFT HOLD RNG 5 48 SERVICE Table 5 11 D ACCURACY CHECK Resistance Capacitance DQ Display Standard Standard Min to Max 50 2 0 1592 uF 0046 to 0054 100
79. 1 present range number SHIFT SPECIAL 2 code for data output via IEEE 488 bus para 3 10 SHIFT SPECIAL 3 measurement routine see paragraph 3 10 SHIFT SPECIAL 4 number of digits blanked from left amp right displays SHIFT SPECIAL 5 integration time factor normal 1 SHIFT SPECIAL 6 displays meas nom 2 nom meas 1 normal 0 SHIFT SPECIAL 7 parameter selection auto 1 normal 0 SHIFT SPECIAL 8 if median of 3 meas taken 1 normal 0 SHIFT SPECIAL 9 version number of Digibridge internal software SHIFT SPECIAL 0 ppm offset of source frequency from nominal SHIFT SPECIAL IEEE Address 2 digits when this option is installed The following interrogation will work only if you select MEASURE function SHIFT SPECIAL hold key down all special functions except 0 1 and 9 see above that are NOT set to 0 For example under default power up conditions the display is 7 where represents blank NOTE special function 7 is initially set to 1 see Table 3 9 If you set special functions 2 through 8 each to 1 this display will be 2345 678 If you set these special functions each to 0 this display will be blank 3 10 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Most of the special functions are described in more detail in other parts of the manual Refer to Table 3 9 for a brief summary of the special functions and how to operate the
80. 1 1 10 100 0 1 1 10 100 Kir 0 i 41 10 100 0 1 1 10 100 Max 115 42 36 35 123 50 44 43 ms Max 185 49 37 35 193 57 45 43 ms FAST 124 79 72 71 132 87 80 79 ms FAST 194 86 73 7 202 94 81 379 ms MED 133 205 189 185 141 213 197 193ms 233 215 190 185 241 223 198 193ms SLOW 958 960 950 915 966 968 958 923ms SLOW 1078 972 951 915 1086 980 959 923ms FOR DIGIBRIDGE WITHOUT HIGH SPEED MEASUREMENT OPTION Measure Mode Continuous Measure Mode Triggered Display BIN Display VALUE Display BIN Display VALUE Meas Test Freq kHz Test Freq kHz Test Freq kHz Test Freq kHz Rate 0 1 1 10 1000 1 1 10 100 kHz 0 1 1 10 1000 1 1 10 100 Max 140 67 61 60 148 75 69 68 ms Max 210 74 62 60 218 82 70 68 ms FAST 159 114 107 106 187 122 115 114ms FAST 229 121 108 106 237 129 116 114ms MED 168 240 224 220 176 248 232 228ms 268 250 225 220 276 258 233 228ms SLOW 993 995 985 950 1001 1003 993 958ms SLOW 1113 1007 986 950 1121 1015 994 958ms No entry for delay When measure mode is CONTINUOUS settling time is zero No entry for delay When measure mode is TRIGGERED settling time is 7 10 12 ms f defaults for measure rate FAST MED SLOW respectively where f test freq in kHz Any programmed delay can be 0 to 99999 ms would replace the default settling time Display of VALUE delta or deltaRLC requires 6 to 10 ms more than display of BIN Omitting the high speed measurement optio
81. 1102 erat etetL 9n TUA A2NG DS s on Bays te SAW ds 11510 21v 1300230 A3NNd AY SIC a NOEL j age NO14dO o werzin TONET Pag Susi NNO z 32v YILNI BF ANM IU OSvaw nn v et d 3403S na BOLVINIDEO NOY n 9 0 i 9 AWASAU S REEE QUEM i a Sala IDIIN 5 MOuJ 3 OPERE EX a 2N823009u4 r ossino HS u O3S1no g NaS i ERE l 9 te 6 4131N301 L20 n 92N sen z avid Vid a vla 2 HT L ii CECI E NENNEN ERU ME UN SS OES a SER EDIE BMC RC GNE a HU n9 S3s00v N34d3 mE Bees J uu 138 8 WON n8 vivo Ko san ee O Gen 4300239 S33800v YOSSIDOYdJOY JWH WOU ait AWBLIVE ASONviS Figure 4 1 Block diagram of the 1689 Precision RLC Digibridge THEORY 4 3 amp O e KZ 1 1k a Z e KR lx e R O e 60038 0 Figure 4 2 Elementary measurement circuit 4 2 PRINCIPAL FUNCTIONS 4 2 1 Elementary Measurement Circuit Figure 4 2 The measurement technique is illustrated by the accompanying simplified diagram which can be correlated with the previous block diagram A sine wave generator drives current Ix through the DUT Zx and standard resistor Rs in series Two differential amplifiers with the same gain K produce voltages el and e2 Simple algebra some of which is shown in the figure leads to the expression for the unknown impedance Zx Rs e D e 2 Notice that this ratio is complex Two values such as C and D or La
82. 166 80740 80756 Manufacturer Sprague North Adams MA 01247 Stimpson Bayport NY 11705 Superior Valve Washington Pa 15301 Thomas amp Betts Elizabeth NJ 07207 TAW Cleveland OH 44117 Torrington Torrington CT 06790 Townsend Braintree MA 02184 Union Carbide New York NY 10017 United Carr Fast Boston MA Victoreen Clevetand OH 44104 Ward Leonard Mt Vernon N Y 10550 Westinghouse Bloomtield NJ 07003 Weston Newark NJ 07114 Acushnet Cap New Bedford MA 02742 Adams amp Westlake Elkhart IN 46514 Chrysiec Detroit MI 48231 Atlantic india Rubber Chicago L 60607 Amperite Umon City NJ 07087 Ark Les Switch Watertown MA 02172 Bead Cha Bridgeport CT 06605 Beiden Chicagoi 60644 Bronson Beacon Falis CT 06403 Cambridge Thermionic Cambridge MA 02138 Cantieid Clifton Forge VA 24422 Busmann St Louis MO 63107 CTS Elkhart IN 46514 Cannon Los Angeies CA 90031 Ciare Chicago L 60645 Centralab Milwaukee Wi 53212 Continental Carbon New York NY Coto Coii Providence Rt 02905 Crescent Box Philadelphia PA 19134 Chicago Min Lamp Chicago 1 L 60640 Cinch Chicago L 60624 Darnell Downey CA 90241 Electromotive Witlimantic CT 06226 Continental Screw New Bedtord MA 02742 Nytronics Berkeley Htz NJ 07922 Dialight Brooklyn NY 11237 General Inst Newark NJ 07104 Drake Chicago t 60631 Dzus Fastener W islio NY 11795 Eby Philadeiph a PA 19144 Elastic Stop Nut Union N3 07083 Erie Erie PA 16512
83. 2 40 35 30 25 20 14 15 15 15 20 30 50 90 80 70 60 50 50 50 50 60 70 90 Description Catalog Number 1689 Precision RLC Digibridge 1689 9700 1689M Precision RLC Digibridge 1689 9750 IEEE Handler Interface Option 1658 9620 High Speed Measurement and IEEE Handler Option 1689 9620 1689M Rack Mount Kit 1689 9611 XV Introduction Section 1 1 1 PURPOSE 1 1 1 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 2 1 3 OONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS 1 3 1 4 ACCESSORIES 1 10 CONDENSED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1 14 1 14 PURPOSE The two Digibridge R precision RLC testers GR1689 and GR1689M are microprocessor controlled automatic programmable RLC measuring instruments that provide high accuracy convenience speed and reliability at low cost Limit comparison binning and internal bias are provided both test frequency and voltage are selectable With an interface option each Digibridge tester can communicate with other equipment and respond to remote control The versatile adaptable test fixture lighted keyboard and informative display panel make these Digibridge testers convenient to use Measurement results are clearly shown with decimal points and units which are automatically presented to assure correctness Display resolution is 5 full digits for R L and C 4 full digits for D Q Rs with Cs and Rp with Cs Notice that Rs is also known as ESR equivalent series resistance The basic a
84. 2 pi fLc where pi is 3 1416 where f is expressed in Hz and inductance Lc is tabulated above OPERATION 3 43 Table 3 8 TYPICAL CABLE RELATED ACCURACY ERROR TERMS wee ee ee ee ee ee eee eee ee Cable Accuracy 1688 9600 1657 9600 1689 9602 1689 9603 Term 874 Banana BNC BNC Tweezers Units For 1889 eee er ee rr eee e ee Acmx for 1 kHz 00014 Xdut 00034 Xdut 00034 Xdut 00044 Xdut of Ls or Cs Acmx for 20 kHz 0028 Xdut 0069 Xdut 0069 Xdut 0088 Xdut of Ls or Cs Acmr any freq 001 Rsdut 002 Rsdut 016 Rsdut 020 Rsdut of measd Rs Ald for con ditions below Range 1 1 kHz 00046 0014 00063 00084 of meas value Range 1 20 kHz 19 57 25 34 of meas value Range 2 20 kHz 012 036 016 021 of meas value Range 2 100kHz 29 90 39 52 96 of meas value Range 3 20 kHz 0007 0023 0010 0013 96 of meas value Siete Ford68UM to eee ete tans Si oe cc ai Acmx for 1 kHz 00048 Xdut 00069 Xdut 00034 Xdut 00044 Xdut of Ls or Cs Acmx for 20 kHz 0097 Xdut 0069 Xdut 0069 Xdut 0088 Xdut of Ls or Cs Acmr any freq 0018 Rsdut 002 Rsdut 016 Rsdut 020 Rsdut of measd Rs Ald for con ditions below Range 1 1 kHz 00046 0014 zero 00021 of meas value Range 1 20 kHz 19 57 zero 084 of meas value Range 2 20 kHz 012 036 zero 0052 of meas value Range 2 100kHz 29 90 zero 13 of meas value Range 3 20 kHz 0007 0023 z
85. 270 Therefore data acquisition time is a complex discontinuous function of test frequency the selected measurement rate programmed integration time factor enabling or disabling of quick acquisition and pauses for synchronization 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 CUSTOMERSERVICE nra e A tte tiere re ln terio 5 3 INSTRUMENT RETURN rieren e tee eor er ett ERE 5 3 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT OF CIRCUIT BOARDS 5 3 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION eese 5 3 DISASSEMBLY AND ACCESS essere 5 11 PERIOOIC MAINTENANCE eene tenente nentes konnen enano n aa 5 26 TROUBLE ANALDYSIS nente cte eee treten eee 5 28 ACCURACY VERIFICATION eene trennt trennen tnt 5 38 RECALIBRATION irt ttr rrt 5 51 INTERNAL SETTINGS ridet ee oce ere Ni 5 60 WARNING These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To avoid electrical shock do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions unless you are qualified to do so CAUTION For continued protection against fire hazard replace fuse only with same type and rating as shown on rear panel and in parts list Service personnel observe the following precautions whenever you handle a circuit board or integrated circuit in this instrument SER VICE 5 1 HANDLING PRECAUTIONS SUBJECT TO DAMAGE BY STATIC ELECTRICITY Place instrument or system component to be serviced spare parts in conductive
86. 28520 28875 30043 30874 31019 31914 31814 31951 32001 33095 33173 34141 34156 34333 34335 34649 34677 35929 36462 37942 38443 39317 40931 42190 42498 43334 43991 49671 49956 50101 50507 50522 50721 5116 51553 51642 52648 52676 2763 53021 53184 53421 54294 5429 54715 FEDERAL SUPPLY CODE FOR MANUFACTURERS From Defense Logistics Agency Microfiche H4 2 SB 708 42 Manufacturer Cutier Hammer Milwaukee Wi 53202 Houston Inst Beligire TX 72401 Fenwal Eictrns Framingham MA 01701 Sinciair amp Rush St Lous MO 63111 Suruce Pine Mica Spruce Pine NC 28777 Intnti Diode Jersey City NJ 07304 Omm Spectra Farmington MI 48024 Astrolab Linden NJ 07036 Codi Fa tawn NJ 02410 Sterling Inst New Hyde Park NY 11040 Indiana General Oglesby LL 61348 Delco Kokomo IN 46901 Precision Oynamics Burbank CA 91504 Amer Micro Devices Summerville SC 29483 Ekctrc Molding Woonsocket RI 02895 Mohawk Spring Schiller Park IL 60176 Angstrohm Precsn Hagerstown MO 21740 Singer Somerville NJ 08876 Zeitex Concord CA 94520 Siticonix Santa Clara CA 95054 Signetics Sunnyvale CA 94086 New Prod Eng Wabash iN 46992 Scanbe El Monte CA 91731 Computer Diode S Faiciavm NJ 07936 Cycon Sunnyvale CA 94086 Durant Watertown WI 53094 Zero Monson MA 01057 GE Gamesville FL 32601 Esstron Haverhil MA 01830 Paktron Vs nna VA 22190 Cabtroa Chicago L 60622 LRC Eictrns Horseheads
87. 4 for a table of units and multipliers which indicates the sequence of multipliers that will appear Enter the maximum limit of D or Rs or Q with R enter the minimum limit of Rp or Q with L as follows Keyed numbers appear on the lefthand display For example to enter a Q limit of 85 press 8 5 SHIFT BIN NO 0 0 The value now moves to the right hand display confirming storage of the limit Note if you make a mistake press the parameter key again and repeat the entry c To enter RLC limits for bins 1 13 three methods are given 1 Symmetrical percentage tolerances nested bins Enter the nominal value of DUTS to be sorted The value appears on the RLC display Units were selected in step b For example to enter 123 40 as the nominal value press 1 21 3 E 4 2 SHIFT NOM VAL Enter for bin 1 the narrowest percent tolerance to be sorted As an example for a tolerance of 0 2 press J 2 SHIFT BIN NOJ O 1 The numerical limits for RLC are automatically computed and rounded off values appear on the Digibridge displays upper limit at the left lower at the right For bin 2 enter the next wider tolerance similarly Be sure to use 2 digits for the bin number Repeat the procedure for bins 3 4 5 up to a maximum of 13 bins 2 Various nominal values bucket sort Plan for non overlapping bins each with a nominal value and limits defined by percent t olerance For bin 1 enter nom
88. 46 Aerovox Hr Q Olean NY 14760 Microwave Assoc Burlington MA 01801 Military Standards Linemaster Switch Woodstock CT 06281 Sealectro Mamaroneck NY 10544 Compar Burtingame CA 94010 North Hills Gien Cove NY 11542 Protective Closures Buffalo N Y 14207 Metavac Fiushing NY 11358 Vanan Palo Alto CA 94303 Atlee Winchester MA 01890 Delevan Aurora NY 14052 Renbrandt Boston MA 02118 Centraiab Milwaukee Wt 53201
89. 5 With any other cable and remote test fixture use the following formula f gt 770 1 200 C where f is in kHz C is stray capacitance outside of the Digibridge from the high Ih Ph terminal to ground guard expressed in pF Measurement will be on range 1 if L gt 4 f This resonance effect can also be expected under some conditions of high frequency measurement with range 1 held but the inductance of the DUT appropriate for range 2 The effect is NOT expected with autoranging in ranges 2 3 4 unless stray capacitance is considerably larger than that of the 1657 9600 extender cable It is possible for valid measurement with a slight reduction in accuracy to be made under conditions very close to those that will trigger the LC resonance failure display Such a measurement can be expected to meet accuracy specifications if it is displayed at all Recommended Procedure If this LC resonance failure display appears in the course of otherwise normal measurements the instrument is functioning normally Valid measurements can usually be made by taking one or more of the following steps a Select low source impedance by pressing SHIFT CONST VOLTAGE so that the CONSTANT VOLTAGE indicator lights up b Select a low impedance range For example if measurement is normally in range 1 try holding range 2 or if range 1 has been held select autorange c Reduce the measurement frequency d If cable and test fixture capacitance c
90. 5 7 1 replacement of the capacitor discharge fuse may be necessary see Table 1 2 a Remove the top and bottom covers b This fuse is located in a socket on the main board and behind the power switch Unplug the fuse using needle nose pliers and replace 5 7 4 Power Supply NOTE In the following procedure do the principal steps a b c d as long as everything checks out normally But if a failure is found follow the secondary steps if any are given at the point of failure 1 2 or 3 Check the power supply V assembly if there is a massive failure nothing works or as a starting procedure in any thorough analysis Refer to Figure 5 3 NOTE If a voltage regulator U1 U2 or U3 must be replaced be sure to spread silicone grease like Dow Corning compound no 5 on the surface toward the heat sink For U1 coat both sides of the insulating washer 5 34 SERVICE a Check the output voltages using a digital voltmeter with ground reference at V Jl pin 9 ribbon cable unplugged as follows Pin 1 44 75 V to 5 25 V Pin 3 44 75 V to 45 25 V Pin 4 7 6 V to 8 4 V 1 If trouble is found at step a check both analog and digital 5 V circuit At outputs of Ul and U2 5 Vdc regulated At WTI inputs of Ul and U2 10 8 Vdc when primary voltage is 115 Vrms between terminals 1 and 2 of transformer TI Across input to diode bridge yellow to yellow 10 Vrms 2 Check 8 V circuit At outp
91. 55 3 8 9 Binning and Ratio Measurement Simultaneously In order to bin sort component parts whose values lie beyond the normal measurement range of the Digibridge you must combine ratio measurement paragraph 3 3 7 with limit comparisons and binning paragraph 3 8 You should first become familiar with both ratio measurement and binning procedures because the combined procedure as follows can be somewhat tricky Just as the display is a dimensionless number in ratio measurement so the limit comparisons are made on dimensionless ratios in this combined procedure Plan ahead so that you have in mind what the ratio display will be like for any given measurement For entering bin limits each nominal ratio is the ratio display that would be expected if a corresponding nominalvalued DUT were measured General Procedure a Select units appropriate for the component you plan to measure and a range that uses the largest unit multiplier This is necessary even if the measured valu of the DUT is very small Select ENTER function b Enter the nominal ratio see above as the bin limit nominal value Ignore units and multiplier although those selected in step a will still be displayed the number entered will be used by the Digibridge as a ratio reference c Enter as usual the desired set of tolerances for bin sorting If sequential limits are desired also enter another nominal ratio limits for other bins etc d If you plan to measur
92. 6 resistor Circuit board replacement Refer to paragr iph 5 3 for recommended procedures to obtain replacements Power Up Self Check Upon power up the Digibridge performs 1 self check sequence as explained in paragraph 3 13 If a self check failure occurs tile instrument display will indicate tile nature of the failure For more detail refer to paragraph 5 7 2 below 5 28 SERVICE Telltale symptoms Scan the following group of symptoms for a preliminary analysis of trouble and suggestions for more detailed procedures if applicable Display A perpetually blank digit or decimal point may be caused by a fault in the directly associated circuit on the display board Refer to comments above D Error A large D error may be caused by faulty protection diodes in the analog front end Check main board components CR30 CR31 CR32 and CR33 Reactance Error If Cor L measurements are not accurate the test signal source may be at fault In checking it verify that the frequency is within 0 01 of the specified nominal frequency Refer to paragraph 3 4 1 Keyboard Malfunction If instrument passes its power up self check and proceeds to measure BUT has no or only a few keyboard indicators lit and thc keys on the keyboard don t function normally the fault is probably in the 30 wire cable connection between keyboard and main board Ifthe keyboard has been disconnected check for misalignment of the connector that plugs directly into the
93. 89 9620 has been replaced by PN 1689 9630 Page 5 26 Instrument Cleaning Instructions Monthly more or less depending on usage the built in test fixture should be cleaned with a soft brush and isopropyl alcohol Avoid getting excess alcohol on instrument paint surfaces otherwise damage to the finish can result For additional instrument cleaning instructions refer to paragraph 5 6 1 Care of the Test Fixture and paragraph 5 6 3 Care of the Display Panel Page 5 28 Paragraph 5 6 2 Cleaning Air Filter e Delete paragraph air filter has been removed Page 5 34 Paragraph 5 7 4 Power supply e Trouble analvsis Procedure does not annlv to the new Power Sunnlv Assemblv PN 700011 Instruction Manual Changes continued Page 5 41 Table 5 7 Capacitance Accuracy Checks QDR Display Max column corrected as follows Nominal Value QDR Max 10 pF 6100 ppm 100 pF 2500 ppm 1500 pF 700 ppm 1500 pF 1000 ppm 1500 pF 1700 ppm 6400 pF 500 ppm 10 nF 500 ppm 25 nF 500 ppm 25 nF 800 ppm 25 nF 1500 ppm 100 nF 500 ppm 200 nF 600 ppm 400 nF 600 ppm 400 nF 900 ppm 400 nF 1600 ppm 1000 nF 600 ppm Page 6 2 Figure 6 2 1689 Rear View Rear view should show new power supply assembly PN 700011 without line voltage switch Page 6 3 Mechanical Parts List for 1689 Rear Items 4 through 7 power connector fuse extractor post and line voltage switch and cover deleted on new power supply assembly Page 6 4 Figure 6 2 A 1689M Rear
94. AL 8 3 6 4 1 SHIFT SPECIAL 8 SHIFT SPECIAL 9 SHIFT SPECIAL 0 3 4 1 SHIFT SPECIAL Resettiilg all choices to power up default selections quickly establishes known operating conditions suitable for routine operation paragraph 3 1 4 or for making any further selections Refer to a note about command P2 near the end of paragraph 3 12 3 3 62 OPERATION 3 11 OPERATION WITH A HANDLER If you have the interface option and have made the system connections to a handler paragraph 2 7 the Digibridge operating procedure is as follows a Set up the handler either of two ways indexing on EOT or indexing on ACQ as explained below The handler must supply a signal here called start next measurement when it has completed connection of the DUT Indexing on EDT Set up the handler to respond to the EOT signal from the Digibridge which occurs at the end of test when the bin assignment is available for sorting Set up the Digibridge to receive its START signal from the handler s start next measurement signal This setup is simpler than the one below Indexing on ACQ Set up the handler to respond to the ACQ signal from the Digibridge which occurs after the data acquisition is complete The handler can then remove the DUT from the test fixture and replace it with another DUT while the Digibridge is calculating the result In addition set up an interface that provides a START signal to the Digibri
95. ANGES AND SOURCE RESISTANCES Source Principal Measured Parameter Range Resistance Resistance Capacitance Inductance max 99999 K 1 97 4 kohms mid 97 4K min 25 6 K max 25 6 K 2 6 4 kohms mid 6 4K min 1 6K max 1600 ohms 3 400 ohms mid 400 ohms min 100 ohms max 100 ohms 4 25 ohms mid 25 ohms min 00001 ohm K is kilohms is equal to the test frequency in kHz 3 4 3 Constant Voltage Source min mid max min mid max min mid max min mid max 00001 pF 1600 pF f 6400 pF f 6 4 nF f 25 3 nF f 100 nF f 100 nF f 400 nF f 1600 nF f 1 6 uF f 6 4 uF f 99999 uF max mid min max mid min max mid min max mid min If it is important to measure the DUT at a particular test voltage then select the constant voltage feature as follows Press SHIFT CONSTANT VOLTAGE 99999 H 16 H f 4 1 H f 4100 mH f 1025 nH f 256 mH f 256 nH f 64 nH f 16 nH f 16 nH f 4 nH f 00001 mH so that the CONSTANT VOLTAGE indicator is lit The Digibridge now retains a source resistance of 25 ohms for all ranges The voltage is constant for any DUT impedance significantly larger than 25 ohms An example is given in the preceding paragraph Choosing this feature causes a reduction in measurement accuracy by a factor of three as accounted for by Kcv in the accuracy specifications To disable the constant voltage feature press the same keys again 3 4 4 Constant Current S
96. AVERAGE This is the default situation no averaging 3 38 OPERATION Displays of averaged measurements depend on the measure mode 1 If the measure mode is TRIGGERED the display is repeatedly updated to be the running average until the programmed number of measurements have been made then the final average remains displayed until the next START command 2 If the measure modI is CONTINUOUS averaging proceeds without any change of display until the programmed number of measurements have been made then the final average is displayed and remains until replaced by another final average 3 6 4 Selection of Median Value for Better Accuracy The Digibridge can be programmed to make measurements in one or more groups of three and take for results the median value in each group If you also select averaging of 5 for example the median values of 5 groups will be averaged Examples of uses for the median value capability are given below If the median value capability is enabled the Digibridge makes three measurements discards the highest and lowest results and uses the median result for further calculations if any such as averaging This capability is a special function To enable it press the following keys 1 SHIFT SPECIAL 8 To disable median value press 0 SHIFT SPECIAL 8 An example of a use for the median value capability is to greatly reduce the likelihood of displaying an erroneous transitory me
97. BLACK GREEN G SERIES 60042 0 Figure 5 16 Series connections of standards for D accuracy checks 5 8 6 D Measurement Accuracy Figure 5 16 Verify D measurement accuracy with the following procedure Dissipation factor checks will be made using series equivalent circuit with corresponding connections of resistance and capacitance standards This procedure follows after paragraph 5 8 5 Thus test frequency 1 kHz test voltage 1 V measure rate SLOW range held indicator is NOT lit and parameter L Q is specified a Connect the 1657 9600 extender cable to the Digibridge remote test fixture Hand tighten the screws to provide ground guard connection b Connect the high leads red and red white together and separately connect the low leads black and black white together c Press FUNCTION key to select ENTER function To select 100 Hz press LJO I S IISHIFT FREQUENC Y d Before measurement zero the Digibridge as follows Open Circuit Keep the high banana plug stack separated from the low stack Press FUNCTION key if necessary to select MEASURE function Press MEASURE MODE key if necessary to select TRIGGERED mode Press these keys deliberately 1 1 8 9 2 SHIFT OPEN Confirm that the GO indicator is lit Keep hands and objects at least 10 cm 4 in from test fixture Press the START button SERVICE 5 47 Wait for the GO indicator to be lit again The RLC display should be 000
98. Before operating the instrument inspect the power inlet module on the rear of the unit to ensure that the properly rated fuse is in place otherwise damage to unit is possible Fuse is 6 10A 250V 3AG Type Slow Blow Instruction Manual Changes continued The 1689 is shipped with a standard U S power cord QuadTech PN 4200 0300 with Belden SPH 386 socket or equivalent and 3 wire plug conforming to IEC 320 or an approved international cord set Make sure the instrument is only used with these or other approved international cord sets which ensures the instrument is provided with connection to protective earth ground In all installations the instrument should be positioned with consideration for ample air flow to the side and rear panel ventilation holes An open space around the instrument of at least 3 inches 75mm is recommend The surrounding environment should be free from excessive dust to prevent contamination of electronic circuits WARNING If this instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual protection to the operator and equipment may be impaired Page 2 2 Power Line Connection e Power line switch for 115V or 230V operation has been removed switching is automatic for voltages between 90 250V AC e Figure 2 2 does not apply Only certified line cords which comply with IEC 227 or IEC 245 should be used Page 2 4 Paragraph 2 6 2 External Bias e Bias cable 1658 2450 not supplied with instruments s
99. Bin Zero the desired upper limit for D or Rs or Q with R lower limit for Rp or Q with L is entered as a value dimensionless for D or Q ohms for R For example Bin Zero is set to 250 ppm with parameter selection C D by the command BOOH250E 6 Frequency is entered in kilohertz If the desired frequency is for example 3 25 kHz the following command will select the nearest available frequency which is 3 3333 kHz F3 25 There are three types of commands two byte three byte and floating point as described below Each byte is coded according to the 7 bit ASCII code using the DIOI DIO7 lines The most significant bit bit is DIO7 as recommended by the Standard The eighth bit DI08 is ignored Thus for example the command for MEASURE FUNCTION is PO having octal code 120 followed by 060 The two 7 bit binary bytes are therefore 1 010 000 and 0 110 000 Note The ASCn code X3 4 1968 Code for Information Interchange is available from American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York N Y 10018 This code can be written out as follows For the numerals 0 1 2 9 write the series of octal numbers 060 061 062 071 for the alphabet A B C Z write the series 101 102 103 132 Refer also to the table in the paragraph about Address in 2 8 4 The ASCII code conforms to the 7 bit code ISO 646 used internationally Two Byte and Three Byte Entries These command entries as shown in Table 3 17
100. C n where n range is 4 256 freq 0 23438 to 15 000 kHz 200 kHz C n where n range is 2 13 freq 15 385 to 100 00 kHz and where C 1 c where c is a very small number between 000099 and 000099 The nominal value of an available frequency can be calculated from the appropriate one of the three formulas the appropriate value of integer n and by assuming that c 0 The corrected value is more accurate and is calculated in the same way except for using the true value of c The value of c is determined individually for each Digibridge as part of its factory calibration If you want to find out what c is for your instrument do the following The value will be in the range 99 to 99 ppm Select ENTER with the FUNCTION key Then press SHIFT SPECIAL 0 Indication Frequency display is the nominal value to 5 digit resolution This display is shown when frequency is selected as described above or by interrogation as follows select ENTER function and then press SHIFT FREQUENCY OPERA TION 3 23 3 4 2 Test Voltage The power up test voltage is 1 0 volt rms unless the keyboard has been locked with some other choice There are a total of 255 choices 005 to 1 275 V in increments of 005 V To program the test voltage a Select ENTER with the FUNCTION key b Enter the desired voltage in volts and press SHIFT VOLTAGE in sequence as follows For example to select 750 m V rms press 7 5
101. E I Set bin 4 limits 5 SHIFT BIN No 0 4 m Redefine nominal 1 3 SHIFT NOM VALUE OPERATION 3 53 n Set bin 5 limits 5 SHIFT BIN No 0 5 o Close bin 6 if open 0 SHIFT BIN No 0 6 p Close bins 7 through 13 similarly if used before NOTE Because there are overlaps bin numbers affect the binning if a DUT satisfies two bins it goes into the lower numbered bin for example 1 046 uF will go into the 1 00uF bin No 2 because it is numbered lower than the 1 1 uF bin No 3 Method 2 using one nominal value for the set of bins Advantage All bin limits are related to the same nominal value making it easy fo define bins exactly adjacent to each other without overlaps or gaps Disadvantage Each bin is not readily defined in terms of its own nominal value Example For sorting capacitors into six adjacent 1 bins from 3 to 3 setting D lt 005 and nominal value of the six bins at Cs 1 0 uF a With FUNCTION key select ENTER b With EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT key select SERIES c With parameter key Cs D select units uF d Enter D limit 0 0 5 SHIF T BIN No 0 0 e Enter nominal C value 1 SHIF T NOM VALUE f Set bin 1 limits 2 5 3 25 SHIFT BIN No 0 1 g Set bin 2 limits 1 95 2 26 SBIF T BIN No 0 2 h Set bin 3 limits 0 25 1 95 SHF Tj BIN No 0 3 i Set bin 4
102. EASURE RATE is SLOW and that the RANGE HELD indicator is NOT lit DO NOT have test voltage programmed to other than V nor frequency to other than 1 kHz Open Circuit Leave the two type 874 tees connected to the 1688 9600 extender cable but not connected to each other Press FUNCTION key if necessary to select MEASURE function Press MEASURE MODE key if necessary to select TRIGGERED mode Press these keys deliberately 1 6 8 9 2 SHIFT OPEN Confirm that the GO indicator is lit Press the START button Keep hands and objects at least 10 cm 4 in from test fixture Wait for the GO indicator to be lit again on the keyboard not on any remote test fixture The RLC display should be 00000 SERVICE 5 39 Short Circuit Connect the two type 874 tees together Press these keys deliberately 1 6 8 9 SHIFT SHORT Confirm that the GO indicator is lit Press the START button Wait for the GO indicator to be lit again on the keyboard not on any remote test fixture Disconnect the two type 874 tees from each other e Connect the type 874 tee with the red cables to the HIGH terminal of the 1413 9700 decade capacitor Connect the other tee black cables to the LOW terminal of this capacitor f Set the decade capacitor dials to 00000 pF Press the Cs D key Press these keys deliberately 1 6 8 9 SHIFT OPEN Confirm that the GO indicator is lit Press the START button Wait for the GO
103. ER SCREW FAN UNDER V C1 D U47 THRU U55 SUPPORT SCREW DISPLAY D BOARD D U56 THRU U64 V U1 DIODE BRIDGE CR1 THRU CR4 we e S am umm ce NOSO H mw a i fua POWER SUPPLY CORNER SCREW V J1 PINS 1 THRU 10 POWER SUPPLY V BOARD CABLE 1689 0200 V U2 PIN 1 LEFT V S1 UNDER V U3 PIN 1 LEFT SUPPORT SCREW FOR DISPLAY Figure 5 3 Power supply V assembly and display or DB board shown in the 1689 Digibridge with top cover off The protective cover has been removed from above the 1657 4720 board 5 14 SERVICE Figure 5 4 Removal of the display board from the 1689 Digibridge Figure 5 5 Removal of the power supply from the 1689 Digibridge The ribbon cable must be disconnected first The display board can be removed first or left in plac 3 shown here SERVICE 5 15 Figure 5 6 Removal of the bottom shell from the 1689 Digibridge Notice that the top cover has been temporarily installed as a support Figure 5 7 Locations of screws on the main board of the 1689 Digibridge bottom view Screws at A and d hol lt the board to the chassis Screws at C hold a shield and with 2 screws from the other side the test fixture assembly Screws at D hold brackets for the display board and at E the keyboard module 5 16 SERVICE g Remove the interface option if you have one after removing the 2 large screws with resilient washers in the rear panel Se
104. FT BIN SUM O l Read the left hand display the number of measurements made in 60 s Use this number as x in the following formula T 60 000 milliseconds x For example if x 493 then T 122 ms 5 Clear bin sum registers by pressing SHIFT BIN SUM O 0 1 4 SER ICE 5 9 h Select Max measurement rate by pressing 2 5 SHIFT SPECIAL 5 Note indicated measure rate must be FAST For explanation see paragraph 3 5 5 Repeat the procedure of steps c d e as summarized below for Max rate Time the interval between the next two keystrokes Press FUNCTION key to select MEASURE function Wait 60 seconds Press FUNCTION key to select ENTER function Press SHIFT BIN SUM 0 1 Read the left hand display the number of measurements made in 60 s wow Use this number as x in the following formula T 60 000 milliseconds x For example if x 771 then T 78 ms 5 Clear bin sum registers by pressing SHIFT BIN SUM 0 0 1 4 i Switch the Digibridge POWER OFF Install the high speed option board 1689 9620 carefully as described in paragraph 5 5 5 NOTE After the power up self checks the Digibridge with high speed option will automatically select TRIGGERED measurement mode j Repeat steps a through h recording the results as before k If the calculated values of T in step j indicate a test time reduction compared to the values of T in steps d through
105. Federal Supply Code Manufacturers 6 6 6 23 Interface schematic 6 24 6 3 Main Board schematic sheet 1 6 7 6 24 Keyboard Module assembly 6 25 4 Main Board layout sheet 1 6 8 6 25 Keyboard Indicators detail 6 25 6 5 Main Board layout sheet 2 6 9 6 26 Keyboard schematic 6 26 Specifications Displays Measurement results may be displayed in four ways as selected by the keyboard 1 VALUE 2 difference 3 RLC difference and 4 BIN NO 1 The VALUE display can be one of four pairs of measured quantities Land Q C and D C and R or Rand Q The primary display L C or R has five digi of resolution and the secondary display D Q or R with C has four digits of resolution 2 The difference display indicates the percent deviation of the measured L C orR value from a stored NOMINAL VALUE The sign of this deviation is indicated 3 The RLC difference is similar to the difference except that the deviation is displayed in appropriate units ohms henries etc 4 The BIN NO display is the number of the bin 0 through 14 into which the component should be sorted The testing limits for these bins are set up by the user in the ENTER mode These test limi may be symmetrical or non symmetrical about the NOMINAL VALUE One bin is used for D or Q rejects and one is used for RLC rejects outside all limits The sum of the number of componen sorted into each bin may be displayed 99999 max Also dis
106. For example the instrument can be used to sort a group of nominally 2 2 uF capacitors into bins of 2 5 10 20 lossy rejects and other rejects Or it can assign DUTs to bins of for example a 5 series such as 1 8 2 0 2 2 2 4 2 7 uF etc The bin assignments can be displayed for guidance in hand sorting or with an interface option output automatically to a handler for mechanized sorting Up to 13 regular bins are provided for categories of the principal measurement RLC in addition to a bin for rejects in the secondary measurement QDR and a bin for all other rejects total 15 bins NOTE The 1689 9620 high speed measurement and IEEE handler interface option provides a separate output signal line for each bin suitable for connection to automatic handlers However the 1658 9620 IEEE handler interface option provides only eight go bin output signal lines Thus an automatic handler can sort into bins 1 through 8 However any assignments by the Digibridge into bins 9 through 13 are lumped with bin 14 no go so far as the 1658 9620 handler interface is concerned Manually entered limits are normally entered in pairs defining the upper and lower limits of a bin in the form of nominal value and percent above and below that nominal If only one percent value is entered for a bin the limit pair is symmetrical such as 296 To set up a non symmetrical pair of limits two percent values must be entered the higher one firs
107. G VIA IEEE 488 BUS Program Category Program Selection Command Type Command Entry Display Measurement Rate Measurement Voltage Function Reset Measurement Mode Parameter Equivalent Circuit Bin Delta 96 Value Delta RLC Rat1o value Ratio value Bin on ratio nominal value RLC RLC value nominal nominal value RLC value Bin on ratio RLC value nominal value Fast Medium Slow Constant off Constant on Value in volts v Measure Enter Turn On Conditions Diagnostics Triggered Continuous Triggered median value Continuous median value Inductance Capacitance Capacitance Resistance Inductance Capacitance Capacitance Resistance R Q ppm Automatic selection of R Q C D L Q Parallel Series Indicates Turn On Conditions 3 74 OPERATION 2 byte 2 byte 2 byte 2 byte 2 byte 2 byte 2 byte 2 byte 2 byte 2 byte 2 byte 2 byte 2 byte Floating Point 2 byte 2 byte t byte byte t3 byte byte byte byte t2 r2 t2 bs byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte t2 2 nN Ww HH dH bd t2 byte N byte byte t2 Do Di D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 50 S1 2 YO Y1 Vv PO P1 P2 P3 TO Tl T2 T3 Mo MI M2 M3 M4 M5 M M7 M8 co Cl Table 3 17 Continued COMMANDS USED IN PROGRAMMING VIA IEEE 488 BUS Program Category Program Selection Command Type Command Entry Range Control Hold
108. H H H mH H H M nH H mH oH nH nH mH mH C D nF nF uF uF pF nF nF uF pF nF nF nF pF nF nF C R nF nF uF uF nF nF nF uF nF nF nF nF pF nF uF K represents kilohms did Range 1 is not used if frequency is above 20 kHz For C in nF R is in kilohms For C in uF R is in ohms Decimal Point Position The decimal point is automatically positioned for maximum resolution i e so that the first significant digit or the first zero after the decimal point is in the first position in the display with a few exceptions as listed below Of course displays on low underrange or low extension of a held range may have a number of necessary zeros to right of the decimal point and therefore reduced number of significant digits compared to the display area because uni and multipliers are fixed on anyone range The above mentioned exceptions are 1 DQ IN PPM is always displayed without a decimal point in ppm 2 Delta displays can resolve no less than 0 0001 i e 1 ppm 3 Hysteresis is provided to reduce flickering as explained below If the first digit of the measurement is 9 the decimal point for any measured value display is left unchanged from its previous position provided that so doing places that 9 in either the first or second position in the display area Notice that a number like 09XXX has resolution almost as fine as a number like 10XXX For example if the measured value is 99 985 nF the display is a full 5 digits if th
109. ILURE DISPLAYS ERROR CODES 3 13 1 Power Up Self Check Every time the instrument is switched ON or the line voltage reappears after an interruption the Digibridge keeps itself busy for a short time going through an automatic self check routine The RLC and QDR displays indicate in code which check is being performed It is possible to halt the diagnostic routine and hold the displayed code by pressing and holding the SHIFT key or other key Normally these displays follow one another rapidly However if one of them persists there has been a failure in the self check The nature of the failure and the proper remedy for each are indicated below Normal operation is inhibited in each of these cases NOTE Operation can usually be enabled in spite of failure messages other than 88888 or 33333 by pressing START button This action is useful to enable measurements using a test fixture with very large capacitance or for certain transfer impedance measurements But it IS NOT RECOMMENDED unless you are well aware of what caused the self check failure 88888 8888 The random access memory read write exercise was imperfect Try power up again otherwise the remedy is beyond the operator s control repair service is required 71717 XXXX The detector test was not completed satisfactorily Be sure that the EXTERNAL BIAS switch is OFF try power up again Otherwise the remedy is beyond the operator s control repair service is required The QDR disp
110. If function is ENTER displays are indications of programned entries special functions bin sum status in calibration sequences etc Indicates measurement units associ ted with RLC display and secondary display if it is R Indicates 96 if display selection is delta None of these indicators are lit if measurement display is ratio NEG RLC and Nill Q R indicate negative signs associated with RLC and QDR displays For explanations see paragraph 3 3 If function is MEASURE display of secondary measured value or i f display is BIN NO blank If function is ENTER RLC and Q R displays together indicate programned entries special functions status in calibration sequences etc Switches the Digibridge ON button in and OFF button out OFF position breaks both sides of power circuit RANGE HELD indicates that autoranging is disabled CONST VOLT indicates that measure ment source resistance is fixed at a low value DQ in PPM indicates that the D or Q display is in parts per mi II ion Receives radial lead DUT making 4 ter minal connection automatically Adaptors supplied make similar connection with axial lead DUT Extension cables 5 terminal are available Table 1 1 continued FRONT OONTROLS AND INDICATORS Fig 1 2 Ref No Name Description Function 8 Reference card Captive pull out Handy reference inforamtion for basic card operation zeroing making measurements Not on1689M programming t
111. MMED DELAY 0 TO 99999 ms WITHOUT HI SPEED to 10 OPT 6 to ms ANY ONE 2 ms ANY TWO 4 ms ALL THREE 6 ms SLOW 950 15 f ms 60061 0 Figure 3 8 Summary of the components of measurement time used by the 1689 Digibridge and an indication of how the time per measurement depends on measurement conditions and system selections The START signal can be received via START button IEEE 488 bus or handler interface The ACQ otherwise known as ACQ OVER and EOT signals are sent via the handler interface Symbol f is test frequency in kHz and ITF is integration time or I T factor The 1689M requires less time than the 1689 particularly for calculation 3 5 10 Measurement Time Summary Figure 3 8 To summarize the relationships of measurement time to a representative set of the many possible test conditions and operating selections refer to Table 3 4 and the accompanying figure Notice that the table applies to the 1689 Digibridge Below the table are corrections that indicate about how much less time is required by the 1689M Digibridge 3 34 OPERATION Table 3 4 1689 DIGIBRIDGE TYPICAL MEASUREMENT TIMES VS FREQUENCY AND MEASURE RATE FOR DIGIBRIDGE WITH HIGH SPEED MEASUREMENT OPTION Measure Mode Continuous Measure Mode Triggered Note Display BIN Display VALUE Display BIN Display VALUE Meas Test Freq kHz Test Freq kHz Test Freq kHz Test Freq kHz Rate 0
112. N Y 14845 Electra independence KS 67301 Elect inds Murray Hill NJ 07974 KMC Long Valley NJ 07853 Fafnir Bearing New Britian CT 06050 Raytheon Norwood MA 02062 Lenox Fugie Watchung NJ 07060 Berg Eictrcs New Cumberland PA 17070 Electro Space Fabrctrs Topton PA 19562 UID Eletres Hollywood FL 33022 Wavetek San Diego CA 92112 Avnet Elctrcs Franklin Park IL 60131 Pamotor Bulingham CA 94010 Indiana Gert Elctrc Keasby NJ 08832 Analog Devices Cambridge MA 02142 General Semicond Tempe AZ 85281 GE Schenectady NY 12305 GE Syracuse NY 13201 GE Cleveland OH 44112 EMC Yechnigy Cherey Hill NJ 08034 Gen Rad Concord MA 01742 Lenox Fugie S Plainfieid NJ 07080 Vactite Berkeley CA 94710 EG amp G Bedford MA 01730 Tri County Tube Nunda NY 14517 Omni Spectea Waltham MA 02154 American Zettier Costa Mess CA 92626 National Santa Clara CA 95051 Hartford Universal Ball Rocky Hitt CT 06087 HP Palo Alto CA 94304 Heyman Mfg Kenilworth NJ 07033 IMC Magnetics Rochester NH 03867 Hotiman Etctres 1 Monte CA 91734 Sotid State Devices LaMirade CA 90638 Beckman Inst Cedar Grove NJ 07009 IBM Armonk NY 10504 Permag Magnetics Toledo OH 43609 Solid State Scattc Montgomerviille PA 18936 Standtord Appid Engs Costa Mesa CA 92626 Analogic Wakefield MA 01880 Yrndge Pittsburgh PA 15231 Jensen Chicago IL 60638 Spectrum Control Fairview PA 16415 GE Owensboro K Y 42301 Koehler Mariboro MA 01752
113. ODE key 6 f necessary to sel ect TRIGGERED mode b Be sure that the test fixture is open circuited c Press these keys 1 6 8 9 2 SHIF T OPEN A zero in each left and right displays and the GO indicator should be lit confirming this step d Keep hands and objects at least 10 cm 4 in from test fixture e Press the START button The GO indication disappears f Wait for the GO indicator to be lit again approximately 10 seconds Short Circuit a Short the fixture with a very low resistance short circuit b Press the keys 1 6 8 9 SHIFT SHORT A 5 in each left and right displays and the GO indicator should be I it confirming this step Keep away from test fixture as in step d above c Press the START button The GO indication disappears d Wait for the GO indicator to be lit again approximately 10 seconds The RLC display should be 00000 ohms or mH e Disconnect the short circuit DQ in PPM Press SHIFT DQ in PPM keys if necessary to light this indicator 5 9 3 Recalibration for Range 4 a Connect the 24 9 ohm calibration resistor to the Digibridge test fixture b Enter the known parameters of the calibration resistor as in the following example based on the values R 24 895 ohms and Q 15 ppm NOTES The Digibridge will accept six digits for R even though only five will be displayed The Q is associated with bin 00 and its value must be preceded with if t
114. PLAY key Read the measurement on the main displays The RLC display is the principal measurement complete with decimal point and units which are indicated by the light spot in the lower part of the display panel The QDR display is Q if the selected parameter is R Q or L Q it is D for C D or resistance with units indicated for C R Leading zeroes before the decimal point are automatically eliminated in most cases by positioning of the decimal point Otherwise such zeroes are blanked out The NEG RLC Indicator If the NEG RLC indicator on the main display panel is lit with an L or C value displayed or with parameter selection Lor C and BIN NO displayed the DUT reactance is opposite to the selected parameter Generally you should change parameter usually select L instead of C or vice versa so that a positive Lor C value display can be obtained See paragraph 3 3 1 However a negative indication when the display is delta or deltaRLC means that the measured value is less than the reference stored nominal value and the parameter is probably correct Delta Percent Displays Selected by the DISPLA Y Key This presents the principal measurement RLC in terms of a percent difference above or below the nominal value last entered i e a previously stored reference Use this procedure a Select ENTER with the FUNCTION key b Select appropriate parameter and units with EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT and R Q L Q C D or C R key Repeat keyi
115. Q same 0096 to 0104 500 2 same 0496 to 0504 1 kM same 0996 to 1004 5 KN same 4995 to 5005 10 ka same 9994 to 1 001 50 kf same 4 992 to 5 008 90 kf same 8 975 to 9 025 Set the capacitance standard to obtain on the RLC readout the tabulated capacitance h Continue down the table verifying each line Because the capacitance in the series equivalent circuil is different from the decade capacitor setting when the series resistance is large use the RLC readout to indicate capacitance in those lines of the table 5 8 7 Limit Comparison Bins Verify the Digibridge performance with regard to limit comparison and bin assignments as follows The resistance standard 1433 H Figure 5 16 or equivalent is required for this test a Confirm or select measurement conditions on the Digibridge as listed FUNCTION ENTER DISPLAY VALUE MEASURE RATE SLOW EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT SERIES FREQUENCY 1 kHz Press 1 SHIFT FREQUENCY if necessary MEASURE MODE CONT RANGE Select range 3 by repeatedly pressing R Q for the first kohm range and then press SHIFT HOLD RNG if necessary to hold EXT BIAS OFF b Connect the 1657 9600 extender cable from the Digibridge remote test fixture as follows high leads red and red white to resistor H low leads black and black white to resistor L ground lead black green to resistor G c Refer to Table 5 12 After making the sequence of key strokes using the appropriate
116. Quick acquisition and shorting MED and FAST only useful at low frequencies continued on next page 5 SHIFT SPECIAL 3 OPERATION 3 61 Purpose 4 Digit Blanking Table 3 9 continued SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Specific Selection Elimination of ou a digits from RLC display and b digits from QDR display 5 Integra Multiplies integration time by tion Time Factor 6 Ratio Displays RLC only factor f 0 25 to 6 normally 1 Reducing f decreases accuracy and reduces measurement time Increasing f does the converse Normal displays Ratio displayed nominal meas value meas value nominal 7 Man auto Manual selection of parameter Parameter Selection Reset 8 Median Result 9 Version 10 Frequen cy Correc tion 11 IEEE Address Automatic selection of parameter R Q L Q or C D default Reset all selections to default power up conditions Normal no median found Display is median of 3 meas Displays the software version Displays the correction c Refer to paragraph 3 4 1 Displays the LISTEN address of the optional interface board NOTE Keystrokes Re Para a b SHIFT SPECIAL 4 f SHIFT SPECIAL 5 3 5 5 0 SHIFT SPECIAL 6 3 3 7 1 SHIFT SPECIAL 6 2 SHIFT SPECIAL 6 0 SHIFT SPECIAL 7 3 3 1 1 SHIFT SPECIAL 7 2 SHIFT SPECIAL 7 Note 0 SHIFT SPECI
117. Ratio Mode Nominal Value RLC Value Inductance Capacitance Resistance Normal mode one of 3 described above Ratio Mode RLC Value Nominal Value Henries Millihenries Microfarads Nanofarads Picofarads Percent difference from nominal value Ohms Ki l ohms Positive R L C A or ARLC Negative R L C A or ARLC Measured number right justified in format field like the RLC display except the zero before the decimal point is explicitly provided and this number can be as long as seven characters The standard carriage return and line feed characters end of string Table 3 12 QDR VALUE DATA OUTPUT FORMAT Character Al lowed Sequence Purpose Characters Meaning 1 Status space Normal operation 0 Overrange of QDR display I Invalid measurement due to signal overload 2 Format space 3 Parameter Q Quality factor D Dissipation factor R Resistance 4 Format space S sss Units 2 spaces O Ohms space kO Ki l ohms ppm Parts per million for D or Q 3 spaces Dimensionless for Q or D 8 Sign space Positive QDR value Negative QDR value 9 15 Number 012345 Measured number right justified in 6789 format field like the QDR display space except the zero before the decimal point is explicitly provided and this number can be as long as six characters 16 CR The standard carriage return and 17 Delimiter LF line feed characters end of string If measurement is overrange display goes
118. Refer to the specification MIL C 39010 e m T 10 mm Lade A B 60051 0 Figure 3 11 Shapes of wire recommended for short circuit zeroing procedures before critical low impedance measurements Use A for radial lead or miscellaneous DUTs Use B before installing adaptors for axial lead DUTs Table 3 6 INDUCTANCE OF STRAIGHT ROUND WIRES Body of Table Inductance in nH For frequency 100 kHz For low frequency Wire Wire Length in Centimeters Wire Length in Centimeters Size 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Delta 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Delta 16 13 0 22 0 31 6 41 7 52 3 63 1 74 3 13 13 5 22 7 32 6 42 9 53 7 64 8 76 2 25 18 14 1 23 5 33 7 44 3 55 4 67 3 78 5 16 14 4 24 1 34 4 45 2 56 4 68 1 79 9 25 20 15 1 25 1 35 8 47 0 58 5 70 5 82 7 19 15 4 25 5 36 3 47 6 59 3 71 3 83 6 25 22 16 2 26 7 37 9 49 6 61 7 74 1 86 9 22 16 3 26 9 38 1 49 9 62 1 74 6 87 3 25 From the formula L 21 logn 2l rho 1 delta nanohenries where length cm rho radius cm logn natural logarithm delta skin effect correction tabulated Reference R E Terman Radio Engineers Handbook McGraw Hill 3 6 7 Cable Related Errors and How to Correct for them Test fixture extension can introduce measurement error so that specified accuracy may not be met In other words some of the series impedances and ground capacitances a ssociated with connecting a remote DUT can be large enough to introduce terms that add significantly to the
119. SHIFT SPECIAL SHIFT For range 2 press 1 6 8 9 2 2 SHIFT SPECIAL SHIFT For range 3 press For range 3 press 1 6 8 9 3 2 SHIFT SPECIAL SHIFT For range 4 press 1 6 8 9 4 2 ISHIFT SPECIAL SHIFT Select MEASURE RATE MEDIUM to FAST to SLOW r Once the K factors have been determined and stored for all four ranges step d through e repeat the recalibration procedure for all ranges see paragraphs 5 9 2 through 5 9 6 5 10 INTERNAL SETTINGS 5 10 1 Address for IEEE 488 Interface Each device instrument in a system linked by an IEEE 488 bus must have its own address except in the simple case of a single talker only with one or more listeners that are always listening The initial setting of address provided by the factory in the interface option of this Digibridge is 00011 If the requirements of a system installation make it necessary to change the Digibridge address use the following procedure Refer to paragraph 2 8 4 for further comments and a table of possible addresses a Remove the interface option after removing the 2 large screws with resilient washers in the rear panel See Figure 1 2 CAUTION Observe the handling precautions given at the beginning of the Service Section b Find S2 which is located at the end of the interface option board about 3 cm 1 in from the TALK switch S1 If S2 is covered lift the cover off exposing the DIP switch which has 2 rows or 6 tiny square
120. SHORT CALIBRATE BIAS EXTERNAL ON BIAS ON OFF rm Aric DISPLAY VALUE A BIN NO GO HOLD RNG CONST V DQ in PPM Hl MEASURE MEANE stow MEDIUM FAST NO GO 1 A MEASURE CONT TRIGGERED START REMOTE CONTROL Rs Q Ls Q Cs D Cs Rs EQUIVILENT SERIES Cp Rp cncur PARALLEL Rp Q Lp Q Cp D 60037 0 Figure 3 14 Map of keyboard showing which programming entries can be made in MEASURE function and which ones in ENTER function 3 9 2 Function Map Figure 3 14 The figure shows graphically like a map of the keyboard which programming keys are enabled in the MEASURE function and which ones in the ENTER function Notice that one row of keys inside the square 16 key area and all of the keys outside of that square are enabled regardless of any selection by the FUNCTION key 3 9 3 Summary of Interrogations Certain status and results information is indicated automatically on the display panels For example Indicators below RLC display parameter and or units of measurement All units and indicators unlit display is either bin no or ratio NEG RLC negative L or C or for displays of delta or deltaRLC measured value less than stored nominal NEG QDR capacitive resistor or apparently negative loss factor RANGE HELD autoranging is disabled CONST VOLT source resistance held to 25 ohms accuracy compromised DQ IN PPM units of D or Q not R are parts per million Hardly a
121. URE with the FUNCTION key and TRIGGERED with MEASURE MODE key Press 1 6 8 9 2 1 I SHIFT CALIBRATE NOTE The GO indicator being lit and a 6 in the left and a 6 in the right displays confirm that calibration is enabled Press START The GO indicator remains unlit while calibration proceeds Keeping hands away from the test fixture wait until the GO indicator is lit again This completes recalibration of one range SERVICE 5 55 d Check as follows that the Digibridge operates properly with the recalibration Select CONTINUOUS with the MEASURE MODE key The Digibridge should measure the calibration resistor like any ordinary resistor and display its Rand Q ppm values The Q display can be expected to jump a bit Precision and repeatability are in the order of 5 ppm Also the NO GO indicator will probably be lit this is normal e Disconnect the calibration resistor from the test fixture 5 9 8 Recalibration for Range 1 a Connect the 95 3 kilohm calibration resistor to the Digibridge test fixture b Enter the known parameters of the calibration resistor as in the following example based on the values R 94 986 kilohms and Q 280 ppm NOTES The Digibridge will accept six digits for R even though only five will be displayed The Q is associated with bin 00 and its value must be preceded with if the known Q is negative Select ENTER with FUNCTION key and verify that MEASURE MODE is CONT Press 1
122. View Rear view should show new power supply assembly pN 700011 without line voltage switch Page 6 5 Mechanical Parts List for 1689M Rear Items 3 through 6 power connector fuse extractor post line voltage switch and cover deleted on new power supply assembly Page 6 15 amp Page 6 16 Parts Lists and Diagrams Power Supply Assembly shown PN 1689 2005 has been replaced by Power Supply Assembly PN 700011 The 700011 Assembly must be repaired by module exchange Page 6 19 6 20 6 21 amp 6 22 Parts Lists and Diagrams High speed interface board shown PN 1689 4720 has been replaced by PN 1689 4620 See instructions supplied with the 1689 9630 1 i Be I 1 CONDENSED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS l t2 to mw to r2 pO t2 2 rm C o CO t3 M Table of Contents SPECIFICATIONS WARRANTY INTRODUCTION SECTION 1 PURPOSE 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 Basic Digibridge 1689 2 Basic Digibridge 1689M 3 Interface Options 4 References 3 OONTROLS INDICATORS 4 ACCESSORIES etc INSTALLATION SECTION 2 UNPACKING AND INSPECTION DIMENS IONS 2 x POWER LINE CONNECTION LINE VOLTAGE REGULATION TEST FIXTURE CONNECTIONS 1 For 1689 2 For 1689M 6 BIAS VOLTAGE FOR THE DUT 1 Internal Bias 2 External Bias 7 HANDLER INTERFACE OPTION 1 via High Speed Option 2 via Regular Speed Option 3 Timing 8 EEE 488 INTERFACE OPTION Purpose 2 Interface Functions 3 Signal Identific
123. Z80V AND 2 104 Fue eee spi CAPOLARSATIONSE SEULEMENT i Ed Figure 1 4 The 1689M Digibridge rear view 1 8 INTRODUCTION Table 1 2 REAR CONNECTORS AND CONTROLS Fig 1 3 Ref No Name Description Function 1 EXTERNAL BIAS Connector 2 pins Receives cable 1658 2450 supplied for connector labeled 60 V max external bias supply Observe the voltage 200 mA max and current limits and polarity 2 TALK switch Toggle switch Selection of mode for IEEE 488 interface TALK LISTEN or TALK ONLY as labeled 3 Air filter Porous plastic To prevent dirt from entering inlet vent sponge 4 Power connector Shrouded 3 wire AC power input Use appropriate power cord 10 labeled 90 125 V 180 250 V 50 60 Hz etc Fuse labeled 250 V 1 2 A SLOW BLOW Line voltage switch Vent HANDLER INTERFACE connector Vent IEEE 488 INTERFACE connector plug conCorming to International Electrotechnical Commission 320 Fuse in extraction post holder Slide switch Upper position 90 to 125 V lower position 180 to 250 V Air passage Socket 24 pin receives Amphenol Microribbon plug P N 5i 30240 or equiv Air passage Socket 24 pin Receives IEEE 488 interface cable See paragraph 2 8 with Belden SPH 386 socket or equivalent The GenRad 4200 0300 power cord supplied is rated Cor 125 V Short circuit protection Use Bussman type MDL or equivalent fuse 1 2 A 250 V rating Ad
124. about operation with a parts handler is given in paragraph 3 11 3 5 5 Integration Time Factor a Special Function The length of time that the Digibridge spends integrating analog voltages in the process of data acquisition can be varied by programming a number called the integration time factor if the measure rate is selected to be FAST or MEDIUM In general programming the I T factor to a larger value allows the Digibridge to integrate over more cycles of the test signal thus increasing the measurement time and enhancing the accuracy If the measure rate is SLOW integration time is automatically fixed at a relatively large value so that any programmed I T factor has no effect on measurement time The I T factor is normally 1 You can program it to values in the range from 0 25 to 6 For I T factor 0 25 if measurement rate is FAST the integration time is set to 1 ms if the test frequency is above 1 kHz or to one period of the test signal if test frequency is less than 1 kHz The following tabulation indicates the integration time for several combinations of I T factor and measurement rate for test frequency of 1 kHz I T FACTOR 0 25 1 6 FAST 1 ms 4 ms 24 ms MEDTUM 4 ms 17 ms 100 ms SLOW 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms not affected by I T factor Programming the I T factor is a special function which is under keyboard control only if you have selected ENTER function Then for example press these keys 21 5 SHIFT SPECIAL
125. acter is a byte coded according to the 7 bit ASCII code as explained above The alphanumeric characters used are appropriate to the data for convenience in reading printouts The character strings are always provided in the same sequence as that tabulated in paragraph 3 12 3 for example RLC value QDR value bin number if all 3 were selected by the X7 command The carriage return and line feed characters at the end of each string provide a printer for example with the basic commands to print each string on a separate line For example if the measurement was 0 54321 uF 1 kHz range 4 held the character string for RLC value is U space C space uF 2 spaces 0 54321 CR LF If the D measurement was 001 the character string for QDR value is 2 spaces D 5 spaces 00 0010 CR LF If the measurement falls into bin 9 the character string for bin number is F space BIN 2 spaces 9 CR LF The character string for RLC value has the length of 17 characters for QDR value 17 characters for bin number 10 characters including spaces carriage return and line feed characters Refer to the format tables in paragraph 3 12 2 for details 2 9 ENVIRONMENT The Digibridge can be operated in nearly any environment that is comfortable for the operator Keep the instrument and all connections to the parts under test away from electromagnetic fields that may interfere with measurements Refer to the Specifications at the front of this manual for
126. al Overload 82 3 due to Abnormal Meas Cycle 82 4 due to LC Resonance 82 3 14 SAVPLE IEEE PROGRAMS 3 83 1 Programming Hints 83 2 Hewlett Packard HP85 84 3 Capitol Equipm t PC 488 IBM PC 84 4 Nat l Instrm t GPIB PCII IBM PC 85 an THEORY SECTION 4 IMIBODAETION uon nox wa a otadi 1 General 2 Brief Description of 1689 8 Block Diagram PRINCIPAL FUNCTIONS 4 2 Frequency and Time Source 8 Sine Wave Generation 1 1 1 2 4 1 Elementary Measurement Gizeuit 4 5 5 4 Dual Slope Integrating Detector 6 SERVICE SECTION 5 CUSTOMER SERVICE 5 3 INSTRUMENT RETURN 5 3 1 Return Material 3 2 Packaging 3 REPAIR amp REPLACEMENT OF BOARDS 5 3 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION 5 3 1 General 3 2 Performance verification 4 8 Measurement Time Checkout 8 DISASSEMBLY AND ACCESS 5 11 1 Disassembly 1689 12 2 Disassembly 1689M 18 8 Relocation of BNC Connector Bkt 22 4 Access to Internal Components 23 5 IEEE Handler Interface Options 25 6 Removal of Multiple Pin Packages 26 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 5 26 1 Care of Test Fixture 26 2 Cleaning Air Filter 28 3 Care of Display Panel 28 TROUBLE ANALYSIS 5 28 1 General 28 2 Power Up Self Checks 30 8 Battery and Fuse Replacement 33 4 Power Supply 34 5 Sinewave Generator Checks 35 6 Front End Amplifiers Switches 36 ACCURACY VERIFICATION 5 38 1 General 38 2 C Meas mt Acc cy Ranges 12 3 39 8 C Meas mt Acc cy Range 4 42 4 Resistance Mea
127. an be reduced do so e If this resonance effect is not easily avoided consider that the DUT may be self resonant If so unqualified measurements of apparent inductance are misleading Try a set of measurements of apparent inductance at several frequencies sufficiently low or high to avoid the resonance failure display NOTE If the NEG RLC indicator is lit with indicated units of mH or H the measured reactance is capacitive although the RLC display is a number of millihenries or henries 3 14 SAMPLE IEEE PROGRAMS Below are three sample IEEE 488 programs using three different IEEE controllers These programs are intentionally very short and are intended as aids to demonstrate to the programmer how to operate a Digibridge using a typical controller It is assumed that the Digibridge address is set to 3 3 14 1 Programming Hints a The initiation start command is GO This is the number 0 not the letter O b It is good practice to begin a new program with a P2 command This will reset all parameters to the known turn on state If P2 is used later in the program it will reset everything including Nominal Value and any Bin Limits that may be set OPERATION 3 83 c An X command must be sent to enable data output d The string P2A10 M3X4Z2G0 should be sent for the Short Circuit Zero A frequency other than 1 kHz can be sent if needed e The string P2A10 M1X4Z1G0 should be sent for the Open Circuit Zero A frequency ot
128. an obtain resolution that is better than the repeatability of measurements OPERATION 3 21 Conductance Measurements Another use of ratio display is to obtain conductance values when the primary parameter is resistance The parameter selection is Rp Q or possibly Rs Q The inverse ratio display is used To obtain results that are direct reading in mS enter nominal value of 1 kilohm for direct reading in uS enter nominal value of 1000 kilohms For example if you enter a nominal value of 1000 kilohms and enable calculation and display of nominal measurement then measurement results can be interpreted as though they were in units of microsiemens although the ratio is really dimensionless and the unit indicators remain unlit In this example for a 9 8765kilohm resistor the primary display would be 101 25 which you can interpret as 101 25 us Procedure To program the Digibridge for ratio displays enter desired nominal value in appropriate units of measurement enable the special function as follows a With the FUNCTION key select ENTER b If the Digibridge has just completed a measurement of a DUT so that the principal display already indicates the appropriate units of measurement this step can probably be skipped Otherwise using the appropriate parameter key select the units of the nominal value to be stored c Enter the desired nominal value For example if the unit5 displayed on the panel are uF and you want to set up a
129. ana plugs Be sure that the low terminals both potential and current connect to one end of the DUT and the high terminals to the other end Connect guard to a shield if any but not to either end of the DUT Refer to the following tabulation IL current low Black Connect to first main terminal of DUT PL potential low Black white Connect to first main terminal of DUT PH potential high Red white Connect to second main terminal of DUT JH current high Red Connect to second main terminal of DUT Guard shield or gnd Black green Connect to shield of DUT if any but not to either main terminal NOTE The Kelvin junctions IL amp PL and PH amp IH can be made by using stackable banana plugs for convenience so that only one connection is sufficient at each main terminal of the DUT Then to obtain best results it is very important to locate the banana plug hardware in final position while zeroing paragraph 3 1 3 3 10 OPERATION BNC Cable with Adaptors to Banana Plugs Recommended for 1689M Digibridge This arrangement used for the same applications as described above a Connect 1689 9602 BNC cable to 1689M Digibridge as specified in Table 3 1 b Connect the set of four BNC to banana plug adaptors to the free end of this cable One of these adaptors supplied with 1689M has a pigtail for connecting guard which may not be identified with the colors that the table indicates c Connect the banana p
130. and all previously programmed test conditions limits etc are reestablished To unlock it see paragraph 3 9 3 1 3 Zeroing Before measurement zero the Digibridge as follows In this process the instrument automatically measures stray parameters and retains the data which it uses to correct measurements so that results represent parameters of the DUT alone without for example test fixture or adaptor capacitance a Conditions SLOW measure rate 1 V test voltage default RANGE HELD indicator NOT lit b Open Circuit Press FUNCTION key if necessary to select MEASURE function Press MEASURE MODE key if necessary to select TRIGGERED mode If any test fixture adaptors are to be used install and position them for use See paragraph 3 2 For the 1689M connect the remote test fixture or at least the BNC cables and adaptors that will contact the DUT Be sure that the test fixture is open circuited If you want this zero process to echo a display of 00000 press the Cs D key However doing so will disable automatic parameter selection See paragraph 3 1 4 step b Press these keys deliberately 1 6 8 9 2 ISHIFT OPEN Note the GO indicator being lit and two zeros confirm the previous step Watch the GO indicator on the keyboard not one on any remote test fixture Keep hands and objects at least 10 cm 4 in from test fixture Press the START button The GO indication disappears Wait for the GO indicator to be
131. anel EXTERNAL BIAS connector Observe polarity marking on the rear panel connect the supply accordingly b Set the external suprly to limit current lt 200 mA c Set the external bias supply to the desired voltage lt 60 V d If the Digibridge power is off switch its POWER ON and wait for completion of the self check routine before the next step e Switch the EXTERNAL BIAS ON switch is at right of keyboard and verify that the BIAS ON indicator is lit see below If polarity is inverted the indicator will not be lit as brightly as normal If the bias cable fuse must be replaced use a 200 mA fast acting fuse f Switch the bias off using an external switch so that the DUT can be inserted before bias is applied to it Refer to the Operating Procedure below NOTE The BIAS ON indicator serves to indicate that the EXTERNAL BIAS is switched ON NOT NECESSARILY the presence of external bias See below Also whenever the EXTERNAL BIAS switch is ON the Digibridge automatically selects CONSTANT VOLTAGE Indicator When the EXTERNAL BIAS switch is ON the BIAS ON indicator shines as long as the Digibridge POWER is ON The indicator brightness depends somewhat on the external bias voltage Also when the EXTERNAL BIAS switch is ON but the POWER is switched OFF this indicator is lit by external bias voltages above about 3 V Effect on Power Up Be sure that the EXTERNAL BIAS switch is OFF before you switch the Digibridge
132. aningless readings ignore them b However if the keyboard is locked and the MEASURE indicator is lit to unlock it press 1 6 8 9 LOCK If you have the interface opticn it is possible that the FUNCTION is locked at ENTER Then the use of remote coJltrol signals is required either to unlock the keyboard or to select the MEASURE function which is a prerequisite for unlocking from the keyboard c Confirm or select the following measurement conditions on the Digibridge FUNCTION ENTER necessary for determining test frequency DISPLAY VALUE MEASURE RATE SLOW MEASURE MODE TRIGGERED necessary for zeroing EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT SERIES EXTERNAL BIAS OFF slide switch d Verify that the test frequency is 1 kHz the power up default by pressing SHIFT FREQUENCY The left hand display should read 1 0000 If any other reading is observed press 1 SHIFT FREQUENCY e Verify that the test voltage is 1 volt by pressing SHIFT VOLTAGE The left hand display should read 1 0000 If any other reading is observed press 1 SHIFT VOLTAGE f Press the FUNCTION key to select MEASURE function g If the Digibridge has an interface option which has two 24 pin interface connectors on the rear panel be sure that the TALK switch rear panel is set to TALK ONLY h Zero the Digibridge as follows before making measurements Make sure that the MEASURE and TRIGGERED keyboard indicators are lit
133. anti static envelopes or carriers hand tools etc on a work surface defined as follows The work surface typically a bench top must be conductive and reliably connected to earth ground through a safety resistance of approximately 250 kilohms to 500 kilohms Also for personnel safety the surface must NOT be metal A resistivity of 30 to 300 kilohms per square is suggested Avoid placing tools or electrical parts on insulators such as books paper rubber pads plastic bags or trays Ground the frame of any line powered equipment test instruments lamps drills soldering irons etc directly to earth ground Accordingly to avoid shorting ou t the safety resistance be sure that grounded equipment has rubber feet or other means of insulation from the work surface The instrument or system component being serviced should be similarly insulated while grounded through the power cord ground wire but must be connected to the work surface before during and after any disassembly or other procedure in which the line cord is disconnected Exclude any hand tools and other items that can generate a static charge Examples of forbidden items are non conductive plunger type solder suckers and rolls of tape Ground yourself reliably through a resistance to the work surface use for example a conductive strap or cable with a wrist cuff The cuff must make electrical contact directly with your skin do NOT wear it over clothing Resistance between
134. apts power supply to line voltage ranges as indicated To operate use a small screw driver not a sharp object Venti lation Connections to component handler outputs are bin numbers and status input is a start signal Ventilation Input output connections according to IEEE Std 488 1978 Functions complete remote control Output of selected resul ts with or without controller Table 1 2 REAR CONNECTORS AND OONTROLS continued Fig 1 3 Ref No Name Description Function 11 Fuse 1 4 A Plug in type subs Protects instrument circuitry from miniature quick damage by charged capacitors acting Manufactesr Part No 273 250 by LITTLEFUSE Inc 800 E Northwest Hwy Des Plaines IL 60016 TALK switch and 24 pin connectors are supplied with the interface option only 1 4 ACCESSORIES GenRad makes several accessories that enhance the usefulness of each Digibridge The axial lead adaptors provided convert the test fixture to a configuration well suited for axial lead components A choice of extender cables facilitates making connection to a parts handler or to any DUT that does not readily fit the test fixture Extender cables are available with your choice of banana plugs BNC or type 874 connectors Each cable branches into 4 parts for true 4 terminal connections and guard to the device being measured without appreciable reduction in measurement accuracy A remote test fixture is available to receive hand ins
135. ar measurement time for every DUT that is on the oppooite side of the boundary from its predecessor Note if the Digibridge starts in range 1 to measure in range 4 four almost complete measurement cycles are required before the desired result appears Therefore at least in some measurement situations maximum measurement speed requires range holding RANGE HOLDING Why Hold a Range The moot important use of the range holding capability is to avoid range changes when the component is removed from the fixture when in the CONTINUOUS mode With no component connected the instrument will autorange to range 1 Thus if range 1 is not selected when the component is in place considerable time is loot by unnecessary autoranging Another use of the range hold occurs when measuring components of the same nominal value whose actual values spread across the boundry between two ranges If allowed to autorange the units and decimal point may change with range which may be confusing to the operator There are other uses for holding a range such as obtaining the correct bias current or getting better guard capability When a range is held that is not the range that autoranging would select the accuracy may be sacrificed To inhibit autoranging select the range held mode RANGE HELD indicator lit as described below four methods To Hold Present Range If the present range as indicated by the measurement display is the desired one press SHIFT
136. ard Slide the adaptors together or apart so the body of the DUT will fit easily between them Notice that the contacts inside the adaptor are off center be sure to orient the adaptors so the contacts are close to the body of the DUT especially if it has short or fragile leads The adaptors accommodate wires with diameters up to 1 5 mm 06 in AWG 15 The body of the DUT that will fit between these adaptors can be 80 mm long and 44 mm diameter 3 1 x 1 7 in maximum Each axial wire must be at least 3 mm long 0 12 in The overall length of the DUT including the axial wires must be at least 22 mm 0 866 in Insert the DUT so that one lead makes connection on the left side of the test fixture the other lead on the right side Insertion and removal are smooth easy operations and connections are reliable if leads are reasonably clean and straight Press the DUT down so that the leads enter the slots in the adaptors as far as they go easily OPERATION 3 5 Be sure to remove any obvious dirt from leads before inserting them The test fixture contacts will wipe through a film of wax but can become clogged and ineffectual if dirty leads are inserted repeatedly Be sure to insert only one thing into each half of the test fixture at anyone time If any object is inserted into the same slot with a DUT lead it will probably NOT make true Kelvin connections NOTE For a DUT with very short leads it is important to orient each adaptor
137. ards are specified to 02 this amount should be added to the 1689 specification for inductance measurements if they are to be used in any manner involving legal certification Secondary Readout R with C R with C D Y Re Rmin 1 1 count 01 1 Kev ru E a PE 1 Ks Kfv 01 R with C D lt 1 1 count 01 1 Kev PERLA P S Hm a gir Ks Kfv 01 Cmaz Cz DI i NOTES This is a percent of reading specification plus or minus 1 count because of resolution Otherwise the notes for the primary readout apply Secondary Readout D and Q D with C 0001 1 Kev or ER cag un 1 D D 1 Ks Kfv 0001 Cmaz Cr Q with RJ Rz Rmin 2 0001 1 Kev or or Q Q Q 14 Ks Kfv 0001 Rmaz Rr Q with L 0001 1 Kev or Lz Lmin or 2 Lmaz Lz 1 Q Q 1 Ks Kfv 0001 xiii NOTES This is not a percent error but rather the amount posiu ve or negative by which the D or Q reading may be in error Otherwise the notes for the primary readout apply When using DQ in PPM the final term of 0001 should be removed Table C Range Constants AUTO RANGE HELD RANGE RANGE 1 RANGE 2 RANGE 3 RANGE 4 Cmax 25 uF f 6400 pF f 100 nF f 1600 nF f 25 uF f Cmin 400 pF f 400 pF f 6 4 nF f 100 nF f 1 6 uF f Rmax 410 KQ 410 K 25 6 KN 1 6 K 1000 Rmin 6 259 25 6 KN 1 6 KQ 0 1 KN 6 252 Lmax 65 H f 65 H f 4100
138. are simple ASCII character sequences of two or three characters The first character is a CAPITAL letter which designates the category of the entry The following ASCII character or two characters if this is a three byte entry are decimal digits 0 to 9 which convey information about the selection within the category For example the ASCII sequence D2 means in DISPLAY category select VALUE The command is like pressing the DISPLAY key to select VALUE Floating Point Entries These entries also shown in the table are ASCII character sequences of arbitrary length always terminated with a semicolon The first character is a CAPITAL letter which designates the category of the entry The following ASCII characters before the semicolon define a floating point number including at least one decimal digit 0 to 9 and optional characters e E Any space character is ignored The character e or E is recognized as exponent in E format notation For example any of the following three entries will set the test frequency to 100 Hz F0 1 Fle 1 F100 0E 3 NOTES 1 The 2 byte command P2 is recommended as the first command in a remote programming sequence because it resets all selections to their power up default conditions 2 The 2 byte command P3 returns the Digibridge to the diagnostic routine and local control i e the equivalent to a power down power up cycle OPERATION 3 73 Table 3 17 COMMANDS USED IN PROGRAMMIN
139. ary measurement is negative Q D or R as calculated by the Digibridge when selected parameter is L Q C D or C R then there are t 0 likely possibilities If the Q or D value whichever is being displayed is very sma ll a small acceptable calibration and or measurement error can lead to a negative result It should of course fall within the specified accuracy of the instrument Measurement error can be reduced by choice of measurement conditions averaging etc Another possibility is that the DUT as seen by the Digibridge 3 18 OPERATION really does have a negative loss factor This situation might occur when you are measuring certain kinds of multiterminal networks or active devices NOTE Improper connection of extender cables can cause a false indication of NEGATIVE QDR DQ IN PPM Selected by the SHIFT DQ in PPM Keys For D or Q values less than 0100 selecting DQ in PPM improves the resolution by a factor of 100 For example if the displayed D values of two capacitors are both 0001 changing to DQ in PPM might distinguish them by providing a reading of 138 ppm for one and 87 ppm for the other The DQ in PPM selection applies to the Q or D result only and is effective for all selections of the DISPLAY key except BIN NO and for all parameter selections except C R When this selection is in effect the DQ IN PPM indicator is lit the display is always parts per million without decimal point if the display is blank
140. as the term Ks 3 5 3 Settling Time or Programmed Delay in Triggered Measure Mode For accurate measurements it is often helpful to have a time delay between the START signal and the beginning of the first voltage measurement within the process of data conversion Because such a delay allows time for switching transients to settle and because more time is required for low test frequencies the Digibridge normally incorporates settling time as follows If measure mode is CONTINUOUS settling time zero programmed delay is disabled If measure mode is TRIGGERED with measure rate FAST settling time 7 ms f If measure mode is TRIGGERED with measure rate MEDfUM settling time 10 ms f If measure mode is TRIGGERED with measure rate SLOW settling time 12 ms f where f is equal to the test frequency in kHz NOTE the three times given above are verifiable in the ENTER function by pressing SHIFT DELAY If measure mode is TRIGGERED you can program any desired delay from 0 to 99999 milliseconds for transient voltages to settle for mechanical handling to be completed and contacts to settle etc The Digibridge will pause for this much time after each START signal before actually starting to take data Any programmed delay replaces the default settling time and affects measurements only in TRIGGERED measure mode As an example you can set delay to 2 5 ms as follows Select ENTER with the FUNCTION key and press 2 S
141. asurement in CONTINUOUS measure mode This erroneous measurement is typically caused by insertion or switching of the DUT at some indeterminate time during a measurement cycle Typically this erroneous measurement is preceded and followed by valid ones The next several measurements are correct until the DUT is changed again If median value capability is enabled the Digibridge displays the median of three measurements only one of which is liable to be erroneous Because the erroneous one is commonly quite different from the other two the median is very likely to be one of the correct ones Consequently you see only one change in the value displayed from before to after the DUT change Another example of a use for the median value capability is for measuring in the presence of occasional noise that pollutes some measurements particularly noise spikes or bursts that can occasionally be coupled from electrical equipment through power line to Digibridge circuits or via inductive or capacitive coupling to the DUT itself Such noise pollutes a measurement now and then among a majority of measurements that are correct This noise is non random i e not white noise but it may be repetitive Obviously you would prefer to have only the correct results displayed and or output via the interfaces to other devices If the duration of the noise spike is typically small compared to the length of a measurement cycle and the noise repetition rate is small c
142. ation 4 Codes and Addresses 9 ENVIRONVENT 10 RACK MOUNTING M LI de M A to t2 O5 tO tO t to b to Ww 1 e e V xvii m CO CO C9 t2 P2 r2 c CF Q wq Oc QU Co 4 BR BOW QO tO m v M e e p e 3 1 1 General 2 Startup 3 Zeroing 4 Routine Measurement tO 00 3 Ch QT t5 D 3 Settling Time 4 Measure Mode amp Display Effects 29 OPERATION SECTION 3 c eo to 00 O Aa amp d CD Ne of BASIC PROCEDURE CONNECTING THE DUT General Integral Test Fixture Radial Using Adaptors Axial Lead Dut BNC Adaptors Remote Fixture Extender Cable Type 874 Extender Cable Banana Plugs 10 ERects of Cable Capacitances 11 Tweezers Special Test Fixture 12 Kelvin Clips 13 MEASUREMENT PARAMETERS RESULTS DISPLAYS OUTPUTS 3 13 1 Parameters R L C QD 13 2 Equiv Curcuits Series Paral 14 3 Results PRINCIPAL MEASUREVENT 17 SECONDARY MEASUREMENT 18 GO NO GO 19 4 Units Multipliers Blank Disp 19 5 D Q in PPM 20 6 Digit Blanking Special Funct 21 7 Ratio Displays Special Funct 21 PRINCIPAL TEST CONDITIONS 3 23 l Test Frequency 23 2 Test Voltage 24 3 Constant Voltage Source 25 4 Constant Current Source 25 5 Other Conditions 26 MEASUREMENT TIME AND MEASUREMENT RANGES 3 26 1 General 26 2 Measure Rate Selection Keybrd 28 Programmed Delay 28 ii 5 Integration T
143. be modified if the actual calibrated value of your standard or its accuracy either or both is different from the tabulated value s For example if your 10 pF standard is known to be 10 18 0 25 pF then compute the new tolerance as follows Digibridge accuracy 0 02 percent The limits are therefore 9 92 to 10 44 pF Verify that the instrument meets performance specifications as follows 5 8 2 Capacitance Measurement Accuracy Small and Medium C Ranges 1 2 3 Make the test setup and verify instrument performance as follows CAUTION Be sure the line voltage switch rear panel is correctly set for your power line voltage a After the line voltage switch has been set to correspond to the input line voltage connect the power cord and switch POWER ON b Connect the 1688 9600 extender cable type 874 connectors to the Digibridge test fixture as described in paragraph 3 2 5 The screws must be hand tightened because they provide the ground guard connection c Connect the high leads red and red white to one of the 874 Tee connectors Connect the low leads black and black white to the other 874 tee d Before measurement zero the Digibridge as follows In this process the Digibridge automatically measures stray parameters and retains the data which it uses to correct measurements so that results represent parameters of the DUT alone without for example test fixture or adaptor capacitance Be sure that M
144. bias after each DUT is in the test fixture and discharge before it is removed Connect the external bias voltage supply and switching circuit using the 1658 2450 cable supplied via the rear panel EXTERNAL BIAS connector Observe polarity marking on the rear panel connect the supply accordingly 2 4 INSTALLATION 2 7 HANDLER INTERFACE OPTIONAL 2 7 1 Interface via High Speed Measurement Interface Option 1689 9620 If you have the 1689 9620 High Speed Measurement IEEE 488 Bus Handler Interface Option connect from the HANDLER INTERFACE on the rear panel to a handler printer or other suitable peripheral equipment as follows The presence of the 24 pin connectors shown in Figure 1 3 verifies that you have one of the interface options see also paragraph 2 7 2 Refer to Table 1 2 for the appropriate connector to use in making a cable Refer to Table 2 1 for the key to signal names functions and pin numbers Connect the bin control lines to the handler See Table 2 1 Notice that the 1689 9620 High Speed Measurement Option provides outputs for automatic sorting into 15 bins Refer to paragraph 3 8 As indicated in the Specifications at the front of this manual the output signals come from opencollector drivers that pull each signal line to a low voltage when that signal is active and let it float when inactive Each external circuit must be powered by a positive voltage up to 15 V max with sufficient impedance pull up resistors
145. bits C exponent is 1100101 in 2s complement notation which is the same as a negative exponent of 011011 i e 27 base 10 NOTE 1 bit 6 is always 1 for a negative exponent 0 for a positive exponent Bytes 3 4 C mantissa is 879044 directly from the 16 bit binary number NOTE 2 In the mantissa the first bit has the weight of 0 5 the next bit 0 25 the next bit 0 125 and each other bit half of the one before it to the 16th bit Therefore the C value is 2 to the 27th power 879044 7 45058 10 to the 9 power 879044 6 54939 10 e 9 farads 6 5494 nF Bytes 5 6 and 7 by the same method as bytes 2 3 and 4 D 0003 Byte 8 Parameters are C D Data numbers are values normal Bin 7 assignment EXAMPLE 2 Bytes are shown separated by spaces STATUS RLC e RLC mantissa byte 1 byte 2 byte 3 byte 4 76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210 0010x010 00001010 10100011 00011100 The example 2 interpretation is as follows Byte 1 Normal measurement Range 3 RLC data are needed Byte 2 bit 7 Sign of R value is Byte 2 other bits R exponent is 0001010 in 2s complement notation which is the same as a positive exponent of 001010 i e 10 base 10 See NOTE 1 above Bytes 3 4 R mantissa is 637146 from the 16 bit binary number see NOTE 2 above Therefore the R value is 2 to the 10th power 637146 1024 637146 652 44 ohms 3 80 OPERATION 3 13 SELF CHECKS AND FA
146. blank 999999 is output in this field OPERATION 3 67 Table 3 13 BIN N MBER DATA OUTPUT FORMAT Character Allowed Sequence Purpose Characters Meaning 1 Pass fail space Go bins 01 through 13 F No Go bins 00 or 14 2 Format space 3 Label B The word BIN 4 I 5 N 6 Format space 7 8 Bin number 01234 Bin number assignment 00 to 14 56789 9 CR The standard carriage return and 10 Delimiter LF line feed characters end of string 3 68 OPERATION Table 3 14 BIN SUMMARY DATA OUTPUT FORMAT Character Al lowed Sequence Purpose Characters Meaning 1 Pass fail space Go bins 01 through 13 F No Go bins 00 or 14 2 Format space 3 Label B The word BINSUM 4 I 5 N 6 S 7 U 8 M 9 Format space 10 11 Bin number 01234 Bin Summary Number 00 to 14 56789 12 Equivalence Equals 13 17 Sum 01234 Total number counted in this bin 56789 the bin summary number 18 CR The standard carriage return and 19 Delimiter LF line feed characters end of string Bin Summary Output Fonnat Table 9 14 The bin summary output can be enabled by the SHIFT BIN SUM LOCK sequence from the keyboard It can also be enabled by the El command from the bus See paragraph 3 12 3 The bin summary output consists of 15 lines one apiece for the 15 bins 00 through 14 Each line has the format shown in the table nene aimata rn 3 12 3 Talk Listen Use for Remote Programming and Data Transfers Observe the REMOTE CONTROL
147. ble to be erroneous you should then proceed to obtain service to repair the fault and or recalibrate 11111 1111 Failure of the high speed math chip on the 1689 9620 high speed measurement and IEEE handler interface option This check is performed only if that option is present You can proceed from this power up self check failure 11111 1111 and operate the Digibridge To do so press the C D key Interface functions can be expected to work properly However the Digibridge will operate at its regular speed as though the high speed option were absent if it has this failure 3 13 2 Failure Display due to Signal Overload 014 right display blank Occurrence of an unrecoverable signal overload during the last measurement This means that a signal overload occurred during RANGE HELD or while measuring on Range 4 Otherwise if a signal overload occurs on range 1 2 or 3 and range is NOT held this failure display is not shown instead the Digibridge will change to the next higher numbered range and try again Signal overload can result from any of five causes 1 RANGE HELD and CONSTANT VOLTAGE with impedance value too low for the range 2 Transient voltage from charged capacitor 3 Transient due to application of bias voltage 4 Hardware failure 5 LC resonance effect measuring inductance 3 13 3 Failure Display due to Abnormal Measurement Cycle 22222 xxxx The Digibridge will abort the measurement and provide this displa
148. c technician remove the interface option assembly as described in the 1689 Digibridge Service instructions There is no need to remove the top cover first b Set the switches in DIP switch assembly S2 to the desired address which is a 5 bit binary number See below c Replace the interface option assembly in its former place Notice that S2 is located at the end of the interface option board about 3 cm 1 in from the TALK switch SI If S2 is covered lift the cover off exposing the DIP switch which has 6 tiny switches numbered 1 thru 6 To enter logical 1 s depress the side of each switch nearest the end of the board switch open To enter logical O s depress the other side of the switch switch closed The address is read from 5 to 1 not using 6 Thus for example to set up the address 00011 enter O s at positions 5 4 3 enter I s at positions 2 1 This makes the talk address C and the listen address Strictly speaking the address includes more S2 determines only the device dependent bits of the address You cannot choose talk and listen addresses separately only as a pair The list of possible pairs is shown in Table 2 3 INSTALLA TION 2 13 Table 2 3 ADDRESS PAIRS AND SETTINGS FOR SWITCH S2 Talk address Listen address Switch setting Symbo Binary Symbol Binary 54321 1 000 000 space 0 100 000 00000 A 1 000 001 0 100 001 00001 B 1 000 010 T 0 100 010 00010 C 1 000 011 0 100 O11 00011 D 1 00
149. ccuracy is 0 02 Long term accuracy and reliability are assured by the measurement system which makes these accurate analog measurements over many decades of impedance without any critical internal adjustments Calibration to ccount for any change of test fixture parameters is semiautomatic the operator needs to provide only open circuit and short circuit conditions in the procedure The Digibridge tester normally autoranges and automatically identifies the principal measurement parameter The test fixture with a pair of plug in adaptors receives any common component part axial lead or radial lead so easily that insertion of the device under test DUT is a one hand operation True 4 terminal connections are made automatically Extender cables are available for measurements at a moderate distance from the instrument They are optional for the 1689 which has a built in test fixture but requires extension typically for bulky components or parts in an automatic handler They are necessary for the 1689M which has no built in test fixture Limit comparisons facilitate sorting into 13 GO and 2 NO GO bins Programmable test conditions include INTRODUCTION 1 1 Test frequencies from 12 Hz to 100 kHz Test voltages from 5 mV to 1 275 V bias 2 V Delay before data acquisition from zero to 99999 ms Measurement speeds up to 45 per second with 1689M or 30 per second with 1689 Multi measurement routines with automatic averaging and or med
150. circuit at U59 pin 8 for a 1 kHz sinewave 2 4 Vpk pk If there is discrepancy in step c but U59 pin 10 has a 2 4 Vpk pk sinewave then U59 is faulty d Check the output of the IL circuit at U59 pin 14 for a 1 kHz sinewave with the following selection of DUTS in turn 10 ohm signal level should be 3 2 Vpk pk range 4 1 kohm signal level should be 970 mVpk pk range 3 10 kohm signal level should be 1 3 Vpk pk range 2 1 Mohn signal level should be 315 mVpk pk range 1 If a discrepancy is found in step d check similarly at the R Std signal check point as described in Table 55 The signal should be the same as listed in step d above for U59 pin 14 for the particular DUT and range 5 38 SERVICE Table 5 4 SOURCE RESISTOR RANGE SWITCHING CHECKS Control Signals Nom Source Signal Source RNG1 RNGO LSRC Range Resistance Check Point 0 0 0 4 25 ohm U32 pin 12 0 1 1 3 400 ohm U32 pin 14 1 0 1 2 6 4 kohm U32 pin 15 1 1 1 1 97 4 kohm U32 pin 11 Table 5 5 DETECTOR STANDARD RESISTOR RANGE SWITCHING CHECKS Nominal R Std Control Signals Standard Signal RNG1 RNGO LSTD Range Resistance Check Point 0 0 0 4 25 ohm U56 pin 12 0 1 1 3 400 ohm U56 pin 14 1 0 1 2 5 97 kohm U56 pin 15 1 1 1 1 97 4 kohm U56 pin 11 SERVICE 5 37 Table 5 6 EQUIPMENT FOR ACCURACY VERIFICATION Name Requirements Recommended Capacitor Decade 3 terminal 1 pF to 1 uF GenRad 1413 9700 accuracy 0 05 0 5 pF Capacitor Decade 50 pF
151. ck banana plug BLACK amp GREEN G capacitor G NOT linked to L 5 42 SERVICE e Verify that the RLC display agrees with the certified value of the standard corrected for temperature if appropriate within 0005 uF which is the sum of 03 for the standard and 0 02 for the Digibridge f Calculate the difference D1 as follows and retain it for future use D1 displayed measurement value of standard uF g Remove the 1 uF standard and connect the 4 terminal ratio type capacitance standard GR 1417 and the blocking capacitor 500 uF as follows Be sure that the dc blocking capacitor is fully discharged before connecting it Notice that only the left hand terminals of the standard are used RED TH end of blocking capacitor end of blocking cap CURRENT H terminal of capacitance standard RED amp WHITE PH POTENTIAL H terminal of capacitance standard BLACK IL CURRENT L terminal of capacitance standard BLACK amp WHITE PL POTENTIAL L terminal of capacitance standard BLACK amp GREEN G uninsulated terminal of capacitance standard h Set the dials on the capacitance standard thus CAPACITANCE 1 uF TEST FREQUENCY 1 kHz NOTE For detailed information on the GR 1417 4 Terminal Capacitance Standard refer to its instruction manual i Read the RLC display which should be close to the nominal value of the standard uF j Calculate the difference D2 as follows and retain it for future use D2 1 0000 uF
152. ct FUNCTION MEASURE DISPLAY DELTA DISPLAY VALUE Record the average value standard resistor as indicated on the Digibridge display For example For range 1 the reading might be 95 286 Kohm 5 Select FUNCTION ENTER Enter as a nominal value the reading noted above For example Range 1 press 9 5 2 8 6 SHIFT NOM VAL 6 Change the frequency to 20 kHz for range 1 100 KHz for ranges 2 3 4 For example Range 1 press 2 0 SHIFT FREQUENCY 7 Determine the delta reading as follows Select FUNCTION MEASURE DISPLAY DEITA Note the average reading For example Range may be 8849 8 Calculate the new K factor as follows del ta delta Kb Ka 1 Kf 100 where Kb Kfactor Ka typical correction factor refer to step b use the ohm values for all ranges delta change kHz value to higher frequency Kf is Frequency Factor Range 001579 for 20 kHz Range 2 3 4 03948 for 100 kHz SERVICE 5 59 For example Range 1 calculation 8849 8849 Kb erisso P E238 A2 hig eeina 001579 100 Kb 798 83 e Store the new correction factor for each range Select FUNCTION ENTER Select DISPLAY VALUE Select R Q until ohms LED is on Enter the new K factor as a nominal value For example Range I press J 7 9 8 1 8 3 SHIFT NOM VAL Store the K factor for each range For range I press 1 6 8 9 H 2
153. d again by selecting the ENTER function and then pressing these keys 1 2 SHIFT SPECIAL 7 Place DUT in test fixture Press START See note below The RLC display and units indicator show the principal measured value and the basic parameter thus identifying the DUT The QDR display shows the measured Q if the principal units are ohms or henries the measured D if they are farads NOTE Use either the Digibridge START button or the start bar on the 1689 9605 test fixture if properly connected In steps c d e f the parameters to be measured are specified by the user c To measure C and D of a Capacitor C Range 00001 pF to 99999 uF D range 0001 to 9999 Press Cs D Place capacitor in test fixture Press START The RLC display shows Cs series capacitance and units uF nF pF the QDR display shows D dissipation factor If NEG RLC is lit DUT is inductive d To measure C and R of a Capacitor C Range 00001 nF to 99999 uF R range 0001 ohm to 9999 kilohm Press Cs Rs Place capacitor in test fixture Press START The RLC display shows Cs series capacitance and units uF nF the QDR display shows Rs equivalent series resistance and units ohms kilohms If NEG RLC is lit DUT is inductive e To measure Land Q of an Inductor 1 range 00001 mI 1 to 99999 H Q range 0001 to 9999 Press Ls Q Place inductor in test fixture Press START The RLC display shows Ls series inductance and units
154. delta percent measurements RLC Unit Selection In limit entry procedures it is NOT necessary to select the range that the Digibridge will use in measuring Just be sure that the number you enter for nominal value is suited to the units and unit multiplier indicated on the display panel For example nominal values of 033 H and 33 mH are equivalent 3 8 7 Go No Go and Bin Assignment Results If comparison binning is enabled the GO NO GO indicators will provide the following information after each measurement GO The DUT passed in bin 1 2 3 13 NO GO The DUT failed in bin 0 QDR failure or bin 14 RLC failure If the display selection is BIN NO the bin assignment will be shown in the left display area 3 8 8 Bin Sum Information If comparison binning is enabled the Digibridge automatically keeps totals of the number of measurements assigned to each bin since power up or reset of the count to zero The sums can be called up onto the display or sent out over the IEEE 488 bus To make use of the bin sum feature use these keystroke sequences SHIFT BIN SUM 0 0 requests the sum for bin 0 SHIFT BIN SUM 0 1 requests the sum for bin 1 SHIFT BIN SUM 0 2 requests the sum for bin 2 etc Note sum appears at left bin number at right SHIFT BIN SUM LOCK sends the sums out via the IEEE 488 bus SHIFT BIN SUM 0 o 1 4 resets all sums to zero OPERATION 3
155. dge by logical combination of the EOT signal from the Digibridge AND the start next measurement signal from the handler Indexing on ACQ results in higher measurement rate than indexing on EOT b Program the Digibridge for binning as described in paragraph 3 8 The 1689 9620 High Speed Measurement Option includes the capability to sort automatically into all of the bins However with the 1658 9620 IEEE 488 Bus Handler Interface Card leave bins 9 through 13 closed because this handler interface lumps all five of them with bin 14 as explained in paragraph 3 8 1 NOTE Be sure to leave a non zero number as nominal value in the Digibridge memory to enable the GO NO GO indicators and the EOT signal c If measured values are not needed select BIN NO with the DISPLAY key This selection saves 6 to 10 ms for each measurement compared to other displays However if measured values are to be monitored visually select VALUE with the DISPLAY key or select the desired delta display If the secondary measurement is D or Q select DQ IN PPM or normal DQ The displays are useful for incidental monitoring of measurements while the handler automatically sorts the parts being processed d If the normal settling time is insufficient for transients or if a shorter delay is appropriate program the desired delay as explained in paragraph 3 5 3 e Select MEASURE function and TRIGGERED mode This mode together with suitable settling time or de
156. e Figure 1 2 If the panel held by these screws is blank leave it in place Reassembly note align board edges carefully with connector and guide that are inside of instrument while pushing interface option into position h After disconnecting the ribbon cable step d provide a convenient up side down support by reinstalling the top cover temporarily Turn the instrument bottom up i Remove 4 screws from the bottom shell one near each rubber foot Figure 5 1 Lift the instruction card and its retaining pan free Slide the bottom shell back or forward free of the main chassis Figure 5 6 Reassembly notes Be sure to enfold the pliable dirt seals at left and right sides of main chassis as you start to slide bottom shell onto main chassis use 4 screws 8 mm long Figure 5 8 Removal of the main board from the 1689 Digibridge The ribbon cable must be disconnected first Prior removal of the display board also is highly recommended Because the board is partially enclosed by the main chassis unusual care may be needed in removal These motions are suggested slide toward the rear tilt as shown and gently lift free j Remove 11 screws from positions shown in Figure 5 7 as A and B to free the main board Lift slightly and slide the board rearward so the keyboard can be lifted past the lip of the chassis Tilt the front edge up about 6 cm 2 in before lifting the whole board out Figure 5 8 shows how to tilt the main board to the b
157. e high speed interface option 1689 9620 installed NOTE This is a non catastrophic failure If you press the Cs D key the Digibridge can be operated as usual but measurement time will be typical of an instrument WITHOUT the high speed option 5 7 3 Battery and Fuse Replacement BATTERY If at power up there is a failure display of 222 4 xxxx and investigation shows the most likely cause to be low battery voltage you probably should replace battery Bl See power up self check in paragraph 3 13 and above in 5 7 see part description in Table 1 3 and or Section 6 The procedure is as follows a Remove the main board b Find Bl at the right of center see Figure 6 4 Cut its straps Observe correct polarity for replacement toward center of board SERVICE 5 33 WARNING Wear safety glasses while doing any work on the battery DO NOT short or apply voltage to the battery Dispose of the old one in accordance with local regulations for disposal of hazardous materials DO NOT incinerate c Usolder and remove the old battery with care not to overheat d Install the replacement and secure with straps like the originals or lacing cord to safeguard terminals from strain e Solder the terminals with care and DO NOT overheat f Perform complete calibration procedure Refer to paragraph 5 9 FUSE If at power up there is a failure display of 555 5 XXXX see Self Check paragraph 3 13 1 and Trouble Analysis paragraph
158. e inductance values are known to higher accuracy by special calibration or lesser because of long term drift the acceptable RLC extremes must be revised accordingly Based on Q of Type 1482 Standard Inductor as stated in GenRad documentation If inductor Q values are known more accurately the Q can be checked to tighter tolerances d Connect the banana plugs of the 1687 9600 extender cable to the I mH inductance standard 1482 E as follows Connect link between ground and LOW binding posts high leads red and red white to the LOW binding post and case low leads black and black white to the HIGH binding post guard lead black green hanging free NOTE These standard inductors are calibrated using a two terminal connection with the case tied to the LOW terminal e Press the Ls Q key to select inductance parameter Press the EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT key if necessary to select SERIES f Refer to Table 5 10 and verify that the RLC display is between the extremes listed for 1 mH SLOW measurement rate first line of table 5 46 SERVICE g Similarly with the inductance standards 1 mH 100 mH and 1 H as indicated in the LS column and with the indicated measurement rate verify that the RLC display is acceptable for each line of the table for ranges 4 3 2 and 1 REP RED WHITE P RESISTANCE STANDARD 1433 H DIGIGRIDGE WITH EXTENDER CABLE CAPACITANCE BLACK WHITE STONDARS
159. e large value components make no change in range However if you plan to measure small valued components select a range that uses a small unit multiplier e Enter the nominal value to be used by the Digibridge in the ratio calculations Notice that units and multiplier are displayed You can calculate what to enter as follows expected typical measurement nominal value to be entered corresponding ratio to be displayed f Enable ratio measurement measured value nominal as usual NOTE if you want the other ratio nominal measured value instead then the calculation in step e has to be the product expected meas X corresponding ratio g Select MEASURE function and proceed with measurements Display selections VALUE delta and deltaRLC will all display the ratio BIN NO will display the bin assignment With a few strokes of the DISPLAY key it is easy to obtain both ratio and bin number for each DUT even without using the handler or IEEE 488 interfaces Example 1 To sort 200 mF capacitors in bins of 5 10 and 20 Displays to be ratios that an be interpreted as Cp values in mF and dissipation factor D a Select PARALLEL equivalent circuit and ENTER function Press Cp D Hold range 4 as follows 4 SHIFT SPECIAL 1 b Set up nominal ratio to look like 200 mF 2 0 0 SHIFT NOM VAL 3 56 OPERA TIO c Set up symmetrical bins as stated above
160. e of failure displays includes comments on some of the self check routines significance of the displays and some suggestions for appropriate service procedures GENERAL NOTES For the most rigorous self rheck in servicing repeat the power up self check several times at least once with a short circuit as DUT in the test fixture and once with the test fixture empty open circuit A normally functional Digibridge should pass both ways Keen observation of the fleeting displays associated with the tests that pass before the one that fails are sometimes useful Pressing any key such as SHIFT will halt the self test routine and hold the display until the key is released Look for trends or tests that pass only marginally SELF CHECK FAILURE DISPLAYS 888888888 RAM read write exercise failure Digibridge hangs up PROCEDURE Switch POWER OFF and ON to clear hangup and repeat self check Check RAM circuitry and data and address buses 77777 XXXX Detector test failure Digibridge hangs up PROCEDURE Switch POWER OFF and ON to clear hangup and repeat self check He sure that the EXTERNAL BIAS switch is OFF Use scope to check waveforms on the main board as indicated below and in the accompanying figure 5 30 SERVICE 77777 7777 DBIG U27 pin 2 is stuck low Integration failure PROCEDURE check integrator output U64 pin 7 Its acquisition i e integration slope downward should cross the level of 5 1 V then BIG L U64 pin 14
161. e previous measuredvalue display was 12 345 99 984 or 99 999 but the display is rounded off to 099 98 nF if the previous measuredvalue display was 100 02 or 1234 5 nF Hysteresis is provided on both measured value displays RLC and QDR Blanks in Measured Value Displays If a measurement exceeds the capability of the display 99999 for RLC display 9999 for QDR the display is blank If a measurement is less than 1 right hand digit the display is all zeros If any leading zero before the decimal point must occupy a position in the display that zero is blanked out See below for programmed selection of digit blanking 3 3 5 D Q in PPM The Digibridge can easily be programmed to display the secondary test result when it it either D or Q in parts per million To choose this display press SHIFT DQ in PPM so that the DQ IN PPM indicator is lit To disable this option repeat the same keystrokes so that the indicator is NOT lit Units of D and Q in PPM are dimensionless and are expressed as a decimal ratio with the multiplier of 1 000 000 understood To obtain D or Q in percent from the DQ in PPM display place a decimal point four places to the left of its understood position at the right hand end of the display 3 20 OPERATION For example a DQ in PPM display of D 120 ppm is equivalent to 0 012 3 3 6 Digit Blanking a Special Function If you want to truncate the measured value displays you can deliberately blank ou
162. e screw apiece and slide the base off Remove the two hex socket head screws near the rear along the front to back midline of the circuit board top side use hexagonal wrench 2 38 mm 094 in Remove the two screws and their washers below the right and left ends of the test fixture guide block taking care not to lose the spring under the START bar which will become free Carefully remove the guide block assembly not available as a replacement part which includes the START bar and which is tethered to the circuit board by a ground wire Reassembly note See above c Clean and check the 4 contact strips Use a card wet with isopropyl alcohol for cleaning Hold the board at an angle so that any drip falls away from the circuits d Ifnecessary for better access for cleaning remove 2 front contacts P IN 1689 1015 Use a hexagonal wrench 2 38 mm 094 in to remove 2 screws per contact Reassembly note gap between contacts should not exceed 0 24 mm 009 in or the thickness of 3 layers of typing paper and contacts must press against each other insulated by tiny dielectric spacers attached near each end of slot so that a wire of 0 64 mm diameter AWG 22 025 in can be withdrawn from between them with a force of 1 minimum to 2 maximum newtons 100 to 200 grams Tighten the hex drive screws with a torque of 1 3 to 1 4 newton meters 12 in lb CAUTION Because of alignment difficulty in reassembly DO NOT use the next step un
163. e the current nominal value depress the NOM VALUE key while the ENTER indicator is lit To see the limits in any particular bin or to verify that it has been closed depress SHIFT BIN NO and the desired number similarly Displays selected in this way are limited by the units that are shown on the panel For example if the bin 3 limits are 162 and 198 nF but the display units are pF when you press BIN No 0 3 the display will go blank Select either nF or uF instead of pF to obtain a display of these limits However any nominal values previous to the current one are lost and cannot be displayed unless entered again Bin limits are not lost until replaced by new entries in the particular bin but they are normally lost when POWER is switched OFF To prevent loss lock the keyboard see paragraph 3 9 For comments on how bin sorting information is displayed see paragraph 3 3 3 3 8 5 Examples of Limit Entry Nested Limit s To enter a set of nested limits operate the keyboard as described below for the example of inductors having Q gt 21 Ls 33 mH 0 35 1 5 7 9 a With FUNCTION key select ENTER b With EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT key select SERIES c With parameter key Ls Q select RLC units mH d Enter Q limit thus 2 1 SHIFT BIN No 0 0 e Enter nominal RLC value 3 3 SHIFT NOM VALUE f Set bin 1 limits 3 5 SHIFT BIN No 0 1 g Set bin 2 limit
164. ead the left hand display which is the number of measurements made in 60 seconds 5 accuracy of timing is assumed Use this number as x in the following formula retain these results Note the right hand display should be 1 the bin num ber being reported Measurement time T 60 000 milliseconds x For example if x 58 then T 1034 ms 5 e Clear all bin sum registers as follows Note the Digibridge should confirm the clearing action by displaying 0 in the left hand display area Press SHIFT BIN SUM 0 0 1 4 f Press MEASURE RATE key to select MEDIUM rate Repeat the procedure of steps c d e as summarized below for this rate Time the interval between the next two keystrokes Press FUNCTION key to select MEASURE function Wait 60 seconds Press FUNCTION key to select ENTER function Press SHIFT BIN SUM 0 1 Read the left hand display the number of measurements made in 60 s Use this number as x in the following formula T 60 000 milliseconds x For example if x 250 then T 240 ms 5 Clear bin sum registers by pressing SHIFT BIN SUM 0 0 1 4 g Press MEASURE RATE key to select FAST rate Repeat the procedure of steps c d e as summarized below for this rate Time the interval between the next two keystrokes Press FUNCTION key to select MEASURE function Wait 60 seconds Press FUNCTION key to select ENTER function Press SHI
165. echnical Assistance Center if additional help is needed see last page U S A Sales 800 253 1230 Service 978 461 2100 5 4 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION 5 4 1 General This procedure is recommended for verification that the Digibridge is performing normally No other check is generally necessary because this procedure checks operation of nearly all of the circuitry If the Digibridge passes this performance verification it is safe to assume that the instrument is functional However to insure accuracy refer to paragraph 5 8 Accuracy Verification All tests are done at 1 kHz 1 volt NOT CONSTANT and in SLOW measure rate so that basic bridge accuracy is realized The accuracy of each verification is therefore 02 plus the tolerance of the verifying DUT which is discussed below Table 5 1 lists the necessary resistors capacitors and inductors which are inexpensive and readily obtained The most accurate ones available should be used tolerances listed are the best commonly catalogued There are no calibrations and only one adjustment that could require resetting and the internal standards are very stable This procedure checks at least one point on each of the four measurement ranges SERVICE 5 3 Table 5 1 COMPONENTS RECOMMENDED FOR PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION Component Type MIL R 1C509C Styie RN60 Resistors Metal Film Capacitors Nominal Valve 49 9 ohms 499 ohms 4 99 kilohms 49 9 kilohms 499 kilohms
166. eck for a malfunction in the circuits that supply the test signal Ih U32 U31 U14 U13 U44 back to U4 Check the input signals and the gain through instrumentation amplifier U61 However if XXXX is greater than 1 000 check the test voltage and source resistance selector circuits U32 controlled by U27 pins 6 7 check filter selector U13 controlled by U27 pins 12 13 as well as pins 14 15 via U21 and U38 Also check for RAWSINE on D A converter U44 pin 15 5554 XXXX High voltage 1 275 V range 4 Check test voltage selector circuit and instrumentation amplifier 555 3 XXXX High voltage 1 275 V range 3 Check signal at Ih terminal with test fixture short circuited Check signal at output of transconductance amplifier circuit U58 pin 8 with test fixture short circuited 555 2 XXXX High voltage 1 275 V range 2 See previous suggestion 555 1 XXXX High voltage 1 275 V range 1 See previous suggestion 444 E XXXX Test frequency and waveform check failure the Digibridge will loop automatically repeating the test and updating the display The digit E indicates the frequency used in the test See below High voltage test signal is used on range 4 COMMENT Measurement summing of squares and normalization are exactly as described for 555 D XXXX Also the failure limits for XXXX are the same 0 250 and 1 000 except for tests 1 and 2 which have the limits 0 125 and 1 000 ANALYSIS PROCEDURE check for the g
167. eck on whether its loss is similar to the loss of the typical DUT If it is similar for similar value of C at the same frequency the R value is similar also However if its D is much higher the value of amp is higher and Rp is lower in approximate proportion to D 3 22 OPERATION 3 4 PRINCIPAL TEST CONDITIONS 3 4 1 Test Frequency Power up frequency is 1 kHz unless the keyboard has been locked with some other choice There are 503 available frequencies as detailed below Selection To select the test frequency simply key in the desired frequency as follows and the Digibridge will automatically obtain the nearest available one a Select ENTER with the FUNCTION key b Enter the desired frequency in kilohertz and press SHIFT FREQUENCY in sequence as follows For example to select 500 Hz press 5 2 SHIFT FREQUENCY Up to 6 digits and decimal point are valid in entry of desired frequency For another example if the desired frequency is 2300 Hz key in 2 3 SHIFT FREQUENCY The actual frequency obtained appears immediately in the left RLC display area In the example of desired frequency 2300 Hz the display is 2 3077 The actual frequency obtained is always the closest one of the 503 available frequencies which can be calculated from the following formulas where n is always an integer in the range indicated 3 kHz C n where n range is 13 250 freq 012000 to 0 23077 kHz 60 kHz
168. ecommended test fixture cable and their connections are as follows Refer to paragraphs 1 4 and 3 2 for more information about accessories On 1689M Cable 1689 9602 On 1689 9605 Test Fixture IL black band I PL black amp white P PH red amp white P IH red band I COMMENT It is important that the n and PL leads connect to the same end of the DUT and that PH and IH connect to the other end Also for the 1689 and 1689M Digibridges connecting IL PL to the testfixture connectors labeled and IH PH to assures that the test fixture s and labels agree with the bias polarity NOTE In the cable s color code RED is associated with hot leads which have dc voltage negative with respect to ground when bias is used 2 6 BIAS VOLTAGE FOR THE DUT 2 6 1 Internal Bias No external connections are required for the internal 2 volt bias The circuit is self contained 2 6 2 External Bias External bias can be provided by connecting a suitable current limited floating dc voltage source as follows Be sure that the voltage is never more than 60 V max A current limiting voltage supply is recommended set the limit at 200 mA max Be sure that the bias supply is floating DO NOT connect either lead to ground A well filtered supply is recommended Bias supply hum can affect some measurements particularly if test frequency is the power frequency Generally the external circuit must include switching for both application of
169. ed option NOTE The 1689 Digibridge is somewhat slower than the 1689M because of a difference in CPU clock rate 1689 Digibridge The minimum measurement time is about 33 ms about 30 measurements per second The corresponding conditions are measure rate fast IT factor set to 0 25 integration time factor paragraph 3 5 5 test frequency 10 to 100 kHz display selection bin no measure mode continuous which eliminates the settling time that is normal with triggered mode 1689 Digibridge with high speed measurement option no data output via IEEE 488 bus For test frequency 1 kHz the minimum is about 40 ms 25 meas per second For best accuracy power up conditions the time is about 970 ms 1 meas second If you do NOT have the high speed option minimum is about 52 ms 19 meas sec The corresponding conditions are measure rate fast IT factor set to 0 25 integration time factor paragraph 3 5 5 test frequency 10 to 100 kHz display selection bin no measure mode continuous which eliminates the settling time that is normal with triggered mode 1689 Digibridge without high speed measurement option no data output via IEEE 488 bus For test frequency 1 kHz the minimum is about 59 ms 17 measurements per second In general without the high speed option each measurement cycle is about 19 to 38 ms longer than it would be WITH the high speed option Surprisingly Long Times Please be aware of the long time peri
170. egration cycles A pause for synchronization varies depending on timing relationships among the START signal length of settling time or programmed delay length of the previous integration deintegration cycle and the Digibridge clocks particularly FCOUNT shown on block diagram This pause can be as much as one test frequency period for high frequencies or up to 1 32 of the test frequency period for low frequencies The integration sampling gate or capacitor charging time of the dual slope integrator is the number of full periods of the test frequency whose sum is closest to 4 ms x integration time factor for FAST closest to but not over 16 7 ms x integration time factor for MEDIUM or closest to but not over 100 ms for SLOW measurement rate The integration time factor is normally 10 but can be programmed between 0 25 and 6 The return deintegration time depends on the dc voltage being converted and whether BIG L has 4 6 THEORY been triggered see above therefore this time requirement varies in a complex manner Data acquisition includes several complete dual slope conversion cycles with the reference sine wave at 3 or 4 different phases exactly 90 degrees apart as follows For FAST and MEDIUM rates 6 cycles 2 each with reference phases of 0 90 and 180 For FAST and MEDIUM rates if quick acquisition special function is enabled 5 cycles For SLOW measurement rate 8 cycles 2 each with ref phases of 0 90 180 and
171. ement 2 7 3 Timing Figure 2 3 Refer to the accompanying figure for timing guidelines Notice that START must have a duration of 1 us minimum in each state high and low If START is provided by a mechanical switch without debounce circuitry the Digibridge will make many false starts if START does not settle down low within the default settling time or the programmed delay time after the first transition to high the measurement time may increase substantially For an explanation of settling and delay time refer to paragraph 3 5 3 INSTALLATION 2 7 Measurement starts at time d which is essentially the same as time b or c measurement is completed at g The START signals are expanded for clarity Interval a e during which the DUT must remain conllected for data acquisition is considerably shorter than the total measurement time a g The DUT can be changed after e indexing on ACQ to save time or after g indexing on EOT for a simpler test setup as explained below After the calculation interval e f measurement results are available for sorting i e one of the BIN lines goes low A few micro seconds later EOT goes low can be used to set a latch holding the bin assignment ACQ OVER the selected BIN line and EOT then stay low until the next start command The time required for measurement depends on whether you have the high speed measurement option on test conditions programmable values and operating selections Inter
172. en bias is applied they carry dc negative voltage with respect to ground 3 12 OPERATION d If dc bias is used see paragraph 3 7 notice that the faces of the tweezers are labeled and to indicate bias polarity 3 2 9 The 1689 9606 Kelvin Clip Cable The 1689 9606 Kelvin Clip Cable provides a means for easily making four terminal Kelvin connections to passive components This cable is especially useful for testing low impedance devices or devices with large nonstandard terminations such as electrolytic capacitors or inductors Install Kelvin Clips as follows a Remove any adaptors cables etc if present from the DUT port of the instrument b Connect the BNC cables of the Kelvin Clips assembly to the Digibridge as indicated in Table 3 1 Note that red designates leads that may be hot When bias is applied they carry dc negative voltage with respect to ground c If de bias is used see paragraph 3 7 notice that the faces of the Kelvin Clips are labeled and to indicate bias polarity NOTE Instructions supplied with the 1689 9606 may differ from Table 3 1 It is important to be aware that if DC BIAS is used that it is a negative voltage and that it is applied to the ill lead from the instrument 3 3 MEASUREMENT PARAMETERS RESULTS DISPLAYS AND OUTPUTS 3 3 1 Parameters R Q L Q C D C R Automatic Selection The Digibridge as powered up provides you with automatic selection of parameters unle
173. eneration of the proper frequency indicated in code by failure display see below by U5 U6 U7 U8 U20 U17 U18 U19 U22 Check filter circuitry in signal source U13 and detector U62 U40 U41 Operation can usually be enabled in spite of failure messages 444 1 XXXX or 444 2 XXXX by pressing the START button 444 6 XXXX 0118 kHz 444 5 XXXX 0968 kHz 444 4 XXXX 0 480 kHz 444 3 XXXX 1 200 kHz 444 2 XXXX 6 000 kHz 444 1 XXXX 6 0606 kHz 5 32 SERVICE 33333 XXXX PROM data checksum failure If the checksum XXXX is not 0000 check all digital circuitry starting with the 6502 microprocessor U30 Any error on the address or data bus could cause a checksum error check ROM U35 check RAM U36 U34 check all of the PIAs U3 U25 U26 U27 Look for address or data lines stuck at about 2 V or stuck low 222 F XXXX Calibration constants check failure Digibridge hangs up but will respond to keyboard inputs The digit F is the range in question COMMENT Each check consists of a comparison between the stored calibration data for the range and the normal expected values The calibration can be expressed essentially as the conductance of the internal standard resistor The Digibridge normalizes this conductance by dividing it by the nominal conductance of the standard and displays the result XXXX which should be very close to 1 000 See table giving source resistance for each range in paragraph 3 4 2 If xx xx is less than
174. erify that the DUT has stabilized Use the stable result f In the TRIGGERED measure mode each measurement cycle includes the normal settling time 7 to 12 ms for 1 kHz measurements or a programmed delay See paragraph 3 5 3 Remeasure enough DUTs to be sure that they are stabilized in the first measurement so that any subsequent differences are well within the error permitted by your needs If not program in a longer delay YDUD A TION 2 A amp NOTE There are two effects to be aware of in watching for stabilization of the DUT voltage and capacitance Besides charging to a final voltage there is also the stabilization of capacitance value itself For example some aluminum electrolytic capacitors respond slowly to a change in applied voltage therefore the DUT capacitance can be settling long after the voltage is essentially stable Normally the delay for internal bias measurements should be about Delay 10 Rstd Cx seconds If the internal bias is being switched off during each change of DUT by remote control perhaps this delay should be 1 second larger 1 10 Rstd Cx NOTE Rstd is 102400 for range 1 6400 for range 2 400 for range 3 25 for range 4 See table in paragraph 3 4 2 Cx is the capacitance of the DUT in farads For example measuring 2000 pF at kHz range 1 this delay time should be about 10 102 400 000 000 002 approx 002 seconds Normal settling time is adequate g After biased measurement
175. erminal Kelvin connections are made to the device under test The instrument ground is guard for three terminal measurements Keyboard Lock A combination of keyboard entries makes the keyboard inactive Special Functions Several special features may bl selected These include Direct range setting Range extension Choice of integration time Blanking of lesser digits Signal Reversal to reduce hum pickup effects Selection of the median value of three measurements A routine that reduces transient delays when bias is applied Automatic parameter selection Quick acquisition routine IEEE 488 Bus Handler Interface Card 1658 9620 IEEE 488 Bus J2 on rear panel with option All front panel functions are programmable from the bus All RLC DQ and bin data are available as output to the bus Output data format ASCII or Binary The following functions per IEEE 488 have been implemented AHI Acceptor Handshake Listener SHI Source Handshake Talker T5 Talker with normal and talk only modes for systems without a controller switch selectable on rear panel L4 Listener SRI Service Request to request service when measurement is complete and the instrument is not addressed to talk RL2 Remote Local no local lockout no return to local switch PPO No par all e 1 poll OCI Device clear DTI Device Trigger to start measurement CO No controller functions Handler Connections JI rear panel with option 1 Outpu
176. ero 00033 of meas value Xdut and Rsdut represent the DUT s series reactance and resistance respectively Ald error is significant only for extension beyond normal DUT interface where the system software applies compensation 3 6 8 Use of Signal Reversing Special Function for Tests at Power Frequencies The special signal reversing function is primarily for use whenever the test frequency is 60 or 120 Hz if your power frequency is 60 Hz or whenever it is 50 or 100 Hz if your power frequency is 50 Hz However it is also useful whenever the test frequency is equal to or very close to the frequency of any constant external signal that can be coupled to the low terminal s of the DUT IL and PL 3 44 OPERATION If this disturbance is strong enough it can degrade the accuracy of normal measurements However if the disturbance is not so very strong that the Digibridge sensing circuits are overdriven then signal reversing will typically restore specified accuracy This special function enables a test routine in which the phase of the test signal is periodically reversed and the Digibridge senses both phases additively However the constant phase disturbance component of the sensed signal is canceled by subtraction This capability is a special function To enable it press the following keys 1 2 SHIFT SPECLAL 3 To disable signal reversing for fastest measurements press 0 2 SHIFT SPECLAL 3 3 7 BIAS FOR
177. ersa To relocate this bracket from front to rear a Disconnect the power cord Remove the bail from the front feet by bending it temporarily It is springy enough to resume its former shape b Remove the access panel from the bottom of the instrument Note this panel is held by ten screws and covers a major part of the bottom area c Loosen generously but do NOT remove the two right side screws that fasten the front panel assembly into the chassis Stand the instrument on its right side Remove the two Jeft side screws that are opposite to the ones just loosened Now the front panel assembly can be tipped away from the instrument an inch or two as required in the next step Note the display and keyboard cables remain connected 5 22 SERVICE d Remove the blank bracket 2 screws from the rear BNC connector position e Remove the two screws that fasten the BNC connector bracket to the main chassis below the front panel f Holding the front panel assembly tipped away from the instrument slightly snake the BNC connector bracket between the main board and the nearby part of the chassis until free from its front position Return the front panel assembly to its normal position and secure it with its two screws Refer to Figure 5 12 g Snake the BNC connector bracket carefully into the rear position where the blank bracket was Handle the shielded cable assembly with care and be sure that it is dressed neatly with a minimum of twi
178. erted components at a distance from the Digibridge Other useful accessories are offered Refer to Tables 1 3 1 4 and inquire at the nearest Digibridge Technical Support Center Refer to the back of this manual NOTE The GenRad line of Digibridge test fixtures adaptors and other accessories does continue to be improved and expanded Inquire periodically at your local GenRad sales office for the latest information 1 10 INTRODUCTION Table 1 3 ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS FOR 1689 DIGIBRIDGE Quantity Description Part Number 1 supplied Power cord 200 cm 6 5 ft long 3 wire AWG No 18 4200 0300 with molded connector bodies One end with Belden SPH 386 socket fits instrument Other end conforms to ANSI standard C73 11 1966 125 V max 2 supplied Test fixture adaptors for axial lead parts 1657 5995 Replacements available set of 4 adaptors 1 supplied Bias cable with built in fuse to connect external 1658 2450 bias supply and switching circuit 1 recornnended High speed measurement and IEEE 488 handl er 1689 9620 interface option retrofit plug in OR recornnended IEEE 488 handler interface option retrofit plug in 1658 9620 1 recornnended Tweezers for handl ing and measuring chip components 1689 9603 with terminals on opposite aces BNC connectors 127 cm 50 inch cable Use with adaptor 1689 9601 recornnended Kelvin CI ip Cable or measuring large low 1689 9606 impedance components Use with adaptor 1689 9601
179. esent in data The full eight bytes are sent only if RLC QDR and Bin information is needed i e only if status bits 2 1 0 are logic 111 Otherwise the data word is shortened as follows If QDR data are NOT needed the data format uses 5 bytes as follows If both QDR and BIN data are not needed the OTHER byte is omitted Name STATUS RLC e RLC mantissa OTHER Byte Number byte 1 byte 2 byte 3 byte 4 byte 5 If RLC data are NOT needed the data format uses 5 bytes as follows If both RLC and BIN data are not needed the OTHER byte is omitted Name STATUS IQR e QDR mantissa lOTHER Byte Number byte 1 byte 2 byte 3 byte 4 byte 5 If only BIN data are needed the data format uses only 2 bytes as follows If RLC QDR and BIN data are all NOT needed no data output occurs Names STATUS OTHER Byte Number byte 1 byte 2 The RLCe byte except for bit 7 conveys the RLC exponent 2s complement The RLC mantissa bytes all 16 bits convey the RLC mantissa base 2 The QDR e byte except for bit 7 conveys the QDR exponent 2s complement The QDR mantissa bytes all 16 bits convey the QDR mantissa base 2 The binary exponent and mantissa define a binary floating point number as follows exponent Sign 2 mantissa 3 78 OPERATION Table 3 19 TRUTH TABLE OF COMPACTED BINARY FORMAT FOR OUTPUT DATA Name STATUS RLC e JRLC mantissa QDR e QDR mantissa OTHER Byte Number
180. est conditions limit entry and bin sorting 9 Keyboard Group of keys Manual programming and control Refer to indicators and items 10 through 22 for more detai I 2 other switches 10 Prograrmling Set of 16 keys Multipurpose input of programning keys labeled white and instructions selections and data yellow for 1689 Dual purposes of keys are indicated by black and gray for color White or black labels apply norm 1689M ally Yellow or gray labels apply immed iately after you press and release the SHIFT key 11 thru 14 Each key has Make selection by pressing key repeatedly 20 and 22 associated LED unti I the desired condition is indicated See below indicators at right of the key 11 FUNCTION key Indicators MEASURE Selection of function MEASURE enables and ENTER measurements and some routines that cannot be done in ENTER such as zero calibrations keyboard lock or unlock and part of full recalibration ENTER enables programming of all special functions frequency voltage averaging delay nominal value and binning instructions Either function allows selection of hold range constant voltage DQ in ppm internal bias parameter equivalent circuit measure mode measure rate and dis play 12 DISPLAY key Indicators VALUE Selection of displays for MEASURE function delta BIN NO refer to items 1 2 and 4 for description of displays Two indicators are Lit simultaneously for deltaRLC This key has no effect on ENTER
181. est fixture contacts 4 required included on 1689 4702 board each 1689 1015 24655 1689 1015 7 Card Pan 1658 8200 24655 1658 8200 8 Instruction card 1689 0110 24655 1689 0110 REAR Figure 6 2 Item Description GenRad Part Mftr Mftr Part No 1 Foot 4 required each 5260 2051 24655 5260 2051 2 Bottom shell card pan not shown 1657 8000 24655 1657 8000 3 High speed meas interface option shown Blank plate used if no option present 1658 8040 24655 1658 8040 4 Power connector J101 4240 0250 82389 EAC 302 5 Fuse extractor post Fl 5650 0100 75915 342 004 6 Line voltage switch S2 7910 0832 82389 11A 1266 7 Cover over transistor Ul 1657 8120 24655 1657 8120 MECHANICAL PARTS LIST FOR 1689 DIGIBRIDGE FRONT Figure 6 1 PARTS LISTS AND DIAGRAMS 6 3 Figure 6 1 A The 1689M front view showing replaceable mechanical parts 4 6 3 5 2 7 HIDDEN TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BOTTOM REFER SERVICING 77 QuA FIED OF RSONNEL A E 90 125V 180 250V 50 60 He BO WATTS MAK X CAUTION To prevent equeomert cenene replace fuse Dun Calle Ordy weh terne style fu catus 25ON and 270A HIDDEN Figure 6 2 A The 1689M rear view showing replaceable mechanical parts 6 4 PARTS LISTS AND DIAGRAMS MECHANICAL PARTS LIST FOR 1689M FRONT Figure 6 1A Item Description GenRad Part Mftr Mftr Part No 1 Cover 1689 8304 24655 1689 8304 2 Display window 1689 8308 24655 1689 8308 3 Bezel plastic fron
182. est position for removal Reassembly note return washers to original positions A screws are 6 mm long B screws are 8 mm long k To remove the keyboard module remove the 4 screws at E Figure 5 7 and carefully pull the module directly away from the main board Reassembly note be very careful not to bend pins when plugging the keyboard module connectors into their main board sockets use 4 screws 6 mm long SERVICE 5 17 1 For access to the test fixture contacts remove the dross tray 1657 7700 the plastic dirt catcher by spreading it slightly and lifting it off Then remove the guide block assembly 1689 2000 includes dross tray by removing 2 screws and associated washers spacers and shield plate on bottom of main board see C Figure 5 7 and 2 test fixture center shield screws use hexagonal wrench 2 38 mm 094 in from top of the main board See also Figure 5 9 Reassembly note C screws are 13 mm long Position the guide block assembly for smooth entry of a radial lead DUT before tightening screws If an extension cable is available its paddle boards can be used for a centering jig Otherwise verify by eye looking directly down on the board through the slots in the guide block to the contact gaps Figure 5 9 Removal of the shield from below the test fixture of the 1689 Digibridge Notice the use of a personnel grounding strap 5 5 2 Disassembly of 1689M Digibridge Figures 5 10 through 5 12 Use the following proced
183. f an inductor L range 00001 mH to 99999 H Q range 0001 to 9999 Press Ls Q Place inductor in test fixture PressSTART The RLC display shows Ls series inductance anc units mH H the QDR display shows Q quality factor If NEG RLC is lit DUT is capacitive e To measure R and Q of a Resistor R range 00001 2 to 99999 kN Q range 0001 to 9999 Press Rs Q Piace resistor in test fixture Press START The RLC display shows Rs series resistance and units Q KN the QDR display shows Q quality factor If NEG QDR is lit DUT is capacitive if dark DUT is inductive f Special Displays When a nominal value and bin limits have been programmed see Limit Entry below these displays can be selected with the DISPLAY key A96 shows the difference of measured RLC from nominal in percent of nominal value VALUE and A96 both lit shows the difference from nominal in measurement units uF mH etc BIN NO shows the assigned bin number g Other Parameters Rates Modes To measure Cp Rp Cp D Lp Q or Rp Q press EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT to select PARALLEL To measure faster press MEASURE RATE to select MEDIUM or FAST To measure continuously press MEASURE MODE to select CONT 1 14 INTRODUCTION 5 PROGRAMMABLE TEST CONDITIONS Accessible via ENTER function a Press FUNCTION key to select ENTER function b Test frequency normally 1 kHz can be programmed from 012 kHz to 100 kHz For 400 Hz press 4
184. f one range d Check as follows that the Digibridge operates properly with the recalibration Select CONTINUOUS with the MEASURE MODE key The Digibridge should measure the calibration resistor like any ordinary resistor and display its Rand Q ppm values The Q display can be expected to jump a bit Precision and repeatability are in the order of 5 ppm Also the NO GO indicator will probably be lit this is normal e Disconnect the calibration resistor from the test fixture 5 9 5 Recalibration for Range 2 a Connect the 5 97 kilohm calibration resistor to the Digibridge test fixture b Enter the known parameters of the calibration resistor as in the following example based on the values R 5 9581 kilohms and Q 22 ppm NOTES The Digibridge will accept six digits for R even though only five will be displayed The Q is associated with bin 00 and its value must be preceded with if the known Q is negative Select ENTER with FUNCTION key and verify that MEASURE MODE is CONT Press 2 SHIFT SPECIAL 1 Press 5 9 5 8 1 2 ISHIFT NOM VALUE NOTE the calibration resistance value should appear in the left display The DQ in PPM indicator must be lit Press 2 2 SHIFT BIN NO 0 0 NOTE the calibration Q value should appear in the right hand display c Enable and execute the recalibration for this range as follows The following keystrokes are the same for any range Select MEAS
185. function displays 13 MEASURE RATE Indicators SLOW Selection of measurernent speed as key MED FAST indicated Spee dis also affectcd by many other choices described in paragraph 33 Use SLOW for bette r accurac y use FAST for speed 1 6 INTRODUCTION Table 1 1 continued FRONT OONTROLS AND INDICATORS Fig 1 2 Ref No Name Description Function 14 MEASURE MODE Indicators CONT Mode selection CONT continuously key TRIGGERED repeating measurements TRIGGERED single measurement initiated by START button or input signal 15 BIAS ON LED indicator Indicates that internal bias is on or the indi cator EXTERNAL BIAS swi tch is ON 16 EXTERNAL BIAS Slide switch 2 To connect and disconnect the external bias switch positions ON circuit rear connector cable supplied OFF 17 GO NO GO Pair of LED GO means measured value is acceptable indicators indicators based on the limits previously stored See paragraph 3 8 NO GO means RLC or QDR value or both are unacceptable Indicator remains lighted during next measurernent 18 START button Pushbutton switch Starts measurement sequence aborting any measurernent that may be in process Normally used in TRIGGERED measure mode 19 REMOTE OONTROL LED indicator Indicates when remote control is indicator established by external command Functions only if an interface option is installed 20 EQUIVALENT Indicators SERIES Selection of equivalent circuit Measured CIRCUIT key and PARALLEL
186. h the high speed measurement option is functioning properly Refer to Table 5 3 for typical values Table 5 3 EXAMPLES OF MEASUREMENT TIME REDUCTION BY HIGH SPEED OPTION Without H S Option With H S Option Norma Range Example steps dfgh Example step j T Difference of T Differ Rate x T x T of Example ences 1689 Digibridge SLOW 60 1000 ms 62 970 ms 30 ms 38 50 ms MEDIUM 252 238 ms 300 200 ms 38 ms 38 20 ms FAST 510 118 ms 750 80 ms 38 ms 38 10 ms Max imum 1017 59 ms 1500 40 ms 19 ms 19 6 ms 2 1689M Digibridge SLOW 62 968 ms 63 952 ms 16 ms 24 50 ms MEDIUM 294 204 ms 333 180 ms 24 ms 24 20 ms FAST 674 89 ms 923 65 ms 24 ms 24 10 ms Max imum 1364 44 ms 1875 32 ms 12 ms 12 6 ms 5 10 SERVICE SAEDDIS BNNOSuad 031 OL ONNANSIS 3134 OLX XO M3 03 AON LON OS DONS 21612373 1N3 3u4 OF Figure 5 1 Rear and bottom view of the 1689 Digibridge showing screw locations for disassembly top cover screws 1 and 6 bottom shell screws 2 3 4 5 5 5 DISASSEMBLY AND ACCESS WARNING If disassembly or servicing is necessary it should be performed only by qualified personnel familiar with the electrical shock hazards inherent to the high voltage circuits inside the cabinet Be sure that you never Short or apply voltage to the battery Bi See para 5 7 3 CAUTION Observe precautions against damage by static elec
187. h 3 5 9 measurement time is given for the condition that the quick acquisition special function is NOT selected So accuracy is as specified See front of manual 1689M Digibridge The minimum measurement time is about 22 ms about 45 measurements per second The corresponding conditions are measure rate fast IT factor set to 0 25 integration time factor paragraph 3 5 5 test frequency 10 to 100 kHz display selection bin no measure mode continuous which eliminates the settling time that is normal with triggered mode 1689M Digibridge with high speed measurement option no data output via IEEE 488 bus 3 26 OPERATION For test frequency 1 kHz the minimum is about 32 ms 31 meas per second For best accuracy power up conditions the time is about 950 ms 1 meas second If you do NOT have the high speed option minimum is about 34 ms 30 meas sec The corresponding conditions are measure rate fast IT factor set to 0 25 integration time factor paragraph 3 5 5 test frequency 10 to 100 kHz display selection bin no measure mode continuous which eliminates the settling time that is normal with triggered mode 1689M Digibridge without high speed measurement option no data output via IEEE 488 bus For test frequency 1 kHz the minimum is about 44 ms 23 measurements per second In general without the high speed option each measurement cycle is about 12 to 24 ms longer than it would be WITH the high spe
188. have to be assigned except in the case of a single talker only with one or more listeners always listening The Standard sets ground rules for these codes and addresses In this instrument codes for input and output data have been chosen in accordance with the rules The address for both talker and listener functions is user selectable as explained below Instrument Program Commands The set of commands used in remote programming is an input data code to which the instrument will respond as a talker listener after being set to a remote code and addressed to listen to device dependent command strings The set includes all of the keyboard functions except switching external bias ON OFF and full recalibration which are not remotely programmable Refer to paragraph 3 12 3 for a table of the commands used in programming Address The initial setting of address provided by the factory is binary 00011 Consequently the talk address command MTA is C in ASCII code and similarly the listen address command MLA is If a different address pair is desired set it manually using the following procedure WARNING Because of shock hazard and presence of electronic devices subject to damage by static electricity conveyed by hands or tools disassembly is strictly a service procedure a Take the Digibridge to a qualified electronic technician who has the necessary equipment for minor disassembly and adjustment Have the electroni
189. he known Q is negative Select ENTER with FUNCTION key and CONTINUOUS with MEASURE MODE key Press 4 2 SHIFT SPECIAL 1 Press 2 4 8 I 9 5 S SHIFT INOM VALUE NOTE the calibration resistance value should appear in the left display The DQ in PPM indicator must be lit Press 1 5 2 SHIFT BIN NO 0 0 SERVICE 5 53 NOTE The calibration Q value should appear in the right hand display NOTE The calibration Q value should appear in the right hand display c Enable and execute the recalibration for this range as follows The following keystrokes are the same for any range Select MEASURE with the FUNCTION key and TRIGGERED with MEASURE MODE key Press 1 6 8 I9 IE2 EL TISHIFT CALIBRATE NOTE The GO indicator being lit and a 6 in the left and a 6 in the right displays confirm that calibration is enabled Press START The GO indicator remains unlit while calibration proceeds Keeping hands away from the test fixture wait until the GO indicator is lit again This complet recalibration of one range d Check as follows that the Digibridge operates properly with the recalibration Select CONTINUOUS with the MEASURE MODE key The Digibridge should measure the calibration resistor like any ordinary resistor and display its Rand Q ppm values The Q display can be expected to jump a bit Precision and repeatability are in the order of 5 ppm Also the NO GO indicator will probably be lit t
190. he rack using the four dress screws supplied If the rack s mounting holes are tapped with number 10 32 threads the nuts supplied for these screws can be omitted 1657 9000 For 1689 Digibridge The 1689 Digibridge can be mounted in a rack using hardware that permits sliding the instrument forward for access Use this procedure a Obtain the 1657 9000 Slide Rack Mounting Kit which includes the 1657 3100 sliding shelf assembly instructions and hardware b Mount the shelf and slides in the rack using the screws provided Fasten the assembly at the front and rear of the rack Slide the shelf forward for access c Remove the four screws from the bottom of the Digibridge and slide the instrument out of its bottom shell d Remove the four rubber feet from the bottom shell e Place the bottom shell on the slide rack shelf and align it so that four small holes in the shelf appear centered through the four large holes in the shell Fasten the shell to the shelf through these four holes using 10 32 screws provided as follows Place a large washer under the head of each screw which is then run through the hole in the shelf place lock washer and nut on the end of the screw and tighten f Slide the instrument into its bottom shell and reinstall the four screws removed in step c Large clearance holes are provided in the shelf for access This completes the installation 2 16 INSTALLATION Operation Section 3 BASIC PROCEDURE
191. hem for 10 bins 3 12 1 IEEE 488 Interface Unused If there is no system connection to the IEEE 488 INTERFACE connector be sure to keep the TALK switch set to TALK ONLY 3 12 2 Talk Only Use for Data Output This pertains to a relatively simple system with the Digibridge outputting data to one or more listen only IEEE 488 compatible devices such as a printer a Set the TALK switch to TALK ONLY b Program the Digibridge to send out results automatically after each measurement Refer to paragraph 3 10 The special commands for this purpose can be executed only in ENTER function as follows 1 SHIFT SPECIAL 2 for bin numbers 2 SHIFT SPECIAL 2 for QDR 3 SHIFT SPECIAL 2 for QDR and bin numbers SHIFT SPECIAL 2 for RLC SHIFT SPECIAL 2 for RLC and bin numbers I SHIFT SPECIAL 2 for RLC and QDR SHIFT SPECIAL 2 for RLC QDR and bin numbers SHIFT SPECIAL 2 no output on PASS full data set on FAIL SHIFT SPECIAL 2 BIN data on PASS full data set on FAIL SHIFT SPECIAL 2 for no data output via IEEE 488 bus I Oco oco JE MAL Je ELLE Operate the Digibridge in the usual way manually The system may constrain operation in some way For example a slow printer will limit the measurement rate because it requires a certain time to print one value before it can accept the next Refer to Table 3 10 for examples of the in
192. hematic sheet 3 1689 4702 SD 11 Figure 6 8 Main Board schematic sheet 4 1689 4702 SD 12 Figure 6 9 Main Board schematic sheet 5 1689 4702 SD 6 13 Figure 6 10 Main Board schematic sheet 6 1689 4702 SD 6 14 Figure 6 11 Main Board schematic sheet 7 1689 4702 SD 6 14 Figure 6 12 Power Supply assembly 1689 2005 6 15 Figure 6 13 Power Supply Board layout 1657 4720 6 16 Figure 6 14 Power Supply schematic 1689 2005 SD 6 16 Figure 6 15 Display Board layout 1658 4715 6 17 Figure 6 16 Display Board schematic 1658 4715 SD 6 18 Figure 6 17 High Speed Interface Board layout sheet 1 1689 4720 6 19 Figure 6 18 High Speed Interface Board layout sheet 2 1689 4720 6 19 Figure 6 19 High Speed Interface schematic sheet 1 1689 4720 SD 6 20 Figure 6 20 High Speed Interface schematic sheet 2 1689 4720 SD 6 21 Figure 6 21 High Speed Interface schematic sheet 3 1689 4720 SD 6 22 Figure 6 22 Interface Option Board layout 1658 4720 1D 6 23 Figure 6 23 Interface Option schematic 1658 4720 92DA 6 24 Figure 6 24 Keyboard Module assembly 1687 4200 6 35 Figure 6 25 Keyboard Indicators detail 1687 4710 1D 6 25 Figure 6 26 Keyboard schematic 1687 4710 2D 6 26 6 1 GENERAL This sectio
193. her than 1 kHz can be sent if needed f All commands sent to the Digibridge must be followed by an UNL unlisten and then ATN attention must be unasserted If the instrument is set to TALK this should happen automatically 3 14 2 Hewlett Packard HP85 100 REMOTE 703 110 OUTPUT 703 P2X4G0 120 ENTER 703 C 130 DISP C 140 LOCAL 703 150 SEND7 UNL RESUME 7 160 END 3 14 3 Capitol Equipment Corp PC 488 Card with the IBM PC 100 DEFINT A Z 110 DEF SEG amp HCO00 120 INIT 0 TRANSMIT 3 ENTER 21 130 MY ADDR 21 SYSTEM CONTROL 0 140 DIGIBRIDGE 3 150 CALL INIT MY ADDR SYSTEM CONTROL PC 488 memory address PC 488 commands Initialize IEEE 488 Address of Digibridge o o n 180 REN REN Enable remote control first 170 CALL TRANSMIT REN STATUS 180 M P2X4G0 Command for Digibridge 190 ST LISTEN 3 MTA DATA M UNL 200 CALL TRANSMIT ST STATUS 210 R SPACE 17 Receive data 220 CALL ENTER R LENGTH DIGIBRIDGE STATUS 230 PRINT MEASUREMENT IS R Print result 240 END Ok 3 84 OPERATION 3 14 4 National Instruments GPIB PCII Card With The IBM PC 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 Ok Pk kk x kc x xx XX INITIALIZE BRIDGE x kxkkkxkkkkxkikkbkkxk ADAPS GPIBO DIGI DIGI V e 1 CALL IBFIND ADAP GPIB0 CALL IBSIC GPIB0 IF IBSTA lt 0 THEN GOTO 120 CALL IBGTS GPIBO V CALL IBFIND DIGI
194. hipped after July 97 available on request Page 2 5 Paragraph 2 7 1 High Speed Measurement Interface Option e Part number for the High Speed Measurement Interface Option has changed from 1689 9620 to 1689 9630 Page 3 1 Paragraph 3 1 2 Startup step a e Power line switch for 115V or 230V operation has been removed switching is automatic Page 3 64 Paragraph 3 12 Data Output and or Programming via IEEE 488 Bus e Part number for the High Speed Measurement Interface Option has changed from 1689 9620 to 1689 9630 Page 5 3 Paragraph 5 3 Repair and Replacement of Circuit Boards e Contacts for QuadTech are Sales amp Service 800 253 1230 Technical Assistance 978 461 2100 Page 5 4 Table 5 1 Caution Note e Power line switch for 115V or 230V operation has been removed switching is automatic Page 5 11 Figure 5 1 1689 Rear and Bottom View e Rear view should show new power supply assembly PN 700011 without line voltage switch Page 5 13 A Paragraph 5 5 1 Disassembly of 1689 Digibridge step e and f e Delete step e there is no longer a protective cover CAUTION note does not apply the fan has been removed e Step f the power supply is secured by only 4 screws rather than 5 Instruction Manual Changes continued Page 5 14 amp Page 5 15 Figure 5 3 amp Figure 5 5 Power Supply Assembly e Power Supply Assembly shown PN 1689 2005 has been replaced by Power Supply Assembly PN 700011 Page 5 18 Paragra
195. his is normal e Disconnect the calibration resistor from the test fixture 5 9 4 Recalibration for Range 3 a Connect the 374 ohm calibration resistor to the Digibridge test fixture b Enter the known parameters of the calibration resistor as in the following example based on the values R 374 06 ohms and Q 5 ppm NOTES The Digibridge will accept six digits for R even though only five will be displayed The Q is associated with bin 00 and its value must be preceded with if the known Q is negative Select ENTER with FUNCTION key and verify that MEASURE MODE is CONT Press 3 SHIFT SPECIAL 1 Press 3 7 4 0 6 SHIFT NOM VALUE NOTE the calibration resistance value shvuld appear in the left display The DQ in PPM indicator must be lit Press 5 SHIFT BIN NO 0 0 NOTE the calibration Q value should appear in the right hand display c Enable and execute the recalibration for this range as follows The following keystrokes are the same for any range Select MEASURE with the FUNCTION key and TRIGGERED with MEASURE MODE key Press 1 6 8 9 2 DISHIFT CALIBRATE 5 54 SERVICE NOTE The GO indicator being lit and a 6 in the left and a 6 in the right displays confirm that calibration is enabled Press START The GO indicator remains unlit while calibration proceeds Keeping hands away from the test fixture wait until the GO indicator is lit again This completes recalibration o
196. ian taking of 2 to 765 measurements Displays measured values percentages differences ratios GO NO GO binning Automatic output of value bin number bin summary and other results via IEEE 488 bus Bias can be applied to capacitors being measured either by programming the selection of an internal supply 2 V or by sliding a switch to connect an external voltage source up to 60 V A choice between two interface options provides full talker listener and talker only capabilities consistent with the standard IEEE 488 bus Refer to the IEEE Standard 488 1978 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation See paragraph 2 8 in Section 2 A separate connector also interfaces with component handling and sorting equipment 1 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 2 1 Basic 1689 Digibridge Convenience is enhanced by the arrangement of test fixture and controls on the front ledge with all controls for manual operation arranged on a lighted keyboard Above and behind them the display panel is inclined and recessed to enhance visibility of digital readouts and indicators These indicators and those at the keyboard serve to inform and guide the operator in manipulating the simple controls or to indicate that remote control is in effect The 1689 instrument stands on a table or bench top The sturdy metal cabinet is durably finished in keeping with the long life circuitry inside Glass epoxy circuit boards interconnect and support high qual
197. ications in the front of the manual 3 4 5 Other Conditions Other test conditions are described in other parts of this manual Delay programmable settling time before acquisition of data paragraph 3 5 3 Averaging selection of number of measurement to be averaged paragraph 3 6 3 Bias applied to the DUT if it is a capacitor refer to paragraph 3 7 Special functions refer to paragraph 3 10 3 5 MEASUREMENT TIME AND MEASUREMENT RANGES 3 5 1 General Selection of MEASURE RATE SLOW MEDIUM and FAST obviously relates to measurement time providing the user with an easily made choice The slower rates provide greater accuracy Programming a DELAY typically because the normal settling time is insufficient for a particular handler or biasing routine also obviously affects measurement time In this paragraph the many items that affect measurement time are explained The measurement time required to complete a measurement and display the results depends not only on the selected measure rate and programmed delay but also on the presence or absence of the high speed measurement option test conditions choice of display whether data is being sent out to other devices etc The best combination of conditions for any particular job should be selected recognizing their effects on speed and accuracy The following examples are representative some of the numbers are approximate NOTE Except where stated otherwise as in paragrap
198. idge built in test fixture as well as the remote test fixtures 1689 9600 and 1689 9605 Bias NEGATIVE polarity is at the RIGHT d Use the external switches user supplied to remove bias from the test fixture apply bias after the DUT is in place remove bias after measurement and short the DUT before its removal A routine like this is generally recommended However for occasional non production measurements if the capacitances being measured are less than 200 uF and the bias voltage less than 30 V an optional procedure is to leave the external bias circuitry on during measurements and to use the Digibridge EXTERNAL BLISS switch to apply bias to the DUT ON and to remove it and discharge the DUT OFF e For each DUT in the CONTINUOUS measure mode disregard the first displayed result and read the second Notice enough of the subsequent results to verify that the DUT has stabilized Use the stable result f In the TRIGGERED measure mode each measurement cycle includes the normal settling time 7 to 12 ms for 1 kHz measurements or a programmed delay Remeasure enough DUTS to be sure that they are stabilized in the first measurement so that any subsequent differences are well within the error permitted by your needs If not program in a longer delay NOTE There are two effects to be aware of in watching for stabilization of the DUT voltage and capacitance Besides charging to a final voltage there is also the stabilization of capac
199. ifies them Figure 1 4 shows the rear of the 1689M model which is functionally similar Figure 1 1 The 1689M RLC Digibridge tester front view INTRODUCTION 1 3 11 12 10 13 15 14 16 CAMERA TE SPECIE lt EXT 3 a N MEASURE ENTER a MART M wus AY sm x0 1 SW MEDIUM FAST CONT TRIGGEREO gt CsiD CsfRs touvauNT SERES C CpD CpiRe f oscur re Ee 22 21 20 19 18 Figure 1 2 Front controls and displays Upper illustration 1689 Digibridge tester overall Lower illustration keyboard detail 1 4 INTRODUCTION Fig 1 2 Ref No Name RLC display Units and multipliers NEG indicators QDR display POWER switch Other display panel indicators Test fixture Table 1 1 Front Panel Controls and Indicators Description Digital display 5 numerals with decimal points Light spot LED indicators Light spot LED indicators Digital display 4 numerals with decimal points Pushbutton push again to release Light spot LED indicators Pair of special connector each makes dual contact Not on 1689M Function Display of principal measured value If function is MEASURE and display selection is VALUE number indicates R L or C If display selection is delta or deltaRLC indicates percentage difference respectively of R 1 or C compared to stored nominal value If display selection is BIN NO indicates bin assignment of measured DUT
200. ime Factor 6 Ranges Changing Holding Time 30 29 7 Time Median Values Averaging 32 8 Time IEEE 488 Bus Output 33 9 Time Low Test Frequency 33 10 Measurement Time Summary 34 3 6 ACCURACY THE LIMITS OF ERRORS 3 36 l General 36 2 Accuracy for Typical Conditions 36 3 Averaging to Improve Accuracy 38 4 Median Value For Better Acc cy 39 5 Enhancement for Large amp Small Z 39 6 Enhancement by Short Ckt L 40 7 Cable Related Errors 41 8 Signal Reversing for Power Freq 44 3 7 BIAS FOR THE DUT a A 3 45 1 Internal Bias 45 2 External Bias 46 9 Suppression of Transients 19 3 8 BIN SORTING amp GO NO GO RESULTS 3 49 1 Introduction to Binning 49 2 Sorting Methods 50 3 Limit Entry Procedure 51 4 Verification of Nominal amp Limits 52 5 Examples of Limit Entry 53 6 Notes on Limit Entries General 54 7 Go No Go and Bin Results 55 8 Bin Sum Information 55 9 Binning and Ratio Meas Together 56 3 9 KEYBOARD LOCK FUNCTION MAP AND INTERROGATIONS 3 58 1 Keyboard Lock 58 2 Function Map 59 8 Summary of Interrogations 59 3 10 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS 8 60 3 11 OPERATION WITH A HANDLER 3 v 83 3 12 DATA OUTPUT AND OR PROGRAMMING VIA IEEE 488 BUS 3 64 1 EEE 488 Interface Unused 64 2 Talk Only Use for Data Output 64 3 Talk Listen Use Programming etc 70 4 Output in Compact Binary Format 78 3 13 SELF CHECKS AND FAILURE DISPLAYS ERROR CODES 3 81 1 Power Up Self Chteks 81 2 Failure due to Sign
201. in the front of this manual and to Table 1 3 in Section 1 Removal of Interface Board The procedure is the same for either option and either Digibridge a Switch POWER OFF and disconnect power cord from Digibridge b Place the instrument in the normal position flat on table or in rack Looking at the rear panel remove the two screws that hold the interface option s rear panel or the blank cover plate from the Digibridge Refer to Figures 1 3 and 1 4 in Section 1 SERVICE 5 25 c Withdraw the interface option or the cover plate horizontally directly away from the front panel CAUTION Observe precautions while handling the interface option Because there are static sensitive parts on the board DO NOT TOUCH THE CIRCUITS or ICs Refer to Section 5 of this manual for recommended handling procedure Installation Install or reinstall the interface option as follows a Hold the interface option by its rear panel so that the labels near the connectors read right side up Look through the opening into the instrument and observe the connector that will receive the interface option board s edge contacts Insert the board horizontally through the opening with care to align the board edge contacts with the mating connector inside b Press the interface option fully into the Digibridge by hand confirming that alignment is correct Reinstall the screws that were removed in step b above 5 5 6 Removal of Multiple Pin Packages
202. inal value and tolerance as described above For each successive bin similarly enter a new nominal value then the tolerance and bin number Changing the nominal value does not affect limits already stored Any DUT that qualifies for 2 overlapping bins will automatically be assigned to the lower bin 3 Unsymmetrical tolerances To enter unsymmetrical limits for example 2 5 in bin 6 press 2 S j SHIFT BIN NO 0 6 Two percentages of the same sign can be entered Always enter the more positive tolerance first d You can close any bin that has been opened as in steps b c For RLC bins follow this example for bin 8 press OPERATION 3 51 0 SHIFT BIN NO 0 8 To disable QDR sorting close bin 0 using two digits for the bin number as noted before thus for D or Rs or Q with R press 9 9 9 9 SHIFT BIN NO 0 0 However for Rp or Q with L press 0 SHIFT BIN NO 0 0 e To enable GO NO GO lights after opening at least one bin leave nominal value at any non zero value To disable GO NO GO and all bin sorting press 0 SHIFT NOM VAL Note To see the present numerical limits for bin 3 for example press SHIFT BIN NO 0 3 and similarly to see the nominal value press SHIFT NOM VAL This is the value that the Digibridge will use for a subsequent entry of bin limits and when function is changed to MEASURE and measurements are made for calc
203. inceton IN 47671 Holtzer Cabot Boston MA 02119 Umted Transformer Chicago IL Berkshire Transtormer Kent CT 06757 Mallory Cap indianapolis iN 46206 Mallory Bat Tarrytown NY 10581 Guiton inds Metuchen NJ 08840 Westinghouse Boston MA 02118 Hardware Prod Reading PA 19602 Continental Wire York PA 17405 Cannon Salem MA 01970 Gerber Mishawaka iN 46544 Johanson Boonton NJ 07005 Harris Melbourne Fi 32901 Augat Bros Attieboro MA 02703 Chandler Wethersheid CT 06109 Dale Eictrcs Columbus NE 68601 Elco Willow Grove PA 19090 General Inst Dallas TX 75220 Kings Eictres Tuckahoe NY 11223 Mephisto Tool Hudson NY 12534 Honeywell Freeport iL 61032 Electra insui Woodside NY 11377 Edgerton Germeshuasen Boston MA 02115 IMC Magnetics Westbury NY 11591 Ampex Redwood City CA 94063 Hudson Lamp Kearny NJ 07032 Sylvania Woburn MA 01801 Amer Elctres Labs Lansdale PA 19446 R amp C Mtg Ramsey PA 16671 Cramer New York NY 10013 Raytheon Quincy MA 02169 Wagner Elctrc Livingston NJ 07039 Weston Archibsid PA 18403 Tel Labs Manchester NH 03102 Dickson Chicago L 60619 Magnecraft Chicago iL 60630 Atlas Ind Brookline NH 03033 Garde Cumberiand R 02864 Quality Comp St Marys PA 15857 Alco Eleucs Lawrence MA 01843 Continental Conn Woodside NY 11377 Vitramon Bridgeport C T 06601 Gordos Bloomfield NJ 07003 Methode Rolling Meadow L 60008 Amer Brass Torrington CT 06790 Weckeaser Chicago L 606
204. indicator light If it is lit there is no opportunity for manual operation except switching EXTERNAL BIAS ON and OFF and use of the START button if manual start is enabled The displays may be observed then but their content is controlled by the system controller via the IEEE 488 bus Details of test program preparation are beyond the scope of this manual Refer to Table 3 18 for an example of message activity during a control sequence in which the controller says start and the Digibridge after a measurement says C uF 1 2345 Programming Guidelines If the Digibridge is to be programmed TALK switch set to TALK LISTEN keep the following suggestions in mind 1 An unlisten conmand is required before measurement is possible 2 If not addressed to talk the Digibridge sends a service request SRQ low when it has data ready to send 3 Then SRQ will not go false high until the Digibridge has been addressed to talk or has been serially polled A typical program might include these features Initial Setup with ATN true untalk unlisten my listen address of Digibridge my talk address of CPU then with ATN false measurement conditions Measurement Enabling Sequence for example untalk the Digibridge send a GET unlisten the Digibridge After the CPU receives the SRQ necessary enabl ing of data transfer with ATN true untalk unlisten my listen address of CPU my talk address of Digibridge then ATN false
205. ins without any keying Be sure that the cable is oriented correctly with color marked edges up at the keyboard and toward the rear at the main board Also be sure that each cable connector engages its full set of pins and does NOT miss the first or last one j To remove the display board Remove the two screws that pass through the display board into spacers on the subpanel not the two screws that fasten the associated connector board Slide the display board upwards to unplug it from the connectors below k To remove the main board Disconnect the cables that connect this board with display keyboard and power supply See above Remove the two screws from below that attach the BNC connector bracket at front or rear panel Remove the eight screws from above that fasten the main board to the chassis and the stiffener below this board Note one of these screws is accessed after first removing the air deflector 2 screws near the right rear air vent Remove the main board forward and upwards If removal is obstructed by the front panel assembly that can be removed first See above 5 5 3 Relocation of BNC Connector Bracket Test Signal Interface Port on 1689M The BNC connectors that provide interface via cables to the DUT test fixture can be located at the lower part of either front or rear panel The four BNC connectors remain mounted on their bracket and cabled to the main board during relocation from front to rear or vice v
206. ion 2 byte Q1 Shorting between measurements used for reducing transient recovery time within measur ing circuit when measuring with bias NOT FOR DISCHARGING THE DUT 2 byte Q2 Signal reversal and shorting between measurements 2 byte Q3 Quick acquisition feature 2 byte Q4 Quick acquisition amp shorting 2 byte Q5 Display Digit Eliminate a digits from Blanking RLC b digits from QDR 3 byte Oab Integration Time Value i multiplies Multiplying MEDIUM and FAST Factor integration times Floating point Ii Delay Value in ms j Floating point Jj Se Indicates Turn On Conditions Delay command must be entered after frequency command sequence will cause delay to revert to its default value 3 76 OPERATION Inverting this Table 3 18 MESSAGE ACTIVITY ON IEEE 488 BUS DURING A SIMPLE EXAMPLE OF REMOTE CONTROL Byte order t AOT Rh CO t2 M Q x 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Message space space space 1 A CI oh OO t2 ATN line true true true true false false true true true Comment Untalk all devices Unlisten all devices Set Digibridge address 3 to listen Set controller address n to talk Typical device dependent message START See Table 3 17 for program commands Unlisten Digibridge must for measurement Digibridge makes measurement asserts SRQ line to indicate completion Set controller to listen Se
207. ion retrofit plug in OR IEEE 488 handler interface option retrofit 1658 9620 plug in Rack mount kit Digibridge front panel is always 1689 9611 accessible the BNC connectors for cable to test fixture can be mounted on either front or rear panel Remote test fixture like the 1689 9600 also has 1689 9605 START bar GO NO GO I ights which function only if Digibridge has an interface option Use cables 1689 9602 supplied with 1689M and 1689 2400 included with this fixture Remote test fixture for radial lead DUTS I ike 1689 9600 test fixture on 1689 Digibridge with BNC connectors Use 1689 9602 cable supplied with 1689M Use axial lead adaptors supplied if appropriate Accepts other accessories like extender cables 1657 9600 1688 9600 See Table 1 3 Test fixture adaptors for axial lead parts 1657 5995 Replacements available set of 4 adaptors Cal ibration kit contains six Kelvin connected 1689 9601 references fuur precision resistances open and short that plug into the 1689 9605 or the 1689 9600 test fixture Battery Refer to information in preceding table 8410 3480 Kelvin CI ip Cable for measuring large low 1689 9606 impedance components INTRODUCTION 1 13 Condensed Operating Instructions for GenRad 1689 Digibridge 1 GENERAL INFORMATION The 1689 RLC Digibridge is a microprocessor controlled auto matic RLC meter It measures impedance of the device under test DUT and displa
208. isconnect the ribbon cable 1689 0200 from main board at connector J5 The cable can be removed from the power supply J1 after removal of the protective cover as described below Notice that the connectors are symmetrical reversing either or both is permitted and the cable is extra long for convenience in servicing NOTE The next two steps removal of the power supply are NOT related to the removal of the main board Either can be left in place while the other is removed 5 12 SERVICE WARNING Dangerous voltages are present on wires and terminals that will be exposed in the following steps BE SURE THAT THE POWER CORD IS DISCONNECTED BEFORE PROCEEDING e Remove the protective cover with the warning label from the upper right portion of the power supply 3 screws CAUTION In reassembling inspect carefully to be sure that none of the nearby wires touches the fan rotor or blades Inspect by looking under the 1657 4720 board To verify free rotation blow on the fan and watch it spin f Remove the five screws that fasten the bottom of the power supply to the main chassis Four screws are at corners of power supply the fifth is nearly hidden between the transformer and the largest capacitor Lift the power supply slightly and move it back carefully while disengaging the POWER pushbutton extension from its hole in the front panel Figure 5 5 Reassembly note 5 screws 8 mm long SERVICE 5 13 V C2 POWER SUPPLY CORN
209. itance value itself For example some aluminum electrolytic capacitors respond slowly to a change in applied voltage therefore the DUT capacitance can be settling long after the voltage is essentially stable g After biased measurements are completed remove all bias by sliding the EXTERNAL BIAS switch OFF and if necessary pressing the SHIFT INT BIAS keys so that the BIAS ON indicator is NOT lit Disable the shorting routine See below 3 48 OPERATION 3 7 3 Suppression of Transients When measuring biased capacitors the time required for settling of transients in the measuring circuitry can usually be reduced by selecting the automatic shorting routine a special function as follows Select ENTER function and press 2 2 SHIFT SPECIAL 3 However if there is no bias the normal routine is faster To obtain it select ENTER function and press 0 SHIFT SPECIAL 3 NOTE This automat ic shorting routine DOES NOT discharge the capacitor DUT It does short a capacitance in the measurement circuit to help terminate the transient that results from connecting a DUT with bias 3 8 BIN SORTING AND GO NO GO RESULTS 3 8 1 Introduction to Binning Sorting Based on Limit Comparisons If a group of similar DUTs are to be measured it is often convenient to use the limit comparison capability of the Digibridge to categorize the parts This can be done in lieu of or in addition to recording the measured value of each part
210. ity components to assure years of dependable performance Although intended for bench top use this model can be rack mounted using a type of mount that slides forward for convenience Adaptability to any common ac power line is assured by the removable power cord and the convenient line voltage switch Safety is enhanced by the fused isolating power transformer and the 3 wire connection 1 2 2 Basic 1689M Digibridge The essential front panel features of the 1689 are provided on the vertical front of the model 1689M These include the keypad display and the power ON OFF button The set of four BNC connectors for connection to the test fixture is supplied on the front panel but can be relocated to the rear if that is preferred The display panel and keyboard indicators serve to inform and guide the operator in manipulating the simple controls or to indicate that remote control is in effect The 1689M instrument also stands on a table or bench where the bail provided under its front edgecan be used to tilt it back for operator convenience This model goes particularly well in a rack with its vertical front pane and cable connection from either front or rear to a suitable test fixture The sturdy metal cabinet is durably finished in keeping with the long life circuitry inside Glass epoxy circuit boards interconnect and support high quality components to assure years of dependable performance Adaptability to any common ac power line is assu
211. l of this instrument NOTE For copies of the Standard order IEEE Std 488 1978 IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation from IEEE Service Center Department PB 8 445 Hoes Lane Piscataway N J 08854 To make connection to a single device like a printer use a IEEE 488 cable which fits the rear panel connector labeled IEEE 488 INTERFACE For larger systems each device is connected to a system bus in parallel usually by the use of several stackable cables Refer to the figure for a diagram of a hypothetical system A full set of connections is 24 16 signals plus shield and ground returns as tabulated below and also in the Standard Suitable cables stackable at each end are available from Component Manufacturing Service Inc West Bridgewater MA 02379 U S A Their part number 2024 1 is for a I meter Iong cable INSTATT A TION 9 9 This instrument will function as either a TALK LISTEN or a TALK ONLY device in the system depending on the position of the TALK switch TALK LISTEN denotes full programmability and is sllited for use in a system that has a controller or computer to manage the data flow The handshake routine assures that the active talker proceeds slowly enough for the slowest listener that is active but is not limited by any inactive unaddressed listener TALK ONLY is suited to a simpler system e g Digibridge and printer with 110 controller and no other talker Either mode provides
212. lar to the manual procedure The Z1 command is equivalent to manually keying 1 6 8 9 2 ISHIFT OPEN It is necessary to allow the Digibridge to reach range 1 It must not be held on another range The test fixture must be physically open circuited Zero calibration is initiated by a GO command equivalent to pressing START which should not be followed by other commands until the Digibridge responds with SRQ The purpose of the ZO command is to defeat the preceding ZI command as you might wish to do if the Z1 was sent by mistake Limit entry commands are interpreted in relation to the previously established parameter send the M command first Use the limit entry commands in the tabulated sequence except that nominal value need not be repeated after once being entered Notice that f n h and 1 in the table are E notation numbers containing any number of digits with optional use of decimal point and optional use of power of ten multiplier Do NOT omit the semicolon after each of these Refer to the table The letter n in the table is nominal value in base units ohms farads or henries For example nominal value can be set to 543 21 pF by the command N543 21E 12 Limits for bins 1 thru 13 are entered using percentages referred to the current nominal value For example Bin No 1 designated 01 is set to 1 5 05 by the command sequence B01H1 5 L 5E 2 3 72 OPER J TION However the limit for
213. lay minimizes the time between insertion of the DUT into the test fixture and beginning of a valid measurement Measurement starts when the Digibridge receives the START signal from the handler or when the START button is pressed f Select other measurement conditions as desired EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT RANGE HELD or autorange MEASURE RATE test FREQUENCY test VOLTAGE CONSTANT VOLTAGE or normal voltage AVERAGE or regular etc g Select any desired special function output of results via IEEE 488 bus special routines median result etc refer to paragraph 3 10 Enabling IEEE 488 output adds several milliseconds of calculation time to each measurement cycle about 2 to 12 ms depending on the type of data The presence of the high speed measurement interface option subtracts about 35 ms from the same calculation time Median calculation requires somewhat less than three times as long as normal measurements For measurement time considerations refer to paragraph 3 5 OPERA TION 3 63 3 12 DATA OUTPUT AND OR PROGRAMMING VIA IEEE 488 BUS These considerations apply only if you have an interface option If you do there will be interface connectors at the rear See Figure 1 3 The two interface options are interchangeable in the basic IEEE 488 bus function However the 1689 9620 high speed option is faster in making measurements than the 1658 9620 and the 1689 9620 provides handler interface outputs for 15 bins whereas the 1658 9620 provides t
214. lay provides some service information indicating in code which of 4 important digital signals is stuck and whether high or low 66666 XXXX The detector scale test failed CPU will loop on failure Switch POWER OFF and ON again If these remedies are ineffective repair service is required 555 D XXXX A signal strength check failed When D is 1 4 it indicates the range being checked with voltage 1 275 V When D is 5 the range is 4 with voltage 075 V CPU will loop on failure Be sure that the EXTERNAL BIAS switch is OFF and check to make sure that the charged capacitor protective fuse has not blown Item 11 Figure 1 3 Recycle power OFF and ON to exit from loop 444 E XXXX A check on test frequency and waveform failed For E of 1 2 3 4 5 6 the frequency being checked is 6 06 6 0 1 2 0 48 0968 0118 kHz respectively CPU will loop on failure recycle power OFF and ON to exit from loop 33333 XXXX PROM data checksum test XXXX checksum which must be zero to pass the test 222 F XXXX Calibration constants test XXXX normalized value of constant which must be within the limits of 1 00000 0 78125 to pass the test For F 0 the constant is frequency correction factor For F 1 2 3 or 4 it is the conductance of range 1 2 3 or 4 respectively You can proceed from this power up self check failure 222 F XXXX and operate the Digibridge To do so press the C D key Of course the measured results are lia
215. lculated result for final comparisons to verify the speed Equipment Required The readings can be expected to vary 5 from the examples given mostly because the manual timing method is liable to such errors The method is adequate for the purpose intended NOTE described in paragraph 5 9 2 of the recalibration procedure 5 8 SERVICE 1 1689 Digibridge without high speed option To remove it see paragraph 5 5 5 2 1689 9620 High speed measurement option board retrofit or just removed 3 Watch or clock with digital display of seconds or a sweep second hand 4 A suitable DUT such as the 24 9 ohm Calibration Resistor used in the examples see below a Switch the POWER ON Perform the zeroing procedure both open circuit and short circuit as b Insert the DUT 24 9 ohms 0 1 for example in the test fixture Press FUNCTION key to select ENTER function Press 2 4 9 SHIFT NOM VALUE Press 2 SHIFT BIN NO 0 1 Press MEASURE RATE if necessary to select SLOW rate Press MEASURE MODE to select CONTINUOUS mode c With the watch or clock time the interval between the next two keystrokes The number of measurements made while the function is MEASURE will automatically be stored in bin sum for bin 01 Press FUNCTION key to select MEASURE function Wait 60 seconds Press FUNCTION key to select ENTER function Press SHIFT BIN SUM 0 1 d R
216. lected via the keyboard The time required for a complete measurement is typically less than indicated in Tables A and B viii TABLE A GR1689 MEASUREMENT RATE TEST FREQUENCY MEASUREMENT RATE 12 Hz 100 Hz 120Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz SLOW 875 ms 940 ms 940 ms 970 ms 930 ms 930 ms MEDIUM 670 ms 130 ms 185 ms 200 ms 190 ms 190 ms FAST 670 ms 125 ms 110 ms 80 ms 75 ms 70 ms MAXIMUM 670 ms 110 ms 100 ms 40 ms 34 ms 33 ms Notes 1 If the high speed option is not used add 19 ms for MAXIMUM or 38 ms for SLOW NEDIUM or FAST measurement 2 If the display is value delta or deltaRLC add 6 to 10 ms 3 If data is output via the IEEE Bus add 6 to 12 ms 4 For ACQ subtract 22 ms for SLOW MEDIUM or FAST and 12 ms for MAXIMUM TABLE B GR1689M MEASUREMENT RATE TEST FREQUENCY MEASUREMENT RATE 12 Hz 100 Hz 120 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz SLOW 875 ms 920 ms 920 ms 950 ms 920 ms 920 ms MEDIUM 670 ms 120 ms 170 ms 180 ms 170 ms 170 ms FAST 670 ms 105 ms 90 ms 65 ms 55 ms 55 ms MAXIMUM 660 ms 101 ms 86 ms 32 ms 22 ms 22 ms Notes 1 If the high speed option is not used add 12 ms for MAXIMUM or 24 ms for SLOW MEDIUM or FAST measurement 2 If the display is value delta or deltaRLC add 3 to 5 ms 3 If data is output via the IEEE Bus add 3 to 6 ms 4 For ACQ subtract 11 ms for SLOW MEDIUM or FAST and 6 ms for MAXIMUM These times can be shortened by 14 ms with reduced accuracy using the quick acquisition routine The measurement
217. lickering of the fifth digit should stay typically between 2 counts For example if the display is 330 1X nF the X might flicker between 2 and 4 If for example X is flickering between 9 and 11 it will of course cause a flickering of the preceding digit 330 19 and 330 21 In such a case the correct readout is the larger 4 digit number 330 2 and the fifth digit is acceptably stable j Press Ls Q k Insert as DUT the first inductor specified in Table 5 2 check number 10 1 Verify that the displays are within the extremes shown for check number 10 in Table 5 2 if the inductor is within the tolerance specified by Table 5 1 m Similarly check the inductor specified in check number 11 SECONDARY MEASUREMENT VERIFICATION The following procedure will verify performance of the secondary display D at 1 kHz 10 kHz and 100 kHz Using the 49 9 ohm resistor and 0 0033 uF capacitor listed in Table 5 1 connected in series the value of D can be expected to be approximately 0 0010 at 1 kHz 0 0103 at 10 kHz and 0 1034 at 100 kHz NOTE These readings are based on precise values of 49 9 ohms and 0 0033 uF If other components are to be used the D value must be calculated using the formula D 2piRsCs a Press Cs D b Insert the series combination of the 49 9 ohm resistor and 0 0033 uF capacitor in series The Dreading should indicate approximately 0 0010 c Change the frequency to 10 kHz and verify D measurement as foll
218. lue given in the specifications in the front of this manual Any measurement smaller than 1 count is displayed as all zeros NOTE If the measured value is very small even below one count or very large even over 99999 high resolution measurements are possible using the ratio display Refer to paragraph 33 7 or 3 10 High Overrange The high extension of the high range goes up to the maximum display all 9 s with the decimal point at the right and finally to blank with reduced accllracy The high overrange is used for the very large values of RLC that exceed the basic high range 3 30 OPERATION Autoranging Autoranging is normal it is inhibited only if you select RANGE HELD There is a slight hysteresis in the changeover from range to range to eliminate a possible cause of display flickering Time Required to Change Range The Digibridge must almost complete a measurement cycle in the previously established range before starting measurement in the range to which it changes The Digibridge completes the data acquisition and a large part of the calculation process before deciding whether the present range is best for the measured value If you have selected median value a special function the Digibridge will go through basically three measurement cycles so that it has the median value for making the decision whether to change ranges Thus measuring a lot of components that straddle a range boundary requires almost double the regul
219. lugs and guard if appropriate to the DOT as described above NOTE Avoid contact between outer conductors of BNC to banana adaptors Otherwise measurements with high test frequency are liable to have errors that result from the changing mutual inductances between shields of cable conductors 3 2 7 The Effects of Cable and Fixture Capacitances It is important to use very low capacitance shielded wire for cables not only for accuracy but also to minimize resonance effects in the measurement of large inductance at high frequency The Capacitances that are Most Liable to Affect Accuracy Any test fixture extension cable adds a bit of capacitance in parallel with the DOT because shielding of the leads is imperfect and more between each terminal and ground The zeroing process paragraph 3 1 3 will compensate fully for the capacitances between cables in any normal test setup However capacitance between ground and the low connections at the DUT C from ground to IL and C from ground to PL in parallel designated Csn can affect measurement accuracy of very high impedance DUTs at high frequencies Zeroing Be sure to repeat either the entire power up procedure or at least the open circuit and short circuit zeroing procedure after any change in test fixtures or their cable connections Calculating the Capacitance Loading Error The error due to this capacitance Csn is designated Ald additional error due to loading The magnitude of
220. ly faster so that the three curves that are shown starting near 35 ms for 1689 would start near 25 ms if redrawn for 1689M OPERATION 3 37 RANGES 2 3 4 SOLID LINES RANGE 1 DASHED g DS MEASURE RATE FAST 2a 06 RLC ACCURACY ERROR 02 FREQUENCY kHz Figure 3 10 Approximate RLC accuracy vs test frequency for these test conditions R L and C within basic range lt D lt lt lor Q gt 1 test voltage gt 1 V constant voltage NOT selected The curves are labeled according to measure rate SLOW MEDnJM and FAST Max is FAST with integration time factor set to 0 25 a special function 3 6 3 Averaging to Improve Accuracy Figure 3 10 The accuracy of measuring each DUT can be enhanced automatically by the Digibridge if you program it to make several measurements and average them before reporting the final result Thus errors due to electrical noise and other effects that are just as likely to make the measurement too high as too low are largely canceled This is true regardless of the display selection VALUE BIN NO etc Of course the time required to complete a measurement with averaging set to 10 for example is 10 times as long as the time for a single measurement Averaging can be set to any integer up to 255 To select 8 for example select ENTER with the FUNCTION key then press 8 SHIFT AVERAGE Similarly to inhibit averaging select ENTER function and press 1 2 SHIFT
221. maximum e Weight 1689 should be 10 Ibs 4 5 kg 1689M should be 14 Ibs 6 4 kg e Environment reads Altitude 2000m Installation Category 1 Pollution Degree 1 Page 1 8 Figure 1 3 amp Figure 1 4 1689 and 1689M Rear View e Rear view should show new power supply assembly PN 700011 without line voltage switch Page 1 9 Table 1 2 Rear Connectors and Controls e Ref No 1 External bias connector receives cable 1658 2450 not supplied with instruments shipped after July 97 available on request Fuse is 2 10A 250V 3AG Type Fast Blow Replace only with the same type and rating e Ref No 3 Air filter has been deleted e Ref No 5 AN Fuse is 6 10A 250V 3AG Type Slow Blow Replace only with the same type and rating To replace remove fuse drawer by pressing up on release tab e Ref No 6 Line voltage switch has been deleted power input is from 90 250V AC Page 1 11 1 12 Table 1 3 1 4 Accessories and Options for the 1689 1689M e A quantity of two spare fuses are supplied 6 10A 250V 3AG Type Slow Blow QuadTech part number 5330 1100 e Bias cable 1658 2450 with built in fuse not supplied with instruments shipped after July 97 available on request A quantity of one spare fuse is supplied 2 10A 250V 3AG Type Fast Blow QuadTech part number 5330 3200 e Part number for the recommended High Speed Measurement Interface Option has changed from 1689 9620 to 1689 9630 Page 2 1 Safety Inspection
222. measurement results to the active listeners in the system 2 8 2 Interface Functions Figure 2 5 The following functions are implemented Refer to the Standard for an explanation of the function subsets represented by the identifications below For example T5 represents the most complete set of talker capabilities whereas PPO means the absence of a capability SHI source handshake talker AHI acceptor handshake listener TS talker full capability serial poll L4 listener but not listen only SRI request by device for service from controller RL2 remote control no local lockout no return to local switch PPO no parallel poll DC1 device clear DTI device trigger typically starts measurement CO no controller functions The handshake cycle is the process whereby digital signals effect the transfer of each data byte by means of status and control signals The cycle assures for example that the data byte has settled and all listeners are ready before the talker signals data valid Similarly it assures that all listeners have accepted the byte before the talker signals data not valid and makes the transition to another byte Three signal lines are involved in addition to the 8 that convey the byte itself Refer to the accompanying figure 2 10 INSTALLATION FIRST DATA BYTE SECOND DATA BYTE DI01 8 COMPOSITE ponz H 1 NOT 23 A VALID DAV 20 L H NRFD L 23 H A
223. measurements press 8 SHIFT AVERAGE See paragraph 3 6 3 Both If both median value and averaging are enabled together the measurement time is multiplied by almost three times the number specified when averaging was programmed The Digibridge finds the medians of groups of three measurements and then calculates the average of the medians 3 32 OPERATION 3 5 8 Time Required if IEEE 488 Output is Enabled If data output is enabled via IEEE 488 bus additional time about 2 ms to 12 ms is required per measurement This time requirement depends on the selected display and what data is being sent out approximately as follows Refer to explanation of operation with the IEEE 488 interface paragraph 3 12 Regular Output Data Format CBF Output data BIN RLC QDR RLC QDR BIN RLC JBIN QDR BIN RLC QDR any Display BIN NO 2 6 8 10 10 10 12 lt 2 ms Display other 2 2 2 4 4 4 6 lt 2 ms Compacted Binary Format If the compacted binary format is selected data output requires less than 2 ms 3 5 9 Effect of Selecting a Low Test Frequency on Measurement Time Selection of a test frequency near or below 0 1 kHz affects measurement time in two ways both settling time and data acquisition time depend on the period of the test signal Selection of test frequency near and above 1 kHz has little effect on measurement time particularly if the integration time factor is left at default or set to a larger value In general
224. mple C and D are calculated by the microprocessor from the set of voltage measurements the predetermined frequency and the calibrated Rand Q of the applicable standard resistor In these calculations the microprocessor automatically removes from the measured result the parameters of the test connection stray capacitance and conductance and series resistance and inductance if simple opencircuit and short circuit ZERO calibration measurements have been performed by the operator The values obtained during ZERO calibration are stored in Digibridge memory 3nd retained during power down and power up THEORY 4 1 The impedance of each internal standard resistor is similarly stored in memory for use by the microprocessor in the calculation of parameters being measured For this purpose the Digibridge measures its own internal standard resistors against an external standard during factory calibration and recalibration if any Therefore the impedances of the internal resistance standards are known at the calibration frequency usually 1 kHz and are computed by the microprocessor for other test frequencies The Digibridge also stores the frequency error of its crystal referenced oscillator actual vs nominal frequency expressed in parts per million so that the microprocessor uses a corrected frequency value in each calculation of capacitance or inductance from measured impedance This frequency correction is programmed into the Digibridge
225. my residue remove the tape within a few weeks 5 7 TROUBLE ANALYSIS 5 7 1 General CAUTION Only well qualified personnel should attempt trouble analysis Be sure power is OFF during disassembly and setting up for tests Carefully observe the HANDLING PRECAUTIONS given at the beginning of Section 5 Resources Refer to Section 4 for a good understanding of the theory of operation The block diagrams and discussion there provide necessary background which can generally save time in trouble analysis Refer to Section 6 for hardware details circuit layouts schematic diagrams and parts lists Abnormal digital Signal levels Most digital signal levels in this instrument are normally near zero logic low about 3 5 to 5 V logic high or rapidly switching between these states Failure of a digital source often produces a dc voltage of about 2 V on a signal line Use high impedance probes in measuring Use a scope as well as a voltmeter because an average of 2 V may be normal for a digital signal that has a duty cycle Ilear 50 Duplicated circuits and resistor networks Some circuits as in the display board for example are duplicated several times The ICs can usually be exchanged between a faulty circuit and a functional one to identify a bad IC Notice also that the resistor networks DB Z2 DB ZIO are simply compact packages of 220 ohm resistors If one resistor is open it is not necessary to replace the entire package Use a 59
226. n adds about 38 ms normally about 19 ms for Max rate or any other condition in which IT factor is 1 Max is defined as FAST rate with IT factor set to 0 25 a special function eee Te FOR 1689M DIGIBRIDGE WITH HIGH SPEED MEASUREMENT OPTION Subtract about 10 ms from Max Meas Rate entries in corresponding 1689 table above Subtract about 17 ms from other Meas Rate entries in corresponding 1689 table above teste FOR 1689M DIGIBRIDGE WITHOUT HIGH SPEED MEASUREMENT OPTION Subtract about 17 ms from Max Meas Rate entries in corresponding 1689 table above Subtract about 31 ms from other Meas Rate entries in corresponding 1689 table above OPERATION 3 35 NOTE Table 3 4 differs slightly from the table of typical measurement times given in the Specifications at the front of this manual and data in paragraphs 3 5 1 3 5 2 3 5 5 although the tables are reasonably accurate The differences underscore that these typical numbers are not specifications and that several test conditions and selections in addition to those stated for the tables affect measurement time For example selections of parameter and equivalent circuit affect calculation time 3 6 ACCURACY THE LIMITS OF ERRORS 3 6 1 General Refer to the Specifications at the front of this manual The specifications apply at an ambient temperature of 23 degrees C unless recalibration has been done at some other temperature in low humidity if
227. n contains the parts lists circuit board layout drawings and schematic diagrams for the instrument Refer to Section 4 for the functional block diagram and Section 5 for further details about part locations 6 2 REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS Each electrical component part on an assembly is identified on the equipment and drawings by means of a reference designator comprised of letters and numbers Component parts on a circuit board or assembly are classified by the letter or letters of the reference designators R for resistor C for capacitor etc and individually identified by the numerical part of the reference designator RI for the first resistor R2 for the second etc Some of the less obvious designator letters are DS or CR for indicator light Q for transistor U for integrated circuit device WT for wire tie point J or P for connector and Z for network PARTS LISTS AND DL GRA 1 IS 6 1 6 4 Figure 6 2 Rear view of 1689 showing replaceable mechanical parts 6 2 PARTS LISTS AND DIAGRAMS Item Description GenRad Part Mftr Mftr Part No 1 Keyboard top plate 1689 8040 24655 1689 8040 2 Display panel 1689 7000 24655 1689 7000 3 Top cover 1689 8003 24655 1689 8003 4 Switch actuator rod assembly 1689 2006 24655 1689 2006 5 Air filter washable dry type 5270 5456 24655 5270 5456 6 Test fixture upper assembly 1689 2000 24655 1689 2000 includes dross tray 1657 7700 24655 1657 7700 and foamed plastic pad 1657 7800 24655 1657 7800 T
228. nH f 256 mH f 16 mH f Lmin 1 mnH f 4 1 H f 256 mH f 16 mH f 1 mH f Where f test frequency in kHz This range is not used above 20 kHz Above 20 kHz Cmin 6 4 nF f and Lmax 4100 mH f Table D Kev as a Function of Voltage Mode Constant Voltage Voltage Mode Non Constant Constant Voltage Kev 0 9 Table E Ks as a Function of Measurement Rate Measurement Rate Slow Medium Fast Max imum Ks 0 10 23 Fast measurement with minimum integration time programmed xiv Frequency Voltage 1 to 1 26V 0 25 to lt 1V 0 1 to lt 25V 0 03 to lt 1V 0 01 to lt 03V Table F Kfv as a Function of Frequency and RMS Voltage for Range 1 12to 30to 100to 250to gt lto gt 3to gt 6to gt 1Oto gt 20to gt 50to lt 30Hz 100Hz 250Hz 1kHz 1kHz 3kHz 6kHz 10kHz 20kHz 50kHz 100kHz Not specified 7 3 2 1 0 2 6 15 50 10 6 4 2 1 3 10 20 65 This range 20 13 9 6 4 6 15 30 100 is not used 70 50 35 25 18 17 25 60 above 20kHz 100 70 50 50 70 hs Table G Kfv as a Function of Frequency and RMS Voltage for Range 2 3 and 4 Frequency Voltage 1 to 1 26V 0 25 to lt 1V 0 1 to 25 0 03 to lt 1V 0 01 to lt 03V For accessory lists see paragraph 1 4 12to 30to 100to 250to gt lto gt 3to gt 6to gt 10to gt 20to gt 50to 30Hz 100Hz lt 250Hz 1kHz 1kHz 3kHz 6kHz 10kHz 20kHz 50kHz 100kHz 7 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 5 15 30 9 5 3 2 1 2 3 5 6 18 35 12 8 6 5 4 5 6 8 10 2
229. nana plugs to the Digibridge test fixture Hand tighten the screws to provide the ground guard connection b Connect the high leads red and red white together Separately connect the low leads black and black white together c Before measurement zero the Digibridge as follows Open Circuit Leave the high red banana plug stack disconnected from the low black stack Press FUNCTION key if necessary to select MEASURE Press MEASURE MODE key if necessary to select TRIGGERED mode Press these keys deliberately 1 6 8 9 2 SHIFT OPEN Confirm that the GO indicator is lit Keep hands and objects at least 10 cm 4 in from test fixture Press the START button Wait for the GO indicator to be lit The RLC display should be 00000 pF Short Circuit Connect the two banana plug stacks together leave the guard black green open Press these keys deliberately 1 6 8 9 SHIFT SHORT Confirm that the GO indicator is lit Press the START button Wait for the GO indicator to be lit Tte RLC display should be 00000 ohms Press the MEASURE MODE key to select CONT d Connect the three terminall uF capacitance standard GR 1409 Y as follows This standard should be certified to an accuracy of 03 including the effects of aging RED IH capacitor H binding post RED amp WHITE PH stacked on the red banana plug BLACK IL capacitor L binding post BLACK amp WHITE PL stacked on the bla
230. nd Q are automatically calculated by the microprocessor from Zx frequency and other information 4 4 THEORY u PROCESSOR FREQUENCY SAMPLING PROGRAMMING SYNCRONIZATION FREQUENCY DIVIDERS pp PROCESSOR CLOCK 60062 0 38 4 MHz SINEWAVE GENERATOR A CRYSTAL TIME BASE Figure 4 3 Frequency and timing source Several clocks and synchronizing pulses as well as the measurement signal f are derived from the accurate time base signal 4 2 2 Frequency and Time Source Figure 4 3 A necessary standard for accuracy is the frequency of the test signal and equally important are the generation of multi phase references for detection and clocks for the microprocessor Frequency and timing requirements are implemented by derivation from a single very accurate oscillator operating at 38 4 MHz Digital dividers and logic circuitry provide the many clocks and triggers as well as driving the sine wave generator described below STEP APPROXIMATION TO PURE SINEWARE FILTER 60040 0 Figure 4 4 Sine wave generator Given square waves at frequencies of 64 f 32 f 16 f 8 f 4 f 2 f and f a ROM containing the mathematical sine function drives a D A converter to form a finely stepped approximation to a sine wave at frequency f The filter provides smoothing of the test signal 4 2 3 Sine Wave Generation Figure 4 4 Source of the Test Signal Starting with a digital signal at 64 times the selected test frequency
231. necessarily e If necessary remove the 2 remaining contacts as in the previous step Reassembly note align the contacts so that the surfaces that will press against the DUT leads are collinear so that the guide block can be positioned with its slots matching the gaps in BOTH contact pairs tighten hex drive screws as specified above SERVICE 5 27 5 6 2 Cleaning the Air Filter About once a year or more often in dusty environments clean the air filter as follows The air filter is a spongy piece of plastic found in the air intake vent on the right side of the Digibridge See Figure 6 1 Pull the filter out with your fingers or pliers Wash it thoroughly in warm water and a mild detergent Rinse Squeeze the water out and let it dry completely Then stuff the air filter into position through the air intake opening using your fingers press the edges and corners of the filter into position 5 6 3 Care of the Display Panel Use caution when cleaning the display window not to scratch it nor to get cleaning substances into the instrument Use soft cloth or absorbent cotton moistened with a mild glass cleaner such as Windex Drackett Products Co Cincinnati Ohio DO NOT use a paper towel do NOT use enough liquid to drip or run If it should be necessary to place marks on the window use paper based masking tape NOT any kind of marking pen which could be abrasive or react chemically with the plastic To minimize retention of any gum
232. nect to first main terminal of DUr PH potential high Red white Connect to second main terminal of DUT JH current high Red red Connect to second main terminal of DUT Guard shield or gnd Outer contacts Connect to shield or case of DUT if any only if isolated from main terminals Notice that the 2 cables with red must connect to the same end of the DUT through a coaxial tee if the DUT is a 2 terminal or 3 terminal device the 2 cables labeled with black connect to the other end similarly Connection of guard via the outer portion of the coaxial connector should be to the shield or case of the DUT but NOT to either of the two main terminals 3 2 6 The 1657 9600 Extender Cable Banana Plugs and the BNC Cable with Banana Plug Adaptors 1657 9600 Extender Cable Recommended for 1689 Digibridge The accessory extender cable 1657 9600 is available to connect to DUTs that are multiterminal physically large or otherwise unsuited for the built in test fixture Refer to Table 1 3 This cable is particularly convenient for connecting multiterminal components with binding posts that accommodate banana plugs a Remove the adaptors if present from the test fixture b Plug the single connector end of the extender cable into the Digibridge test fixture so that its blades enter both slots and the cable lies away from the display panel Lock the connector with the two captive thumb screws c Note the color coding of the five ban
233. nectors from each other in the cable at right of power supply cable leads to ON OFF switch NOTE the cable may be shorter and the connectors found farther to the left than pictured 4 Remove five screws that fasten bottom of power supply to the bracket below Four screws are at corners of power supply the fifth is nearly hidden between the transformer and the largest capacitor CAUTION In reassembling inspect carefully to be sure that none of the nearby wires touches the fan rotor or blades Inspect by looking under the 1657 4720 board To verify free rotation blow on the fan and watch it spin h For access to the display board keyboard and other parts in the front panel assembly unfasten it from the chassis as follows NOTE The obvious parts of this assembly are the plastic bezel at the very front the subpanel to which the other parts are attached the display board the display window in front of the board and the keyboard module Behind and below the display board is the display connector board Behind the keyboard is the keyboard mount a wide bracket with clearance holes for cables Remove the access panel from the bottom See above Remove the two screws from the BNC connector bracket or blank bracket whichever is at the front Disconnect the cables from display and key boards See above Place a small spacer such as a pad of paper under the chassis at each side but not under the front panel assembly
234. ng will change unit multipliers c Enter the reference for delta percent by keying Y SHIFT NOM VALUE in which Y represents 1 to 6 numerical keys and optionally the decimal point key depressed in sequence Confirmation is shown up to 5 digits on the RLC display d Select MEASURE with the FUNCTION key and delta with the DISPLAY key OPERATION 3 17 e Observe that the RLC display will now be in percent not an electrical measurement unit It is the difference of the measured principal value from the nominal value the stored reference expressed as a percent of the nominal value If the NEG RLC indicator is lit the measured value is less than the nominal value and conversely if not lit the measured value is greater The secondary measurement result appears in the QDR display area just as it would if the principal display were VALUE NOTE If you wish to see the delta display simultaneously with bin sorting data output to handler or IEEE 488 bus enter the bin limits first as described in paragraph 3 8 Then unless the last setting of nominal value happens to be the desired reference for percent difference use the above procedure for setting up delta displays Delta RLC Display Selected by the DISPLAY Key This selection is indicated by lighting BOTH indicators together VALUE and delta The deltaRLC display is a difference from the stored nominal value measured in the indicated electrical units such as
235. nge 1 press 1 SHIFT SPECIAL 1 For range 2 press 2 SHIFT SPECIAL 1 For range 3 press 3 SHIFT SPECIAL 1 For range 4 press 4 SHIFT SPECIAL 1 Note for autoranging press 0 SHIFT SPECIAL 1 3 5 7 Time Required tor Obtaining Median Values and Averaging Accuracy can be enhanced at the cost of increased measurement time by either or both of these methods The time considerations and a brief instruction for selecting each method while in the ENTER FUNCTION are given here Median Value This measurement time is somewhat less than triple the single measurement time because three nearly complete measurements are made from which the Digibridge selects the median for final results To be more specific each median value measurement requires approximately as much time as three single measurements MINUS two of the three settling or delay time intervals and also MINUS about half of the calculation time The relative magnitudes of settling time delay time and calculation time in the single measurement cycle are illustrated in paragraph 3 5 10 Enabling and disabling median value selection is a special function paragraph 3 10 The enabling command is 1 SHIFT SPECIAL 8 See paragraph 3 6 4 Averaging The measurement time is multiplied by the number of measurements 2 to 255 specified when averaging was programmed To program the Digibridge to average for example 8
236. not attempt to select the unit multiplier The Digibridge will automatically switch to the appropriate multiplierfrom nF to pF for example unless RANGE is HELD when it makes a measurement The result will be displayed in terms of the parameters and tquivalent circuit that you select even if the DUT has the opposite kind of reactance see below Note Observing the results displays can be helpful in deciding whether you have made the best parameter selection See below Displays are discussed further in paragraph 3 3 3 The NEG RLC Indicator If the NEG RLC indicator on the main display panel is lit with an L or C value displayed the DUT reactance is opposite to the selected parameter As a rule you should change parameter usually select L instead of C or vice versa so that a positive L or C value display can be obtained However the displayed negative value of L or C is mathematically correct and without the minus sign is in fact the value that will resonate with the DUT at the test frequency Notice that the appearance of a device can be misleading For example an inductor is capacitive if test frequency is above resonance or a component part can be mislabeled or unlabeled When the display is VALUE or BIN No avoid incorrect choice of parameter by watching for the NEG RLC indicator on the display panel If this indicator is lit the principal parameter L or C was selected incorrectly Try the opposite choice However when
237. nto the built in or 1689 9600 9605 test fixture 1 replacement Battery Note shelf life 10 years I ife in 8410 3480 instrument is 5 to 10 years Refer to paragraph 3 13 Use the following battery if available Panasonic part number BR 2 3A F1 Matsushita Electric Corp of America 1 Panasonic Wav Secaucus N J 07094 Table 1 4 ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS FOR 1689M DIGIBRIDGE Quantity Description Part Number 1 supplied Power cord 200 cm 6 5 ft long 3 wire 4200 0300 AWG No 18 with molded connector bodies One end with Belden SPH 386 socket fits instrument Other end conforms to ANSI standard C73 11 1966 125 V max 1 supplied Bias cable with built in fuse to connect 1658 2450 external bias supply and switching circuit 1 supplied BNC cable assembly 4 color coded cables with 1689 9602 known stray parameters 90 cm 36 in long Supplied with BNC to banana plug adaptors 1 12 INTRODUCTION Quantity Table 1 4 continued ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS FOR 1689M DIGIBRIDGE Description Part Number recommended recommended 1 recommended recommended recommended 1 available 2 suppl ied with fixture 1 recommended 1 replacement 1 recommended Tweezers for handl ing and measuring chip 1689 9603 components with terminals on opposite faces BNC connectors 127 cm 50 inch cable No adaptor needed High speed measurement and IEEE 488 handler 1689 9620 interface opt
238. ny keyboard indicators lit keyboard is locked Left display O right also 0 GO open circuit zeroing enabled Left dispJay 5 right also 5 GO short circuit zeroing enabled Left display 6 right also 6 GO calibration enabled Left display 0 14 right blank measurement signal overload Left display 22222 right 1111 convertor detector malfunction Left display 22222 right 2222 convertor detector malfunction The preceding three lines are explained in paragraph 3 13 Indicators on the keyboard provide important information NOT summarized here The following interrogations will work only if you select ENTER function SHIFT NOM VAL stored nominal value appears displayed at left SHIFT BIN NO 0 1 limits for bin 1 both displayed left and right SHIFT BIN NO 1 2 limits for bin 12 both displayed SHIFT BIN SUM 0 3 count in bin left bin number right SHIFT FREQUENCY test frequency kHz displayed at left SHIFT VOLTAGE test voltage that is applied behind source resistance SHIFT AVERAGE number of measurements or medians averaged per result SHIFT DELAY milliseconds of delay after START before data is acquired The following special functions are explained more fully in paragraph 3 10 Each response display is detail code at left and special function number at right Interrogation Detail Code SHIFT SPECIAL
239. o measurement normalized to 1 COMMENT The zero measurement includes a sequence of five dual slope conversions measurements of voltage coming into the detector from the instrumentation amplifier Frequency is 1 kHz test signal level is 75 mV The signal component is removed by averaging the results of two dual slope conversions sampled in opposite phases The detector is supposed to be biased so that its zero output is essentially in the center of its operating range For convenience the CPU divides the zero measurement by its normal value and displays the result Consequently the ideal value for XXXX is 1 000 If it is less than 0 875 or more than 1 125 the test fails ANALYSIS PROCEDURE Check the following circuits 1 Zero half scale bias current circuit CR38 R116 NOTE R116 is a 10 kilohm potentiometer which should be adjusted for 2 5 V measured at the cathode of CR38 These components are found about 93 mm 3 5 8 in from the right front corner measured toward center of board 2 Detector scale integrator current circuit CR40 R119 U63 3 Phase control circuit U26 U27 U21 U23 U18 U22 4 Detector switches U63 555 D XXXX Signal strength check failure the Digibridge will loop automatically repeating the test and updating the display The digit D indicates the range and voltage level used See below Test frequency is 1 kHz COMMENT Possible cause is having EXTERNAI BIAS switch ON during power
240. ods that can be required by this very fast measuring instrument NOTE Under some conditions testing can consume so much time that the operator might wonder whether the Digibridge is really operating See below The longest single measurement cycle including programmable delay set to 99999 ms and the specialfunction selection of median value is about 5 minutes The Digibridge will execute up to 255 full length cycles if you select maximum averaging for a total of about 22 hours from START to display of measured result ODED ATION 2 97 3 5 2 Measure Rate Selection at Keyboard Choose one of 3 basic measurement rates with the MEASURE RATE key SLOW MEDIUM or FAST The continuous mode rates are respectively about 1 5 and 12 measurements per second if the other test conditions and programmable selections are left at normal power up defaults for the Digibridge with high speed option The tradeoff is speed vs accuracy The Digibridge will make a more precise and accurate measurement at a slower rate For the above conditions in very simplified terms the basic accuracy is 0 02 and the tradeoff is as follows SLOW rate 1 measurement per second 0 02 accuracy or better MEDIUM rate 5 measurements per second 0 05 accuracy or better FAST rate 12 measurements per second 0 12 accuracy or better For details on accuracy refer to the specifications In the accuracy formulas the effect of measure rate selection appears
241. ohms millihenries or picofarads The NEG RLC indicator is lit if the measured value is less than reference The procedure for selecting deltaRLC displays is like the delta procedure above except that the DISPLAY key is pressed repeatedly until two DISPLAY indicators together labeled deltaRLC are lit The secondary measurement result appears in the QDR display area just as it would if the principal display were VALUE Bin No Selected by using the DISPLAY key When measurement is completed the bin assignment will be shown on the left RLC display only as a one digit or two digit number with the following significance 0 No Go because of the secondary QDR Limit 1 2Go bin 1 2 Go bin 2 Go bin 3 4 5 12 or 13 as indi cated 14 No go by default suits no other bin Ratio Displays The Digibridge can be programmed to display a ratio instead of either measured value or delta percentage Refer to paragraph 3 3 7 SECONDARY MEASUREMENT RESULTS The secondary Digibridge measurement will be presented on the right QDR display panel for each measurement if the DISPLAY selection is VALUE delta or deltaRLC There is no secondary display if the selection is BIN NO The NEG QDR Indicator The NEG QDR indicator has the following meanings Parameter Selection NEG QDR not lit NEG QDR lit R Q DUT is inductive DUT is capacitive L Q C D or C R Q D or R is positive Q D or R is negative see below If the second
242. ompared to the Digibridge measurement rate then it is likely that any polluted measurement will be one of three measurements in the median taking the other two being valid and practically identical The median of any three consecutive measurements is therefore very likely to be correct 3 6 5 Accuracy Enhancement for Large or Small Impedances at Particular Frequencies Regular Zeroing at Test Frequency When measuring very large or small values of impedance the Digibridge will provide much better accuracy than the specifications ifthe OPEN and SHORT zeroing procedure has been recently repeated with test frequency set to the actual test condition Anon amrnarna an Examples of the accuracy that is typically obtained with measure rate SLOW after using the actual test frequency when zeroing At 30 Hz R 100 megohms 1 range l extension a factor of 240 over Rmax At 120 Hz C 0 1 farad 1 range 4 extension a factor of 480 over Cmax At 10 kHz C 0 1 pF 1 range l extension a factor of 400 below Cmin At 100 kHz L 0 1 uH 1 range 4 extension a factor of 100 below Lmin NOTES Even better accuracy is possible if several measurements are averaged See paragraph 3 6 3 above Use of the ratio display special function is recommended when you measure very large values which otherwise cannot be displayed or very small values for which ratio display can provide greatly improved resolution See paragraph 3 3 7
243. ots as described below The test fixture provided on the front ledge of the 1689 Digibridge provides convenient reliable guarded 4 terminal connection to any common radial lead or with adaptors that are provided an axial lead component part The slots in the test fixture accommodate wires with diameters from 0 25 mm 01 in AWG 30 to 1 mm 04 in AWG 18 spaced from 4 to 98 mm apart 0 16 to 3 9 in or equivalent strip conductors Each radial wire must be at least 4 mm long 0 16 in The divider between the test slots contains a shield at guard potential with its edges semi exposed The tapped holes 6 32 thread at the left and right ends of the test fixture are also grounded to connect the shields of extender cables 3 4 OPERATION Figure 3 1 A radial lead DUT is inserted into the test fixture NOTE If any adaptor s described below are in place remove them before attempting to insert a radiallead DUT 3 2 3 Using the Test Fixture Adaptors for Axial Lead DUTs Figure 3 2 If the DUT is an axial lead component or has leads at opposite ends insert the leads into the test fixture adaptor s slots as shown in the accompanying figure and described below NOTE This description applies to the built in test fixture of the 1689 Digibridge and also to remote test fixtures 1689 9600 and 1689 9605 Install the test fixture adaptors supplied as shown put one in each slot of the test fixture by pushing vertically downw
244. ource To provide a constant current source for any measurement select and hold a range such that the source resistance is much larger than the DUT impedance See table of ranges above Thus a Select ENTER function with the FUNCTION key b Select and hold a range as follows See also paragraph 3 10 For source resistance 97 4 kilohms range 1 press 1 2 SHIFT SPECIAL 1 For source resistance 6 4 kilohms range 2 press 2 2 SHIFT SPECIAL 1 For source resistance 400 ohms range 3 press 3 Z SHIFT SPECIAL 1 ODED A TIAN 2 VF Source resistance is 25 ohms for range 4 which could be held similarly if desired However if the DUT impedance is small compared to 25 ohms the Digibridge will autorange to range 4 anyway c Program the source voltage to be the product of the desired source current times the source resistance of the selected range Refer to paragraph 3 4 2 above for programming the voltage For example if the DUT is a capacitor of nominal value near 0 4 uF measured at about 1 kHz its reactance is about 400 ohms To measure it with constant current source select and hold range 2 source resistance 6 4 kilohms If the desired test current is 0 1 mA program the source voltage too be 0 1 mA times 6 4 kilohms 0 64 V Note that range 1 would provide still higher source resistance but measurements would be less accurate as shown by the factor Cx Cmax in the accuracy formula see specif
245. output signals come from open collector drivers that pull each signal line to a low voltage when that signal is active and let it float when inactive Each external circuit must be powered by a positive voltage up to 30 V max with sufficient impedance pull up resistors to limit the active signal logic low current to 16 mA max CAUTION Provide protection from voltage spikes over 30 V The cautionary note above means typically that each relay or other inductive load requires a clamping diode rectifier across it cathode connected to the power supply end of the load The input signal is also active low and also requires a positive voltage external circuit which must pull the signal line down below 0 4 V but not less than 0 0 V i e not negative The logic low current is 0 4 mA max For the inactive state logic high the external circuit must pull the signal line above 2 5 V but not above 5 v 1 ps minimum 1 ps minimum Clean START a b Bouncy START a c ACQ OVER d e 24 BIN 1 EOT Measurement 3 60045 0 Figure 2 3 Handler interface timing diagram External circuit must keep a b gt us and if START is not debounced a c lt the settling time or programmed delay For single measurements the DUT can be disconnected after e The selected BIN line goes low at f the other BIN lines stay high For MEDIAN and or AVERAGE measurement routines ACQ OVER goes low e at the end of the last measur
246. ows FUNCTION ENTER Press 1 0 SHIFT FREQUENCY FUNCTION MEASURE The D reading should now indicate approximately 0 0103 d Change the frequency to 100 kHz and verify D measurement as follows FUNCTION ENTER Press 1 0 0 SHIFT FREQUENCY FUNCTION MEASURE The D reading should now indicate approximately 0 1034 SERVICE 5 7 Table 5 2 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION Check RLC Display QDR Display Number Parameter DUT Extremes Extremes 1 Rs Q 49 9 ohms 49 840 to 49 959 ohms 2 499 ohms 498 40 to 499 59 ohms 3 4 99 kilohms 4 9840 to 4 9959K ohms 4 49 9 kilohms 49 840 to 49 959K ohms 5 499 kilohms 498 40 to 499 59K ohms 6 Cs D 0 0033 uF 3282 8 to 3317 2 pF 0000 to 0100 rf 0 033 uF 32 828 to 33 172 nF 0000 to 0100 8 0 33 uF 328 28 to 331 72 nF 0000 to 0100 9 10 uF 9 498 to 10 502 uF 0000 to 0300 10 Ls D 1000 uH 9498 to 1 0502 mH 11 100 mH 89 98 to 110 02 nH ad The right hand display QDR can be expected to change frequently accuracy of that display is not significant in these performance checks 5 4 3 Measurement Time Checkout This procedure verifies that the 1689 measurement rate is functioning properly All measurements are made with the default power up values of test frequency and test voltage 1 kHz and 1 V The procedure determines the time required per measurement for several operating conditions without and then with the high speed option board Make a note of each ca
247. ph 5 5 2 Disassembly of 1689M Digibridge step b Access to the bottom of the main board as detailed in step b and step h is no longer possible on late version instruments The access panel has been deleted and the bottom of the instrument is now a solid panel Page 5 19 A Paragraph 5 5 2 Disassembly of 1689M Digibridge step d Delete step d there is no longer a foam plastic air filter Page 5 20 Figure 5 11 Interior Top View e Power Supply Assembly shown PN 1689 2005 has been replaced by Power Supply Assembly PN 700011 Page 5 21 Paragraph 5 5 2 Disassembly of 1689M Digibridge Delete step 2 there is no longer a protective cover Step 3 the cable to the right may be secured to the power supply frame with a cable tie The tie needs to be removed before removing the power supply from the unit Step 4 the power supply is secured by only 4 screws rather than 5 CAUTION note does not apply the fan has been removed Page 5 22 Paragraph 5 5 3 Relocation of BNC Connector Bracket Access to the bottom of the main board as detailed in step b is no longer possible on late version instruments The access panel has been deleted and the bottom of the instrument is now a solid panel Relocation of the BNC connector bracket is only possible by removing the main board as detailed in Paragraph 5 5 2 step k Page 5 25 Figure 5 14 High Speed Measurement amp IEEE Handler Interface Opt Interface option shown PN 16
248. played during entry or upon interrogation are test frequency test voltage number of measurcments averaged delay time nominal value bin limi and bin sum and codes for SPECIAL FUNCTIONS GO NO GO lights are also provided and these are active with all modes of measurement display as long as test limits have been set Ranges Primary Disp ay C 00001 pF to 99999 uF R 000010 to 99999 kO L 00001 nH to 99999 H difference C R or L 0001 to 99999926 RLC difference same as R L or C If any of these quantities is negative the NEG RLC indicator light is lit vii These ranges may be extended by a factor of more than 10 000 larger or smaller by using the special ratio mode Secondary Display D with C or Q with L or R 0001 to 9999 D with C or Q with R in ppm 1 ppm to 9999 ppm R with C 0001 Q to 9999 kQ If any of these quantities is negative the NEG QDR indicator is lit Equivalent Circuit Either the equivalent SERIES or the equivalent PARALLEL circuit representation of L R or C may be selected by keyboard control Test Frequencies Over five hundred test frequencies between 12 Hz and 100 kHz may be selected using the keyboard These are f SOM where 2 lt n lt 13 f a ES Aa 256 3kHz yf le 13 lt n lt 250 If the exact frequency entered is not available the nearest available frequency will be used Frequency tolerance is 01 Measurement Time Measurement rate is se
249. plers in a handler NOTE Do NOT attempt to draw more than 25 rnA The bus is connected via a factory installed jumper which is accessible as follows a Remove the interface option after removing the 2 large screws with resilient washers in the rear panel See Figure 1 2 CAUTION Observe the handling precautions given at the beginning of the Service Section b Find wire tie points WT2 and WT3 on the circuit board near the Ilandler interface connector c If the jumper is missing connect a wire jumper between WT2 and WT3 d Replace the interface option assembly in its former place Reassembly note align board edges carefully with connector and guide that are inside of instrument while pushing interface option into position SERVICE 5 61 Parts Lists and Diagrams Section 6 6 1 GENERAL 6 2 REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS 6 3 DIAGRAMS 4 tee Po Uh Ae Ge Ee ee oe asd Oo t Figure 6 1 1689 Front View showing mechanical parts Figure 6 1A 1689M Front View showing mechanical parts Figure 6 2 1689 Rear View showing mechanical parts Figure 6 2A 1689M Rear View showing mechanical parts Federal Supply Code for Manufacturers C00 00000000000 1 OWN HD 4A tO Rr Oe onm Figure 6 3 Main Board schematic sheet 1 1689 4702 SD Figure 6 4 Main Beard layout sheet 1 1689 4702 Figure 6 5 Main Board layout sheet 2 1689 4702 Figure 6 6 Main Board schematic sheet 2 1689 4702 SD 10 Figure 6 7 Main Board sc
250. principal R L C and secondary R values not D or Q depend on this selection 21 SHIFT key Key labeled SHIFT Pressing this shi fts the role of any key labeled with both white and yellow or black and gray F the white 1U yellow or black to gray Do NOT hold the the SHIFT key down press it first then the other key 22 Parameter Set of 3 keys Selection of principal measurement parameter keys labeled R Q L Q R L or C and for C only secondary C D and C R with subscripts sand P parameter D or R Repeated pushing of any one parameter key changes range in sequence 1 234 1 and hence measurement units INTRODUCTION 1 7 11 Internal TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR 90 125V 140 250v 50 60 Hz MME Gerts 63535620 Made USA NUN TQ PREVENT EOVIPMEAT D MAGE reas court CABLE DE LA POLARIS x 4 in LARI un M s QY WITH SAME STYLE FUSE RATED 290v AND amp Oa CIRCUIT Dij MEME TYPE AYANT LES CARACTE OES 2SOV ETIO SCREWS FOR INTERFACE OPTION OR COVER PLATE Figure 1 3 Rear controls and connectors 1689 Digibridge 180 BOTTOM TO CI earn 250v 90 125V Carry 180 2804 Sow Biow TATION POR CONT ORES 50 50 Mz TTS MAX AG AMET See HAZARD WOPLACE OM sone WIR SAME TYPE AND RATING OF PURE Medet EIEN Made USA Fomo Soper CAUTION TO PREVENT EQUIPMENT DAMAGE REPLACE FUST iN RKAS ATTENTION POUR PREVENIR OES DOMMAGES A 1 rare dts rs e S CABLE ONLY WITH SAME STYLE FUSE RATED
251. r Eictrns Bennington VT 05201 Corcom Chicago IL 60639 ITT Elctens Pomons CA 91766 Controls Co of Amer Metrose Pk L 60160 Viking Inds Chatsworth CA 93311 Barber Colman Rockford IL 61101 Barnes Mig Mansfield OH 44901 Wakefield Eng Wakeleid MA 01880 Panduit Tintey Pki L 60477 Truelove amp Maclean Waterbury CT 06708 Precision Monolith Santa Clara CA 95050 Cievite Cleveland OH 44110 WLS Stamp Cleveland C 4 44104 Richeo Piste Chicago IL 60646 Tetedyne Kntcs Soland Bch CA 92075 Aladdin Elctrns Nashville TN 37210 Ross Milton Southampton PA 18966 Oigitran Pasadena CA 91105 Eagle Signal Baraboo Wi 53913 Cinch Graphik City of Industry CA 91744 Avnet Culver City CA 90230 Fairchild Mountain View CA 94040 Birtcher N Los Angeles CA 90032 Amer Semicond Arlington Hits L 60004 Magnetic Core Newburgh NY 12550 USM Fastener Sheiton CT 06484 Bodine Bridgeport CT 06605 Bodine Eictre Chicago L 60618 Cont Device Hawthorne CA 90250 State Labs New York NY 10003 Borg inst Delavan WI 53115 Deutsch Fastener Los Angeles CA 90045 Bell Eictrc Chicago lL 60632 Vernaline Prod Franklin Lakes NJ 07417 GE Buffalo NY 14220 C amp K Components Watertown MA 02172 St Tronics Georgetown MA 01830 Burgess Battery Freeport IL 61032 Fenwal Eletrns Framingham MA 01701 Burndy Norwalk CT 06852 Glasseai Prod Linden NJ 07036 Chicago Switch Chicago IL 60647 CTS of Berne Berne tN 46711 Chandler Evans W Hartford CT 06101
252. rance and bin number Changing the nominal value does not affect limits already stored Any DUT that qualifies for 2 overlapping bins is assigned to the lower bin Unsymmetrical tolerances To enter unsymmetrical limits for example 2 5 in bin 6 press 2 96 5 96 SHIFT BIN NO 0 6 Two percentages of the same sign can be entered Always enter the more positive tolerance first d You can close any bin that has been opened steps b c For RLC bins follow this example for bin 8 press 0 27 SHIFT BIN NO 0 B To disable QDR sorting close bin O thus for D or Rs or O with R press 9 9 9 9 SHIFT BIN NO 0 0 for Rp or Q with L press 0 SHIFT BIN NO 0 0 e To enable GO NO GO lights after opening at least one bin leave nominal value at any nonzero value To disable GO NO GO and all bin sorting press 0 SHIFT NOM VAL Note To see present numerical limits for bin 3 and nominal value press SHIFT BIN NO 01 3 and SHIFT NOM VAL f To measure DUT with bin sorting Press FUNCTION to select MEASURE and DISPLAY to select BIN NO Insert DUT Press START Observe GO NO GO and bin number resuits NO GO indicates either QRD failure bin O or RLC failure bin 14 See manual paragraph 3 8 Installation Section 2 2 1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTION 2 1 2 2 DIMENSIONS 2 1 2 3 POMER LINE CONNECTION 2 2 2 4 LINE VOLTAGE REGULATION 2 3 2 5 TEST
253. raph 5 5 5 Figure 5 10 Bottom view of 1689M Digibridge with access panel and cover removed 1 Front panel assembly 4 Blank bracket at rear BNC position 2 Main board 5 BNC connector bracket at front 3 Push rod for POWER ON OFF switch SERVICE 5 1Q WARNING SHOCK HAZARI Figure 5 11 Interior top view of 1689M Digibridge with cover removed 1 Front panel assembly 6 Protective cover 2 Ribbon cables to display panel 7 Air deflector 3 Retainer for cable connectors 8 Ribbon cable from power supply 4 Power supply 9 Ribbon cables to keyboard 5 A c power connector 10 Shield plate g For access to the desired areas on top of the main board do as much of the following as needed Unplug the cables NOTE For reassembly be sure that the keyboard cables are both oriented with color marked edges up at the keyboard and toward the rear at the main board Similarly the two display board cables must not cross or twist Remove the shield plate four screws Remove the power supply as follows 5 20 SERVICE WARNING Dangerous voltages are present on wires and terminals that will be exposed in the following steps BE SURE THAT THE POWER CORD IS DISCONNECTED BEFORE PROCEEDING 1 Unplug the ribbon cable leading from power supply to main board at J5 2 Remove the protective cover with the warning label from the upper right portion of the power supply 3 screws 3 Disconnect a c power con
254. red by the remo rable power cord and the convenient line voltage switch Safety is enhanced by the fused isolating power transformer and the 3 wire connection 1 2 INTRODUCTION 1 2 3 Interface Options Either of the two interface options adds I O capabilities to the instrument enabling it to control and respond to parts handling sorting equipment Also via separate connector either option can be connected in a measurement system using the IEEE 488 bus Either talker listener or talker only roles can be performed by the Digibridge by switch selection One of the interface options enables the Digibridge to measure at a higher speed than it does without an option The high speed option provides outputs to 15 bins for sorting the other option to 10 bins 1 2 4 References Electrical and physical characteristics are listed in Specifications at the front of this manual Interface connections and instrument dimensions are given in Installation Section 2 Controls are described below in Section 1 their use in Operation Section 3 A functional description is given in Theory Section 4 1 3 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS Figure 1 2 shows the controls and indicators on the front of the 1689 instrument Table 1 1 identifies them with descriptions and functions Figure 1 1 shows the front of the 1689M model which is functionally similar Similarly Figure 1 3 shows the controls and connectors on the rear of the 1689 and Table 1 2 ident
255. ror Acmx 05 x DUT reactance of measured Ls or Cs Acmr 05 r Rs of measured Rs If either of these is significant one can calculate and use it to correct each corresponding measured value However first make careful measurements with a known low impedance DUT to determine whether each correction should be positive or negative for your particular test fixture Capacitive Loading Error Term Ald 003 Krange f Csn 1000 pF 96 of principal measured value where Krange is for range 1 1 for range 2 0625 for range 3 0040 for range 4 00024 Factor f is frequency in kilohertz Csn is total capacitance from the low IL and PL terminals to ground in cable and test fixture beyond the normal DUT interface see notes above and below NOTE If the 1689 9603 tweezers or other extension having capacitance of about 200 to 300 pF is connected directly to the 1689M Digibridge without any other cable the difference from normal DUT interface is trivial and Ald error is negligible If Ald is significant one can calculate and use it to correct each measured C L or if the DUT is a resistor R The effect on D or Q is negligible For C the Digibridge reads high use a negative correction For L or R the Digibridge reads low use a positive correction Refer to Table 3 7 for typical values to be used in the preceding formulas Refer to Table 3 8 for some representative example
256. rs It is possible to set up one or more tighter tolerance bins within each member of a sequence BIN 3 BIN 3 BINS MEASURED VALUE AXIS LIMITS G Nom Value Percentages ENTRIES 60035 0 Figure 3 12 Nested limits A single nominal value Y is used and all limit pairs are symmetrical in this basic plan BINS MEASURED VALUE AXIS LIMITS Nom Value Percentages ENTRIES 60036 0 Figure 3 13 Sequential limits A different nominal value is entered for each bin and all limit pairs are symmetrical except for the unsymmetrical pair shown for example in bin 5 Bucket sorting means sorting into bins that are not nested The usual method is that mentioned above sequential limits However there is no requirement that the bins be adjacent Any of them can be defined with its own specific limits which may be overlapping adjacent or isolated from any other bin 3 50 OPERATION 3 8 3 Limit Entry Procedure To enable comparisons unless the keyboard is locked first enter limits as follows This procedure makes use of limit entry keys at the left of the SHIFT key with gray or yellow labels that apply only when the selected FUNCTION is ENTER a Press DISPLAY key to select VALUE Press FUNCTION key to select ENTER b To enter a single QDR limit always bin 0 press the parameter key such as Cs D appropriate to DUT To change range and unit multipliers press the same key repeatedly Refer to paragraph 3 3
257. rumentation setup The use of line voltage regulators between power lines and the test equipment is recommended as the only sure way to rule out the effects on measurement data of variations in line voltage 2 5 TEST FIXTURE CONNECTIONS 2 5 1 For the 1689 Digibridge Because an unusually versatile test fixture is provided on the front shelf of the instrument external test fixture connections are generally NOT required Simply plug the device to be measured DUT into the test fixture with or without its adaptors For details refer to paragraph 3 2 Accessory extender cables arc available to connect to a DUT that is multiterminal physically large or otherwise unsuited for the built in test fixture Extender cables are needed similarly to connect from the Digibridge test fixture to the DUT socket in a mechanical parts handler Cables and adaptors are listed in Table 1 3 Connection details are given in paragraph 3 2 NOTE The GenRad line of Digibridge test fixtures adaptors and other accessories does continue to be improved and expanded Inquire periodically at your local GenRad sales office for the latest information INSTALLATION 2 3 2 5 2 For the 1689M Digibridge An external test fixture is always required because connection from the 1689M Digibridge to the DUT is provided via BNC cables from connectors that can be positioned at either front or rear of the instrument as described in Section 5 For general purposes the r
258. s 1 SHIFT BIN No 0 2 h Set bin 3 limits 5 SHIFT BIN No 0 3 i Set bin 4 limits 7 96 9 SHIFT BIN No 0 4 j Close bin 5 if open 0 SHIFT BIN No 0 5 k Close bins 6 through 13 similarly if used before Sequential Limits Sequential limits can be entered by either of the following methods use the method that fits your application Method 1 changing the nominal value for each bin Advantage Straightforward definition of each bin in terms of percentages of the bin s nominal value Disadvantage overlaps or gaps in coverage among several bins are not obvious Remember that overlaps default to the lower numbered bin gaps default to bin 14 Example For sorting capacitors into part of the standard 546 series setting D 005 and nominal values for the bins at Cs 0 91 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 uF a With FUNCTION key select ENTER b With EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT key select SERIES c With parameter key Cs D select units uF d Enter D limit 0 0 5 2 SHIFT BIN No 0 0 e Enter nominal C value 9 1 SHIFT NOM VALUE f Set bin 1 limits 5 SHIFT BIN No O 1 g Redefine nominal 1 SHIFT NOM VALUE h Set bin 2 limits 5 SHIFT BIN No 0 2 i Redefine nominal I 2 SHIFT NOM VALUE j Set bin 3 limits 15 SHIFT BIN No 0 3 k Redefine nominal 1 2 SHIFT NOM VALU
259. s a standard resistor Rs carrying the same current as the DUT Each of these voltage measurements is meaningless by itself because the reference signals have no particular phase relationship to the measured analog signals and because the current through Zx is not controlled Each set of voltage measurements is made in rapid sequence with the same phase sensitive detector and analog to digital converter Therefore properly chosen differences between these measurements subtract out fixed offset errors and ratios between them cancel out the value of the common current the scale factor of the detector converter and the effect of the relative reference to signal phase angle The phase sensitive detector uses 4 reference signals precisely 90 degrees apart that have exactly the same frequency as the test signal but whose phase relationship to any of the analog voltages or currents such as the current through Zx and Rs is incidental Therefore no precise analog phase shifter or waveform squaring circuit is required Correct phase relationships are maintained by generating test signal and reference signals from the same high frequency source Because of the measurement technique and circuitry the only calibration adjustment in the Digibridge is the factory setting of the test voltage level reference The only precision components in this instrument are four standard resistors and a quartz crystal stabilized oscillator There is no reactance standard For exa
260. s are completed remember to disable the shorting routine by selecting the ENTER function and pressing 0 2 SHIFT SPECIAL 3 h Remove internal bias by pressing the SHIFT INT BIAS keys so that the BIAS ON indicator is NOT lit NOTE The BIAS ON indicator serves to indicate whether internal bias is connected or disconnected only if the EXTERNAL BIAS is switched OFF See below for external bias Notice that repeating the same keyboard sequence will cyclically enable and disable internal bias For best results after removing bias and b fore making further measurements allow least 2 seconds for internal circuit discharge and settling 3 7 2 External Bias If bias is required at some other voltage than the 2 V internal bias use external bias as described below Also Be sure that the voltage is never more than 60 V max A current limiting voltage supply is recommended set the limit at 200 mA max Be sure that the bias supply is floating DO NOT connect either lead to ground Generally the external circuit must include switching for both application of bias after each DUT is in the test fixture and discharge before it is removed A well filtered supply is recommended Bias supply hum can affect some measurements particularly if test frequency is the power frequency 3 46 OPERATION Setup Procedure a Connect the external bias voltage supply and switching circuit using the 1658 2450 cable supplied via the rear p
261. s by adding 5 nH to the displayed value If measurements are to be made with adaptors axial lead DUT for most situations make the shortcircuit calibration WITHOUT the adaptors Use a piece of no 18 AWG wire 5 cm long 2 in bent into a rectangular shape as shown in B Press this wire fully down into the Digibridge test fixture keeping the center of the wire above the center of the fixture and the straight sides of the wire vertical Measurement results with adaptors will typically contain a related error of less than 5 nH which can be verified by measuring a DUT consisting of a straight wire of known inductance refer to one of the accompanying tables of inductances Wire length is measured between points of contact in the adaptors If measurements are to be made with adaptors axial lead DUT for greatest accuracy requiring a manual calculation for every measurement make the short circuit calibration WITH adaptors spaced exactly as they will be for the DUT Use any piece of straight wire having a known self inductance Lo refer to Table 3 6 Measure the DUT using the series equivalent circuit Then make the following calculation for each measurement For an inductor Ls Lm Lo 2 For a capacitor Cs Cm 1 w LoCm approximately Cm w LoCm 3 40 OPERATION where Ls and Cs are the corrected series values 1m and Cm are the mea sured series values w represents omega 2 pi times frequency and 10 is defined above
262. s mt Accuracy 44 5 Inductance Meas mt Accuracy 45 6 D Measurement Accuracy 47 7 Limit Comparison Bins 49 RECAL IBRATION 5 51 1 Preparation 51 2 Zeroing and Selecting 53 3 Recalibration Range 4 53 4 Recalibration Range 3 54 5 Recalibration Range 2 55 6 6 Main Board schematic sheet 2 6 10 6 Recalibration Range 1 56 6 7 Main Board schematic sheet 3 6 11 7 Frequency Calibration 97 6 8 Main Board schematic sheet 4 6 12 8 Frequency Correction K Factor 58 6 9 Main Board schematic sheet 5 6 13 5 10 INTERNAL SETTINGS 9 60 6 10 Main Board schematic sheet 6 6 14 1 Address for IEEE 488 Interface 60 6 11 Main Board schematic sheet 7 6 14 2 Making 5 V Available Handler 61 6 12 Power Supply assembly 6 15 6 13 Power Supply Board layout 6 16 PARTS LISTS AND DIAGRAMS SECTION 6 6 14 Power Supply schematic 6 16 6 15 Display Board layout 6 17 6 1 GENERAL 6 1 6 16 Display Board schematic 6 18 6 2 REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS 6 1 6 17 H S Interface Bd layout shi 6 19 6 3 DIAGRAMS Bh ode ae Lae oer alg E ee 208 BSB 6 18 H S Interface Bd layout sh2 6 19 6 1 1689 Front showing mech parts 6 2 6 19 H S Interface schematic 1 6 20 6 1A 1689M Front showing mech parts 6 4 6 20 H S Interface schematic 2 60 21 6 2 1689 Rear showing mech parts 6 2 6 21 H S Interface schematic 3 6 22 6 2A 1689M Rear showing mech parts 6 4 76 22 Interface Board layout 6 23
263. s of accuracy error terms related to cables for certain range and frequency selections 3 42 OPERATION Notice that the addition of any unspecified cable and or homemade remote test fixture will probably increase each of these parameters and error terms Also cable and test fixture capacitance can aggravate a resonance problem in measurement of large values of inductance at high frequency refer to para 3 12 Table 3 7 TYPICAL PARAMETERS FOR DIGIBRIDGE EXTENDER CABLES r Le Csn Cable ohm uH pF For 1889 1689 9603 tweezers with integral cable connected to 1689 9601 BNC adaptor at instrument 40 1 4 280 1689 9602 BNC cable with 1689 9601 BNC adaptor at instrument and remote 1689 9600 test fixture 33 1 10 210 1657 9600 plugs into instrument remote banana plugs 036 1 10 475 1688 9600 plugs into instrument remote 874 connectors 019 0 45 155 For 1689M e ee 1689 9603 tweezers with integral cable connected directly to instrument 40 1 4 67 1689 9602 BNC cable with 1689 9600 or 1689 9605 remote test fixture 33 1 1 0 1657 9600 with 1689 9602 BNC cable at instrument and 1689 9600 9605 fixture has remote banana plugs 37 2 20 475 1688 9600 with 1689 9602 BNC cable at instrument and 1689 9600 9605 fixture has remote 874 connectors 35 1 55 155 The formulas for Acm and Acmx contain x which is
264. sage containing its device address see para 2 8 It terminates this condition when it receives UNL command which is necessary before it can make measurements or recognize its own keyboard OPERATION 3 71 Table 3 16 STATUS CODE Line Significance of a 1 Low Significance of a 0 High Dios Remote Local DI07 Request for service RQS No request by this Digibridge This device asserted SRQ for service DIO6 Recalibration required Normal operation DI05 Busy measurement in process Measurement completed DI04 Limits were tested Limits were not tested DI03 RLC measured value is available RLC value is not available DI02 QDR measured value is available QDR value is not available DIO1 Bin No assignment is available Bin No assignment is not available Instrument Program Commands The set of commands used in remote programming is an input data code to which the instrument will respond as a talker listener after being put into a remote control mode via the bus see Table 3 15 and addressed to listen to device dependent command strings Refer to Table 3 17 The programming command set includes all of the keyboard functions except switching external bias ON OFF and full recalibration which are not remotely programmable Keyboard functions are explained above particularly in paragraphs 3 3 3 4 3 8 3 9 3 10 and most of these commands are related to them in an obvious way Zero calibration by remote control is simi
265. sconnect any link between the G and L binding posts b Set the decade resistor dials to 00000 ohms Press the Rs Q key Press MEASURE MODE key to select TRIGGERED Press these keys deliberately 1 6 8 9 SHIFT SHORT Confirm that the GO indicator is lit Press the START button Wait for the GO indicator to be lit again The RLC display should be 00000 ohms Press MEASURE MODE key to select CONT c Refer to Table 5 9 Set the decade resistor dials to 0000010 as indicated in the first line of the table and verify that the RLC display is between the extremes listed Repeat for each line of the table setting the decade resistor dials Digibridge equivalent circuit and measurement rate and verifying the results as tabulated 5 8 5 Inductance Measurement Accuracy This procedure follows after paragraph 5 8 4 Thus test frequency 1 kHz test voltage 1 V measure rate SLOW range held indicator is NOT lit and parameter Rs Q is specified a Connect the 1657 9600 extender cable to the Digibridge test fixture Hand tighten the screws to provide ground guard connection b Connect the high leads red and red white together and separately connect the low leads black and black white together c Before measurement zero the Digibridge as follows Open Circuit Keep the high banana plug stack separated from the low stack Press FUNCTION key if necessary to select MEASURE function Press
266. sembly part number 1689 2000 as described in paragraph 5 5 1 and repeated here for convenience 5 26 SERVICE Remove the dross tray 1657 7700 the plastic dirt catcher by spreading it slightly and lifting it off Carefully remove the guide block assembly part no 1689 2000 includes dross tray by removing 2 screws and associated washers spacers and shield plate on bottom of main board see C Figure 5 7 and 2 test fixture center shield screws use hexagonal wrench 2 38 mm 094 in from top of the main board See also Figure 5 9 Reassembly note C screws are 13 mm long Position the guide block assembly for smooth entry of a radial lead DUT before tightening screws If an extension cable is available its paddle boards can be used for a centering jig Otherwise verify by eye looking directly down on the board through the slots in t he guide block to the contact gaps 1689 9600 Test Fixture the one without a START bar Remove the four rubber feet one screw apiece and slide the bottom housing off Remove the two hex socket head screws near the middle of the circuit board top side use hexagonal wrench 2 38 mm 094 in Remove the two screws and associated washers near the right and left ends of the circuit board bottom side Carefully remove the guide block assembly part number 1689 2000 Reassembly note See above 1689 9605 Test Fixture the one with a START bar and GO NO GO lights Remove the four rubber feet on
267. ss keyboard has been locked with a particular parameter selected This feature enables you to measure any passive component without knowing whether it is essentially a resistor inductor or capacitor It is provided at power up and remains enabled as long as you do NOT select any particular parameter Automatic parameter selection can be disabled by pressing any parameter key such as the Cs D key for example Once disabled this feature can be enabled again by selecting the ENTER function and then pressing these keys 1 SHIFT SPECIAL 7 To select parameter automatically the Digibridge calculates Q if IQI lt 0 125 R is selected otherwise for positive Q L is selected and for negative Q C is selected The sign of Q is the same as the sign of the reactive component of impedance Manual Selection To select the parameter to be measured a Press one of the 4 parameter keys R Q L Q C D C R b Use the EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT key to select SERIES or PARALLEL Note When you select SERIES equivalent ckt the 4 keys obtain Rs Q Ls Q Cs D and Cs Rs When you select PARALLEL equiv ckt the 4 keys obtain Rp Q Lp Q Cp D and Cp Rp OPERATION 3 13 Note equivalent circuits are discussed below in paragraph 3 3 2 For an inductor select LjQ for a capacitor either C D or C R for a resistor R Q There will be an immediate confirmation on the display panel where appropriate units indicators will be lit However do
268. st or stress in its new position h Fasten the BNC connector bracket in the rear position and the blank bracket in the front position 1 Reassemble the instrument and verify normal operation To relocate the BNC connector bracket to the front again reverse this procedure 5 5 4 Access to Internal Components See Figures 6 4 6 5 Main Board Locations of principal interior parts and points of interest for trouble analysis are shown in Section 6 layout drawings Figures 6 4 6 5 The analog circuitry is placed along the front forward of the display board connector and along the front half of the right hand edge However most of this board supports digital circuitry Power Supply For access to parts in the power supply refer to Section 6 SERVICE 5 23 i H i Figure 5 12 How to snake the BNC connector bracket from its front position to its rear position It is important to proceed carefully because of tight clearances and the presence of many sharp tips of wire that can interfere 5 24 SERVICE BRK ZA EE AF SERRE NIS TALUSTON Yak Onur MAMOLER INTERFACE 1285 458 INTERFACE e 9 3 wm Genes 1655 4020 eim ee aa yang e wwe Figure 5 14 High speed measurement and IEEE handler option 1689 9620 including the 1689 4620 circuit board 5 5 5 IEEE Handler Interface Options Figure 5 13 This Digibridge accepts either of two options that provide both IEEE 488 bus and handler interfaces Refer to the Specifications
269. standards is available upon request at the time of purchase 5 2 SERVICE 5 1 CUSTOMER SERVICE Our warranty at the front of this manual attests the quality of materials and workmanship in our products If malfunction does occur our service engineers are available for technical telephone assistance If the difficulty cannot be eliminated by use of the following service instructions please contact GenRad s Technical Assistance Center see last page in this manual giving full information of the trouble and of steps taken to remedy it Describe the instrument by name catalog number and serial number Refer to Digibridge front and rear panels 5 2 INSTRUMENT RETURN 5 2 1 Return Material Before returning an instrument to GenRad for service contact our nearest Service and Logistic Center for return shipping instructions see last page 5 2 2 Packaging To safeguard your instrument during storage and shipment please use packaging that is adequate to protect it from damage i e equivalent to the original packaging Any GenRad field office can advise Contract packaging companies in many cities can provide dependable custom packaging on short notice Mark the box Delicate Instrument 5 3 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT OF CIRCUIT BOARDS This instruction manual contains sufficient information to guide an experienced and skillful electronic technician in fault analysis and the repair of some circuits in this instrument Contact QuadTech s T
270. t Any overlapping portion of 2 bins is automatically assigned to the lower numbered bin For simple GO NO GO testing set up a QDR limit and one regular bin Entry of limits in additional bins will define additional GO conditions Be sure the unused bins are closed Bins 0 thru 13 are initially zero at power up This means that the default QDR limit is all fail for D Rs and Q with R it is all pass for Rp or Q with L and that bins 1 through 13 are initially closed OPERATION 3 49 The test frequency can be selected after limits are entered before any particular measurement 3 8 2 Sorting Methods Figures 3 12 3 13 The figures illustrate 2 basic methods of sorting nested and sequential Nested limits are the natural choice for sorting by tolerance around a single nominal value The lower numbered bins must be narrower than the higher numbered ones Symmetrical limit pairs are shown but unsymmetrical ones are possible For example range AB could be assigned to bin 3 and range FG to bin 4 by use of unsymmetrical limit pairs in these bins Sequential limits on the other hand are the natural choice for sorting by nominal value Any overlap is assigned to the lower numbered bin any gap between bins defaults to bin 14 The usual method of entry uses a redefined nominal value for each bin with a symmetrical pair of limits If it is necessary to define bins without overlap or gaps use a single nominal value and unsymmetrical limit pai
271. t wherever it is not necessary for clarity f With an oscilloscope observe and measure the signal at U32 pin 15 It must be a 1 kHz sinewave 3 0 Vpk pk g With an oscilloscope check at U31 pin 8 UI4 pin 14 and UI4 pin 8 for a 1 kHz sinewave 3 0 Vpkpk If the test signal is missing check backward to the precision oscillator U4 then forward through dividers and sinewave generator as shown on the main board schematic sheets 2 and 3 in Section 6 of this manual 5 1 6 Front End Amplifiers and Switches Check the MB board analog circuits that process ihe measurement signals from the test fixture to the point of AID conversion as follows a Verify that there is a normal test signal at the test fixture See paragraph 5 7 5 step d above b Check the range switching circuitry as follows Be sure that the RANGE HELD indicator is NOT lit Insert as DUT each of following resistors With a scope connected to the right side of each DUT in turn check for a 1 kHz sinewave with the level indicated below 10 ohm test signal should be 1 0 Vpk pk range 4 1 kohm test signal should be 2 4 Vpk pk range 3 10 kohm test signal should be 2 0 Vpk pk range 2 1 Mohm test signal should be 3 1 Vpk pk range 1 If discrepancy is found in step b check for 3 4 Vpk pk at the appropriate signal source check point as described in Table 5 4 for the particular range in use c Install a 1 kilohm resistor in the test fixture Check the PH
272. t Digibridge to talk Typical data stream from Digibridge in the format of Tables 3 11 3 12 3 13 sent to controller which will execute some kind of read command specified by programmer according to destination such as a printer Message on DIO1 DI08 lines is coded and interpreted differently depending on simultaneous state of ATN line true asserted low false high Bytes 3 and 4 can be programmed in a single command to controller bytes 8 and 9 similarly as 3 by reading a 5 bit binary number lines DI05 DI01 See Table 2 2 Notice that we refer to factory set address OPERATION 3 77 3 12 4 Data Output in Compacted Binary Format The compacted binary format for data output can be selected to save time Selection must be made via IEEE 488 bus not via the keyboard The time saving is indicated by the fact that this format conveys a full set of test results in 8 binary bytes compared to 44 binary bytes required by the regular format Fewer characters are sent if you select less than complete results such as bin number only output only for FAIL etc The data stream for one measurement consists of two to eight 8 bit bytes depending on what output is programmed The format is explained partly in truth Table 3 19 and partly in the text that follows NOTE The 8 bits in each byte are 76543210 where O is LSB least significant bit The vertical line or space between bytes is for clarity only not pr
273. t piece 1689 8305 24655 1689 8305 4 Set of four feet and tilting bail 4171 0445 24655 4171 0445 5 Switch actuator rod assembly POWER 1689 1001 24655 1689 1001 6 Single BNC connector receptacle 4230 2301 24655 4230 2301 REAR Figure 6 2A Item Description GenRad Part Mftr Mftr Part No 1 Bottom access door 1689 8319 24655 1689 8319 2 Air filter washable dry type 5270 5456 24655 5270 5456 3 Power connector J101 4240 0250 82389 EAC 302 4 Fuse extractor post F1 5650 0100 75915 342 004 5 Line voltage switch S2 7910 0832 82389 11A 1266 6 Cover over transistor U1 1657 8120 24655 1657 8120 7 High speed meas interface option shown Blank plate used if no option present 1658 8040 24655 1658 8040 8 Blank plate for rear position of BNCs 1689 8312 24655 1689 8312 6 3 DIAGRAMS In this section the schematic diagrams are located on right hand fold out pages for convenience The associated parts list layout drawing assembly view etc for each schematic diagram are located on the apron of the same page the facing page or otherwise nearby PARTS LISTS AND DIAGRAMS 6 5 Code 00136 00192 00194 00327 00434 00779 01009 01121 01255 01281 01295 01526 01930 01963 oz 02114 02606 02639 02660 02735 02768 03042 03508 03550 03636 0387 03888 03911 04009 04643 04713 04919 05079 05245 05276 05402 05574 06624 95748 05820 06383 06406 05665 06743 06795 05915 06928 06978 0704 07126 07127 07233 07261 07263
274. t some of the least significant digits using a special function command described in paragraph 3 10 For example to truncate the RLC display to 4 digits and the QDR display to 3 digits press UL JOI SHIFT SPECIAL 4 To disable such digit blanking return to normal press 0 0 SHIFT SPECIAL 4 3 3 7 Ratio Displays Virtual Range Extensions and Conductance Measurements via a Special Function The Digibridge can easily be programmed to display the principal test result RLC in the form of a ratio instead of the actual measured value The ratio is either measured value stored nominal value or the reciprocal of that By suitable choice of the nominal value you can obtain virtual range extensions for measurement of very large values or for fine resolution in measurement of very small values One use of the ratio display capability is to obtain results in terms of a multiple of some reference which can be obtained if desired by measuring a real reference DUT For Very Large R L or C Another use of the ratio display is to obtain measurements of very high values in high overrange i e exceeding 99999 of the highest range For example consider the measurement of capacitors with values near 200 mF i e 0 2 farad Any value greater than 99999 uF 99 999 mF normally causes a blank display because the unit multiplier on the highest C range is fixed and the display is limited to 5 digits However if you en
275. tary Specifications Joint Army Navy Specifications lott Rectither El Segundo CA 90245 Chicago Lock Chicago i L 60641 Filtron Fiushung NY 11354 Ledex Dayton OH 45402 Barry Wright Watertown MA 02172 Sylvania Emporium PA 15834 No Amer Philips Cheshire CT 06410 IN Pattern amp Modei LaPori iN 46350 Switchcraft Chicago IL 60630 Reeves Hotfman Carlisie PA 17013 Metals amp Controis Attleboro MA 02703 M4waukee Resistor Milwaukee WI 53204 Aotron Woodstock NY 12498 IN General Magnet Valparaiso IN 46383 Varo Garland Y X 75040 Hartwell Ptacentia CA 92670 Merssner Mt Carmel L 62863 Carr Fastener Cambridge MA 02142 Victory Eng Springfield NJ 07081 Parker Seal Cutver City CA 90231 H H Smith Brooklyn NY 11207 Busring Spcity San Francisco CA Solar Elctrc Warren PA 16365 Burroughs Plainfield NJ 07061 Union Carbide New York NY 10017 Mass Engrg Quincy MA 02171 National Eletres Geneva iL 60134 TRW Ogaliala NB 69153 Lehigh Metais Cambridge MA 02140 Sarkes Tarzian Bloomington iN 47401 TA Mfg Los Angeles CA 90039 Kepco Flushing N Y 11352 Payson Casters Gurnee LL 60031 Prec Metal Prod Stoneham MA 02180 RCA Harrison NJ 07029 REC New Rochelle NY 10801 Cont Ekctrcs Brooklyn NY 11222 Cutler Hammer Lincoin L 62656 GTE Syivania Ipswitch MA 01938 Gould Nat Battery Trenton NJ 08607 Cornel Dubiber Fuquay Varina NC 27526 K amp G Mtr New York NY Potter amp Brumfietd Pr
276. ter a nominal value of 1000 uF and enable calculation and display of the ratio measurement nominal then measurement results can be interpreted as though they were in units of mF although the ratio is really dimensionless and the unit indicators remain unlit In this example the measurement results can then be 199 99 200 00 200 01 etc For much larger capacitance the Digibridge will automatically move the decimal point up to 99999 mF i e 99 999 farads For still larger values you can make the nominal value larger For Very Small R L or C Another use of the ratio display is to obtain better resolution of very small values Otherwise the resolution can be no better than 00001 on the lowest range For example consider the measurement of some inductors with values near 20 nH Because the minimum measured value and the resolution limit also is 00001 mH the normal measurement results can only be 00000 00001 00002 00003 mH etc i e steps of 5096 of the 20 nH value However if you enter a nominal value of 001 mH and enable calculation and display of the ratio measurement nominal then measurement results can be interpreted as though they were in units of uH although the ratio is really dimensionless and the unit indicators remain unlit In this example the measurement results can then be 01999 02000 0 2001 etc i e steps of 0 5 which is very fine resolution By selecting a sufficiently small nominal value you c
277. terface message code for data transfer This table shows typical codes but does not repeat the entire ASCII code There is a more complete table in paragraph 2 8 Output Formats for RLC QDR and BIN NO Results Refer to Tables 3 11 through 3 13 for the formats of the output data RLC QDR bin number for the most recent measurement If output of results has been enabled by special function 2 as described above or Xl X9 command see paragraph 3 12 3 Table 3 17 the Digibridge sends data to the IEEE bus at the completion of each measurement sequence The character string for RLC value has the length of 17 characters for QDR value 17 characters for BIN NUMBER 10 characters including spaces carriage return and line feed characters 3 64 OPERATION NOTE For a description of the compacted binary data output format which saves time refer to paragraph 3 12 4 Table 3 10 ABBREVIATED INTERFACE MESSAGE CODE FOR TALK ONLY DATA TRANSFER Character Decimal ASCII Equiv DI08 DIO7 DIO6 DI05 DIO4 DIO3 DIO2 DIO1 A 65 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 B 66 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 C 67 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 mercer teens etc T2 1 49 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 2 50 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 3 51 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 terre crt eee etc FOOTNOTES FOR TABLE 3 11 Underrange generally occurs when the measured impedance is lower than the normal low limit for automatic range change and there is a lower impedance range Overrange generally occurs when the measured impedance is
278. that represents 2 impedances alternately the appropriate internal resistance standard Rs and the DUT Zx The phase sensitive dual slope detector and measurement counters convert this analog signal into digital form See circuit descriptions below From this information and criteria selected by the keyboard or remote control the microprocessor calculates the RLC and QDR values for display averaging bin assignments etc The 1689M Digibridge calculates faster than the 1689 Digibridge 4 2 THEORY on anans 19 2v IMR GOOD Some WYBOD 211v van DOWNY BOLGVOY Pysen venait Dae vio V ra wasirany l axnos O v 2INWL IO i 2a NODSNYEL urati g DO vv dO1224 530 A E 430 9 7 we f gt ADZs Ivu Sumvavono BOLYEDSLN OWENS P wo ranno gt asr A d d 3401s WIG 90123120 wol12s2739 9 sv 9 ana 32wnos daU awnings I a coo x 7 50123130 NWOLYHANAD 159 yaw on DNATA susine 70w noD Sets or a ean 33 3 amp ONIS SMe aS 1 jj i l io Ke wary amp 4 s A 9 1 1 vt Oa gt i 1 duy lt 3 no ino ron r Aet Hi PPN v zn z a D dg qe t IM 1 sae a E Bi zog AR I e i n re ogg mo sae H t Fg S lt j o a EY 7 Ags h i n ON wou oon INS mas t T 42853 z 39 39 gt 32 5 X x oes gd n 2 i a H e nO 0S Swe T eaniiantan Fo Awn waxes AdUDES n a9 t OwANO 3SVHd 0123130 swi v ore C S etn any AQWBINDD NOILLYBDSANI K2 m
279. the D or Q value is greater than 9999 ppm to obtain the value cancel DQ in PPM To cancel this selection use the same keystrokes again SHIFT DQ in PPM GO NO GO INDICATORS If comparison is enabled by a non zero entry for nominal value and limits in at least one bin a GO or NO GO indication is provided at the keyboard for every measurement If you are using the 1689 9605 remote test fixture a GO NO GO indication appears there also The display selection can be whatever you choose GO means the measurement falls in bin through 13 NO GO means bin 0 or 14 3 3 4 Units Multipliers and Blank Displays Units of R L and C are determined entirely by your selection of parameter Units multipliers are fixed by parameter range and frequency except that selection of delta changes the RLC display to a percentage See Table 3 2 Units of D and Q are dimensionless and are expressed as a decimal ratio without multiplier unless you select DQ IN PPM in which case D or Q is expressed in parts per million see below To obtain D or Q in percent from the regular display move the decimal point two places to the right For example a regular display of D 0045 is equivalent to 0 45 OPERATION 3 19 Table 3 2 UNITS AND MULTIPLIERS FOR EACH RANGE Freq Up to 0 1kHz From 0 1 to 6kHz From 6 to 20kHz Above 20kHz Range 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Parameter a LLL e mL R K K ohm ohm K K ohmohm K K ohm ohm K ohm ohm L
280. the OPEN and SHORT zeroing procedures have been executed properly paragraph 3 1 and the quick acquisition feature is NOT selected Typical accuracy is described below for convenience in obtaining a birds eye view of the way it relates to the principal test conditions instrument programming averaging and median value selection Refinement of the zeroing procedure to enhance accuracy for certain kinds of measurements is described in paragraphs 3 6 5 and 3 6 6 Cable related errors and their correction are described in paragraph 3 6 7 Paragraph 3 6 8 describes the use of signal reversing a special function to enhance accuracy whenever test frequency is the same as power line frequency 3 6 2 Accuracy for Some Typical Conditions Figure 3 9 For convenience in comparing the tradeoffs between speed and accuracy the accuracy is tabulated in Table 3 5 for the same frequencies and the results tabulated in the same arrangement as the measurement time tables The data also appear as a graph of speed vs accuracy for several frequencies in the accompanying figure Table 3 5 ACCURACY FOR A SET OF CONDITIONS COMPARABLE TO THOSE IN PREVIOUS TABLE Range 1 Basic Range Ranges 2 3 4 Basic Meas Test Freq kHz Meas Test Freq kHz Rate 0 1 1 10 100 Rate 0 1 1 10 100 Max 27 25 40 xx 96 Max 27 25 28 55 96 FAST 14 12 27 xx FAST 14 12 15 43 MED 07 05 20 xx MED 07 05 08 35 96 SLOV 04 02
281. the applicable MIL or EIA specifications Select parallel or series and the test frequency according to the applicable specifications If there are none known be sure to specify with your results whether they are parallel or series and what the measurement frequency was Suggested Test Conditions Capacitors less than 10 pF Parallel 10 KHz Capacitors from 10 to 400 pF Series or Parallel 10 KHz Capacitors from 400 pF to 1 uF Series 1 kHz Capacitors greater than 1 uF Series 0 1 or 0 12 kHz Unless otherwise specified or for special reasons always select series for capacitors and inductors This has traditionally been standard practice For very small capacitance select a higher measurement frequency for best accuracy Refer to paragraph 3 6 Conversely for very large capacitance select a lower measurement frequency for best accuracy Inductors less than 10 uH Series 100 kHz Inductors from 10 uH to 1 mH Series 10 kHz Inductors from 1 mH to 1 H Series 1 kHz Inductors greater than 1 H Series 0 1 KHz Select series as explained above For very small inductance select a higher measurement frequency for best accuracy Conversely for very large inductance select a lower measurement frequency for best accuracy Resistors below about 1 kilohm Series 1 kHz Usually the specifications call for dc resistance so select a low test frequency to minimize ac effects Select series because the reactive component
282. the display is delta or deltaRLC a negative indication means that the measured value is less than the reference stored nominal value and the parameter is probably correct For more information about both the NEG RLC and the NEG QDR indicators see paragraph 3 3 3 3 3 2 Equivalent Circuits Series Parallel The results of R L or C measurements of many components depend on which of two equivalent circuits is chosen to represent it series or parallel The more nearly pure the resistance or reactance the more nearly identical are the series and parallel values of the principal parameter However if D is high or Q low Cs differs substantially from Cp and Ls differs substantially from Lp and these values are frequency dependent Usually several measurements at frequencies near the desired evaluation will reveal that either series measurements are less frequency dependent than parallel or the converse The equivalent circuit that is less frequency dependent is the better model of the actual device We first give general rules for selection of measurement parameters then some of the theory Making The Selection The power up selection is series confirmed by the SERIES indicator being lit on the keyboard To change the selection press the EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT key 3 14 OPERATION Specifications The manufacturer or principal user of the DUT probably specifies how to measure it Usually series is specified Refer also to
283. to 1 11115 uF GenRad 1412 accuracy 0 5 Extender cable Adapt test fixture to type 874 connectors GenRad 1688 9600 Adaptors 2 req d Tee with type 874 connectors Gilbert 0874 9910 Extender cable Adapt test fixture to binding posts and GenRad 1657 9600 banana plugs Capacitor Four terminal ratio type 10 uF to GenRad 1417 9700 100 uF accuracy 0 25 Capacitor DC blocking 500 uF 10 V GE 69F2214G2 Capacitor Three terminal 1 uF acc 0 02 GenRad 1409 Y certified within 0 03 including effects of aging since last certification Resistor Decade 3 terminal 1 ohm to 1 Mohm GenRad 1433 H accuracy 0 01 Inductors Fixed 2 terminal 1 mH 0 1 GenRad 1482 E 100 nH 0 1 GenRad 1482 L 1H 0 1 GenRad 1482 P 10 H 0 1 GenRad 1482 T Gilbert Engineering Co Inc 5310 W Camelback Rd Glendale AZ 85301 5 8 ACCURACY VERIFICATION 5 8 1 General This procedure is a more rigorous alternative to the perfor nance verification described in paragraph 5 4 Precision standards of impedance are required for this procedure which checks the accuracy as well as the overall performance of the instrument It will be controlled from the front panrl without disassembly Table 5 6 lists the recommended standards and associated equipment For the C accuracy checks the standard is a precision decade capacitor 5 38 SERVICE Calibration of Standard The acceptable RLC readout min to max range may have to
284. tors facing forward Lock the connection with the 2 captive thumb screws The screws must be seated to complete the ground connection c Connect the BNC cable assembly to the Digibridge and to the remote test fixture as indicated in Table 3 1 Note that red designates leads that may be hot When bias is applied they carry dc negative voltage with respect to ground Table 3 1 REMOTE TEST FIXTURE CONNECTIONS VIA BNC CABLE Connection at Test Circuit Bias BNC Connector Color Code on 1689 9600 9605 Function Polarity at Digibridge 1689 9602 Cable Test Fixture IL current low Left Black I Left PL potential low Left center Black white P Left center PH potential high Right center Red white P Right center IH current high Right Red I Right Left and right are defined with the fixture oriented for reading the legend d For the 1689 9605 remote test fixture in order to activate the Start bar and the GO NO GO lights connect the 1689 2400 Remote Tester Cable supplied with the fixture as follows Connect one end to the HANDLER INTERFACE connector behind the instrument Connect the other end to a similar connector behind the fixture e Before making measurements be sure to repeat the zeroing procedure open circuit and short circuit as described in paragraph 3 1 3 NOTE User provided cables and or remote test fixtures can be used particularly if the DUT is to be handled automatically See paragraph
285. tricity whenever you handle a circuit board or integrated circuit in this instrument Refer to the beginning of Section 5 SERVICE 5 11 5 5 1 Disassembly of 1689 Digibridge Figures 5 1 through 5 9 Use the following procedure for access to replaceable parts and contact points used in trouble analysis For disassembly of 1689M model refer to paragraph 5 5 2 a Disconnect the power cord b Remove the top cover screws from the rear panel of the main chassis See Figure 5 1 These screws are slightly outboard from the ones designated for interface option or cover plate One of them is just to the right of the label EXTERNAL BIAS Slide the top cover forward about 6 mm so that its front corners are unhooked Lift it directly upward Figure 5 2 Reassembly note Install the cover without air filter using the 2 screws 13 mm long Then stuff the air filter into position through the air intake opening using your fingers press the edges and corners of the filter into position i Figure 5 2 Removal of the top cover from 1689 Digibridge The next step removal of display board is recommended before removal of the main circuit board c Remove the 2 support screws Figure 5 3 that hold the display board to its brackets Pull the board directly out of its socket in the main board Keep the display board in its original inclined plane until it is completely free Figure 5 4 Reassembly note 2 screws 6 mm long with washers d D
286. ts Active low Open collector drivers rated at 30 V max Each will sink 16 mA at 0 4 V External power and pull up resistors required Bin 0 through bin 9 10 lines Sorting outputs ACQ OVER 1 line indicates end of data acquisition Component may be removed see TEST TIME EOT 1 line indicates end of test Bin No is valid 2 Input Active low 0V VI 0 4V 2 5 V Vh lt 5 V Start 1 line Initiates new measurement High Speed Measurement Interface Option 1689 9820 Same as above option but also with high speed capability to increase measurement rate and five more sorting bins 15 lines open collector drives rated at 15 V max Each will sink 24 mA at 0 5 V See Measurement Rate specification above Environment Operating O to 50 degrees C 0 to 85 relative humidity Storage 40 to 74degrees C When the high speed option is used the operating temperature range is O to 40 degrees C Temperature Effects typical R L or C 5 ppm degree C Q or D 2 ppm degree C 3 ppm degree C x frequency in kHz All specifications refer to 23degree C calibration temperature Power 90 to 125 V or 180 to 250 V AC 50 to 60 Hz Voltage selected by rear panel switch 50 watts maximum 40 watts typical When the high speed option is used the maximum power is 60 watts Mechanical DIMENSIONS W x H x D 1689 14 781 x 4 40 x 13 50 in 375 4 x 111 8 x 342 9 mm WEIGHT 13 Ibs 5 9 kg 1689M 17 25 x 5 625 x
287. ts for Inductors Even though it is customary to measure series inductance of inductors there are situations in which the parallel equivalent circuit better represents the physical device For small air core inductors the significant loss mechanism is usually ohmic or copper loss in the wire and the series circuit is appropriate 3 16 OPERATION However if there is an iron core the significant loss mechanism may be core loss caused by eddy currents and hysteresis and the parallel equivalent circuit is appropriate being a better model of the inductor Whether this is true at any particular frequency should be determined by an understanding of the DUT but probably it is so if the following is true that measurements of Lp at two frequencies near the frequency of interest differ from each other less than do measurements of Ls at the same two frequencies 3 3 3 Results Displayed PRINCIPAL MEASUREMENT RESULTS The principal Digibridge measurement will be presented on the left RLC part of the display panel in one of four ways VALUE deltaRLC delta or BIN No only one way for any single measurement VALUE Selected by the DISPLA Y Key This measurement provides two displays the principal one is RLC resistance inductance or capacitance and the secondary one is QDR quality factor with R or 1 either dissipation factor or resistance with C The VALUE selection is the power up default and one of the selections of the DIS
288. uited Press keys Cs D 1 6 8 9 7 SHIFT OPEN Keep hands and objects at least 10 cm 4 in from test fixture Press START button Wait for GO light b Short Circuit Short the fixture with a clean copper wire AWG 18 to 30 Press 1 6 8 9 SHIFT SHORT Press START button Wait for GO light Note For best accuracy repeat this procedure every day and after any change of test fixture adaptors 4 MEASUREMENT a Verify or select measurement conditions as follows indicated by keyboard lights press the adjacent key to change a selection Function MEASURE FUNCTION key Display VALUE DISPLAY key Measure rate SLOW MEASURE RATE key Measure mode TRIGGERED MEASURE MODE key Equivalent circuit SERIES EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT key b To measure C and D of a Capacitor C Range 0001 pF to 99999 uF D range 0001 to 9999 Press Cs D Place capacitor in test fixture Press START The RLC display shows Cs series capacitance and units uF nF pF the QDR display shows D dissipation factor if NEG RLC is lit DUT is inductive c To measure C and R of an Capacitor C range 00001 nFto 99999 uF R range 0001 Q to 9999 kN Press Cs Rs Place capacitor in test fixture Press START The RLC display shows Cs series capacitance and units uF NF the QDR display shows Rs equivalent series resistance and units Q KN If NEG RLC is lit DUT is inductive d To measure L and Q o
289. ulation of delta delta RLC etc f To measure a DUT with bin sorting e Press the FUNCTION key to select MEASURE e Press the DISPLAY key to select BIN NO e Insert the DUT e If the measure mode is TRIGGERED press the START button Observe GO NO GO and bin number results NO GO indicates either QDR failure bin 0 or RLC failure bin 14 See also paragraph 3 1 4 For continued operation of the Digibridge in MEASURE function using the limits entered as above you can select any desired display such as VALUE or BIN No with the DISPLAY key If you have the interface option the available output data are not limited to the display selection The GO NO GO lights will operate unless you inhibit comparisons See below 3 8 4 Verification or Nominal and Limit Values While the function is ENTER the exact values entered into the Digibridge can be seen by either of 2 methods as follows During the Entry Process A confirming display is automatically provided immediately after the final keystroke of each entry step For example after the NOM VALUE keystroke the entered value appears on the RLC display After the BIN NO and number keystrokes the actual limits of RLC value not percentages appear across the full display area upper limit on the regular RLC display lower limit 4 most significant digits in the regular QDR display area For bin 0 the QDR limit appears in the QDR area 3 52 OPERATION Upon Demand To se
290. up The effect depends on what is connected to the EXTERNAL BIAS connector and what is in the test fixture This switch must be OFF to assure normal power up routines also check to make sure that the charged capacitor protective fuse has not blown Item 11 Figure 1 3 the effect is similar The Digibridge separately squares the measurements of 4 component voltages a quadrature pair across the DUT and a pair across the internal standard resistor The squares are summed to represent the square of the applied voltage essentially the open circuit voltage from the SERMCE 5 31 HIGH terminals of the test fixture to ground To normalize this result it is divided by the square of the zero measurement See 66666 XXXX above The ideal value for XXXX is about 0 64 If it is less than 0 250 or more than 1 000 this test fails ANALYSIS PROCEDURE See below depends on the failure display which is coded to indicate test voltage high or low and range of the failed test 555 50000 Confirming symptoms If you press START repeatedly until the instrument completes its self check the BIAS ON indicator will be lit even though the EXTERNAL BIAS switch is OFF no bias is applied and INT BIAS has not been selected The fault is probably in the 6 wire connection between keyboard and main board Check to be sure that the cable connector properly engages all 6 pins at the keyboard 5555 XXXX Low voltage 75 mV rms range 4 If XX XX is less than 0 250 ch
291. ure for access to replaceable parts and contact points used in trouble analysis a Disconnect the power cord Optionally remove the bail from the front feet by bending it temporarily It is springy enough to resume its former shape b For access to the bottom of the main board without further disassembly remove the access panel from the bottom of the instrument Note this panel is held by ten screws and covers a major part of the bottom area c Remove the four rubber or plastic feet one screw for each rear foot two screws for each front foot Notice that the front feet are not interchangeable 5 18 SERVICE d Remove the foam plastic air filter from its holder in the right side of the cabinet Reassembly note Stuff the air filter into position through the air intake opening using your fingers press the edges and corners of the filter into position e Slide the instrument forward or cover to the rear until they are separated Reassembly note slide the cover on until the rear feet mounting holes in the cover are aligned with corresponding holes in the chassis f Remove the interface option if you have one after removing the 2 large screws with resilient washers in the rear panel See Figure 1 2 If the panel held by these screws is blank leave it in place Reassembly note align board edges carefully with connector and guide that are inside of instrument while pushing interface option into position Refer also to parag
292. ut of U3 8 Vdc regulated At input center terminal of U3 13 8 Vdc when primary voltage is 115 Vrms between terminals 1 and 2 of transformer TI Across WT7 to WT8 11 3 Vrms 3 Check power line circuit to primary of transformer V TI b Make a check similar to step a with ribbon cable connected ground reference at front edge of MB board near the test fixture probing MB J5 from below the board referring to Figure 6 4 This checks for overload outside the power supply 5 7 5 Sinewave Generator Checks Check the MB board circuits that supply the test signals to the DUT as follows a Perform the zeroing procedure both open circuit and short circuit as described in paragraph 5 9 2 of the recalibration procedure b Make the following test setup and keyboard selections FUNCTION MEASURE DISPLAY VALUE MEASURE RATE SLOW MEASURE MODE CONT EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT SERIES c Install a 10 kilohm resistor as the DUT d Use an oscilloscope to verify that the signal at the right hand end of the DUT in the test fixture is a sine wave as follows For scope ground return connect to the ground plane on the circuit board or via a 6 32 screw to the tapped hole in the left hand end of the test fixture Frequency 1 kHz Amplitude approx 1 5 Vpk pk e If no fault appears in steps a through d skip to paragraph 5 7 6 SERVICE 5 35 NOTE The prefix MB for main board is omitted in the following tex
293. val a e can be less than 15 ms the cycle ag can be less than 40 ms refer to paragraph 3 5 for details Set up the handler either of two ways indexing on EOT or indexing on ACQ as follows The handler must supply a signal here called start next measurement when it has completed connection of the DUT to the test fixture Indexing on EOT Set up the handler to respond to the EOT signal from the Digibridge which occurs at the end of test when the bin assignment is available for sorting Set up the Digibridge to receive its START signal from the handler s start next measurement signal This setup is simpler than the one below NOTE The Digibridge requires that a non zero value be entered for nominal value to enable generation of the EOT signal and indication by the GO NO GO lights see paragraphs 3 8 3 3 8 4 Indexing on ACQ Set up the handler to respond to the ACQ OVER signal from the Digibridge which occurs when the data acquisition is complete The handler can then remove the DUT from the test fixture and replace it with another DUT while the Digibridge is calculating the result In addition set up an interface that provides a START signal to the Digibridge by logical combination of the EOT signal from the Digibridge AND the start next measurement signal from the handler Indexing on ACQ results in higher measurement rate than indexing on EOT Be sure the TALK switch is set to TALK ONLY if the IEEE 488 bus is not used
294. voltages may be present inside this instrument Do not open the case Refer servicing to qulified personnel HIGH VOLTAGES MAY BE PRESENT AT THE TERMINALS OF THIS INSTRUMENT WHENEVER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES gt 45 V ARE USED TAKE ALL MEASURES TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH ANY LIVE COMPONENTS USE MAXIMUM INSULATION AND MINIMIZE THE USE OF BARE CONDUCTORS WHEN USING THIS INSTRUMENT Use extreme caution when working with bare conductors or bus bars WHEN WORKING WITH HIGH VOLTAGES POST WARNING SIGNS AND KEEP UNREQUIRED PERSONNEL SAFELY AWAY N CAUTION N DO NOT APPLY ANY VOLTAGES OR CURRENTS TO THE TERMINALS OF THIS INSTRUMENT IN EXCESS OF THE MAXIMUM LIMITS INDICATED ON THE FRONT PANEL OR THE OPERATING GUIDE LABEL Instruction Manual Changes These supplementary pages contain information of improvements or modifications not documented in the current manual All references to GenRad in the manual now apply to QuadTech Inc Page v Table of Contents Parts Lists and Diagrams Section 6 e Power supply assembly board layout and schematic pages 6 15 amp 6 16 replaced by Power supply assembly part number 700011 Page xii Specifications High Speed Measurement Interface Option Environment Power amp Mechanical e Part Number for High Speed Measurement Interface Option should be 1689 9630 e Power should be 90 250Vac 50 60 Hz Voltage switching is automatic and no longer selected by rear panel switch 60 watts
295. w refers to increasing measured value which is the direction of increasing range number only if the principal measured parameter is capacitance Similarly the word lower as used below refers to decreasing measured value which is the direction of decreasing range number only if the principal measured parameter is capacitance Extensions Each of the 4 ranges goes beyond its basic range with both upper and lower range extensions also called overrange and underrange Most of these extensions are seldom used because they overlap basic portions of other ranges and the Digibridge will automatically select the basic range unless you have selected hold range see RANGE HELD indicator Measurement units and multipliers in any range extension are the same as in the basic range The fact that range definition depends on frequency causes a considerable variation in the width of range extensions The lower limit is generally 00001 with all zeros next the upper limit is 99999 with all blanks next Blanks in the measurement display are discussed below In general for any measurement within the specifications of the Digibridge if a measurement can be displayed it will be The only range extensions that are valid with autoranging are low underrange and high overrange explained below Low Underrange The low extension of the low range goes down to 1 count with reduced accuracy The smallest I count increment in the display is the minimum measured va
296. wer transformer primary windings can be switched by means of the line voltage switch on the rear panel to accommodate ac line voltages in either of 2 ranges as labeled at a frequency of 50 or 60 Hz nominal Making sure that the power cord is disconnected use a small screwdriver to set this switch to match the measured voltage of your power line If your line voltage is in the lower range connect the 3 wire power cable P IN 4200 0300 to the power connector on the rear panel Figure 1 2 and then to the power line The instrument is fitted with a power connector that is in conformance with the International Electrotechnical Commission publication 320 The 3 flat contacts are surrounded by a cylindrical plastic shroud that reduces the possibility of electrical shock whenever the power cord is being unplugged from the instrument In addition the center ground pin is longer which means that it mates first and disconnects last for user protection This panel connector is a standard 3 pin grounding type receptacle the design of which has been accepted world wide for electronic instrumentation The connector is rated for 250 V at 6 A The receptacle accepts power cords fitted with the Belden type SPH 386 connector The associated power cord for use with that receptacle for line voltages up to 125 V is GenRad part no 4200 0300 It is a 200 cm 6 5 ft 3 wire 18 gage cable with connector bodies molded integrally with the jacket The connector at the
297. y The dc value of the multiplier output is proportional to the product of signal magnitude multiplied by the cosine of the phase angle between the test signal and the reference sine wave The dual slope converter includes these three stages dual slope integrator comparator and counter all controlled by the microprocessor through PIAs In the dual slope integrator a capacitor is charged for a controlled integration time interval sampling at a rate proportional to the multiplier output voltage This capacitor is then discharged at a fixed rate the deintegration slope to zero voltage a condition that is sensed by a comparator See signal name CMP L on the block diagram Thus the integrator and comparator transform the sampled dc output from the multiplier into a precise interval of time The dual slope measurement counter is gated by this time interval thus converting it into a digital number which is a principal data input to the microprocessor If the integration time is relatively long so that the integration capacitor voltage reaches a certain reference level another comparator triggers the beginning of the return deintegration slope before sampling has been completed See signal name BIG L on block diagram The detector is then sampling and converting simultaneously for a portion of the dual slope conversion cycle Data Acquisition Time Data acquisition time includes pauses for synchronization and several integration deint
298. y if there is even once during a measurement a converter detector malfunction such that the integrator s conversion cannot be completed There are two versions of this failure 22222 2222 The cycle is too long Integrator voltage does not return to zero in reasonable time 22222 1111 The cycle is too short Integrator voltage was already zero or wrong polarity when conversion began 3 13 4 Failure Display due to LC Resonance A display of 0 14 or 22222 1111 can occur in place of the expected L and Q because the inductor being measured resonates with measuring circuit capacitance Resonance can cause an overload of the converter detector The Digibridge thus presents an easily noticed failure display rather than an invalid measurement result When Expected This resonance effect can be expected when large values of inductance are being measured at high frequency In particular if the Digibridge is autoranging this effect can be expected in range 1 under any of the following 4 equivalent conditions A representative value of L that will cause selection of range 1 is indicated in parentheses beside each condition 3 82 OPERATION 1 Without extender cable f gt 3 8 kHz L gt 1 H at 4 kHz 2 With 1688 9600 cable 874 connectors f gt 2 8 kHz L gt 1 3 H at 3 kHz 3 With 1657 9600 cable banana plugs f gt 1 1 kHz L 3 Hat 1 2 kHz 4 With 1689 9602 cable BNC BNC f gt 2 kHz L gt 2 H at 2 kHz
299. ys its parameters R L or C and D Q or R A front panel keyboard is used to select and program measurement and test conditions The test signal is programmabie from 5 mV to 1 26 V and from 12 Hz to 100 kHz Default conditions are 1 V 1 kHz Capacitors under test can be biased with 2 V internal d c or up to 60 V external Source Consult the instruction manual for details about operation accuracy specifications and service 2 START UP a Set line voltage switch rear panel to power line voltage b If the Digibridge includes an optional IEEE 488 interface set TALK switch rear panel to TALK ONLY unless instructions are to be received through the IEEE 488 bus C Switch EXTERNAL BIAS OFF front panel d Connect power cord to source of proper voltage e Press POWER button in Self check codes will show briefly f Wait until keyboard lights indicate MEASURE VALUE SLOW SERIES If a fault is detected measurements are blocked and an error code remains displayed See manual paragraph 3 13 If keyboard lights remain dark keyboard is locked To unlock it see manual paragraph 3 9 To switch power off press POWER button and release 3 ZEROING Before measurement zero the Digibridge as follows amp Open Circuit The MEASURE keyboard light should be lit Press MEASURE MODE key to select TRIGGERED mode If any test fixture adaptors are to be used install and position them for use Be sure that test fixture is open circ

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Herramientas eléctricas      SM-BH80-SB SM-BH63  Bedienungsanleitung der Baureihe 85 zum  AA-810    Notice-HPP-21-Plus-web - MRC  NEC MultiSync LCD225WXM - Flat panel display - TFT - 22" - widescreen - 1680 x 1050 / 60 Hz  Fotografia publicitaria - Universidad Complutense de Madrid  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file